Home

User Guide - v3.6r1 DSP56xxx Toolchain C Compiler

1. Returns the result Example Complex ca cb cc cc cdiv ca cb Code move x Fca b move x Fcarl a move x Fcb x0 move x Fcbrl xl1 jsr F_cdiv _cdiv ca cb move a x Fcc4l cc move b x Fcc 2 0 _cmac _complex _cmac _complex opl _complex op2 _complex op3 Complex multiply and accumulate Calculate op op2 op3 generating MAC instructions Returns the result Example _complex ca cb cc cd cd _cmac ca cb cc 3 48 Code move move move move move move mac macr mac macr move move _cmul Ecompiltc enm we NC com ot nM e TON Fca b Fcatl a Fcb x0 Fcbrl xl Fcc y0 x Fccrtl yl x0 y0 b xl yl x0 yl a x1 y0 a apX Fcc L gt OG Dr i FOG 2 GC NON NON X o Complex multiplication Returns Example the result complex ca cb cc cc cmul ca cb Code move move move move mpy macr mpy macr move move x Fca x0 x Fcartl xl x Fcb y0 x Fcbtl yl x0 y0 b xl yl b x0 yl a x1 y0 a a Ki Foot PoC b x Fcc s ce complex op2 Chapter 3 Language Implementation _csub Mcomplex esu complex opi complice or NN Complex subtraction Subtract operand op2 from op7 Returns the result Example Complex ca cb cc cc _csub ca cb Code move move Fca b Fcarl a move x Fcb x0 move x Fcbrl xl sub x0 b sub xl a move a x Fccrtl gt XO move b
2. move 2 y 1 Mn copy Xn m AU 7 m Ar 7 m yr 0 amp array 2 1 amp array 4 i 2 BLOCKSIZE Generated code move Farray t20 r0 move Farrayt40 rl do 120 copy move y r0 n6 move n6 y rl _copy Language Implementation 3 39 Example 7 The register used in the assembly template can be changed with a modifier which is placed between the and the number of the parameter This way you can use partial registers and tell the compiler to reserve the complete register The following example swaps the two halves of a long An accumulator is used as the input to the function because the function parameter will be passed in A A work register is chosen from the alu register set void swap halves long li asm move e0 1 move h0 0 move 1 h0 D li Cr return li 0 1 i Generated code Fswap halves move al x0 move a0 a move x0 a0 rts Example 8 Mn n n When a modulo register is used in the template it must be restored to the default value 1 linear addressing mode after use The modifier v can be used to select the modifier register associated with an address register void circ get int p int result asm move 24 1 vl move x 1 0 move 1 v1 D result return result An xn NT A p 3 40 Chapter 3 i Generated code
3. idxt void main void int parm pragma pack strings make packed strings of all string constants printpstring Continue Y N parm getchar printpstring Action printpstring parm Y Stopping pragma nopack strings Continuing The sizeof packed char is one just like sizeof char This implies that pointer arithmetic on pointers to packed strings goes per three characters Example 3 packed char p 123456789 char n 123456789 char c c pstr get p 1 c will be ptt c pstr get p 1 c will be c nj c will be ntt c nj c will be rae mye 3 80 Chapter 3 3 19 STRUCTURE TAGS A tag declaration is intended to specify the lay out of a structure or union If a memory type is specified it is considered to be part of the declarator A tag name itself nor its members can be bound to any storage area although members having type pointer to do reguire one A tag may then be used to declare objects of that type and may allocate them in different memories if that declaration is in the same scope The following example illustrates this constraint struct S X int i referring to storage not correct _P char p used to specify target memory correct In the example above c56 ignores the erroneous _X storage specifier without displaying a warning message 3 20 TYPED
4. Go to the directory on which the CD ROM is mounted cd cdrom To install or upgrade all products at once issue the following command dpkg i sw deb This will install or upgrade all products in a subdirectory of the default installation directory usr local Software Installation 1 7 1 3 3 TAR GZ INSTALLATION 1 Login as a user Be sure you have read write and execute permissions in the installation directory Otherwise login as root or use the su command 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Mount the CD ROM on a directory for example cdrom See the Linux manual pages about mount for details 3 Go to the directory on which the CD ROM is mounted cd cdrom 4 To install the products from the tar gz files in the directory usr local issue the following command for each product tar xzf SWproduct version tar gz C usr local Every tar gz file creates a single directory in the directory where it is extracted 1 3 4 SETTING THE ENVIRONMENT After you have installed the software you can set some environment variables to make invocation of the tools easier A list of all environment variables used by the toolchain is present in the section Environment Variables in the chapter Overview Make sure that your path is set to include all of the executables you have just installed The environment variable TMPDIR can be used to specify a directory where programs can place temporary files 1 8 Ch
5. Tbe System Properties dialog appears 2 Select the Environment tab 3 In the Variable edit field enter C563INC 4 In the Value edit field enter c Nc563Ninclude 5 Click on the Set button then click OK Example Windows XP 2000 1 Rright click on the My Computer icon on your desktop and select Properties Tbe System Properties dialog appears Software Installation 1 5 2 Select the Advanced tab 3 Click on the Environment Variables button Tbe Environment Variables dialog appears 4 Inthe System variables field click on the New button Tbe New System Variable dialog appears 5 In the Variable name field enter C563INC 6 Inthe Variable value field enter c Nc563Ninclude 7 Click on the OK button to accept the changes and close the dialogs 1 3 INSTALLATION FOR LINUX Each product on the CD ROM is available as an RPM package Debian package and as a gzipped tar file For each product the following files are present SWproduct version RPMrelease i386 rpm swproduct version release i386 deb SWproduct version tar gz These three files contain exactly the same information so you only have to install one of them When your Linux distribution supports RPM packages you can install the rpm file For a Debian based distribution you can use the deb file Otherwise you can install the product from the tar gz file 1 3 1 RPM INSTALLATION 1 In most situations you have to be root
6. i Setup Licenses Diagnostics About m Controls License Manager Service Name FLEXIm License Manager for TASKING Start Starts Up the License Server Status Stop Stops the License Server License Manager Status Cancel From the Control tab you can start stop and check the status of your license server Select the Setup tab to enter information about your license server FLEXIm License Manager x Control Licenses Diagnostics About r Setup of License Manager Service Name FLEXIm License Manager for TASKING Imgrd exe p e Mlexim bin lmgrd exe License File ses Je Mlexim icense dat Debug Log Je Mexim icense log File Browse v Start Server at Power Up v Use NT Services Remove Cancel A 24 Appendix A Select the Control tab and click the Start button to start your license server lmgrd exe will be launched as a background application with the license file and debug log file locations passed as parameters If you want Imgrd exe to start automatically on NT select the Use NT Services check box and Imgrd exe will be installed as an NT service Next select the Start Server at Power UP check box The Licenses tab provides information about the license file and the Advanced tab allows you to perform diagnostics and check versions Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 25 4 THE DAEMON LOG FILE The FLEXI
7. Chapter 3 Code L3 dc 000001 org py ptext L4 bclr 0 x L3 _sema_clr jcc L4 bset 0 x L3 _sema_set rts _sema_set int _sema_set volatile int p int bitnumber This function sets a semaphore a bitin a volatile int field pointed to by p bitmumber must be an integral constant expression and should not exceed the width of an int in the DSP program It can either be used to set a semaphore ignoring the result or to test and set a semaphore result contains previous state Returns the previous state of the semaphore Example typedef volatile int semaphore_t void f void static semaphore_t flag 0 while _sema_set amp flag O wait until we set flag ourselves code to handle device _sema_clr amp flag O free device for other processes Code L3 dc 000001 org p ptext L4 bset 0 x L3 Sema set jcs L4 bclr 0 x L3 _sema_clr rts Language Implementation 3 63 sema tst int sema tst volatile int p int bitnumber This function tests a semaphore a bit in a volatile int field pointed to by p It does not change the state of the semaphore bitmumber must be an integral constant expression and should not exceed the width of an int in the DSP program Returns the current state of the semaphore Example typedef volatile int semaphore t semaphore t dev started set by other routines void f void while
8. Overview 27 Expression simplification Multiplication by 0 or 1 and additions or subtractions of 0 are removed Such useless expressions may be introduced by macros or by the compiler itself e g array subscription Logical expression optimization Expressions involving amp amp series of conditional jumps and are interpreted and translated into a Loop rotation With for and while loops the expression is evaluated once at the top and then at the bottom of the loop This optimization does not save code but speeds up execution Switch optimization A number of optimizations of a switch statement are performed such as the deletion of redundant case labels or even the deletion of the switch Control flow optimization By reversing jump conditions and moving code the number of jump instructions is minimized This reduces both the code size and the execution time Jump chaining A conditional or unconditional jump to a label which is immediately followed by an unconditional jump may be replaced by a jump to the destination label of the second jump This optimization does not save code but speeds up execution Remove useless jumps An unconditional jump to a label directly following the jump is removed A conditional jump to such a label is replaced by an evaluation of the jump condition The evaluation is necessary because it may have side effects Conditional jump reversal
9. Ya B 7 5 Running Examples from EDE uu B 8 INDEX XI XII CONTENTS Table of Contents Manual Purpose and Structure XIII MANUAL PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE PURPOSE This manual is aimed at users of the TASKING DSP5600x DSP563xx and DSP566xx Family C Cross Compiler It assumes that you are familiar with the C language MANUAL STRUCTURE Related Publications Conventions Used In This Manual 1 Software Installation Describes the installation of the C Cross Compiler for the DSP56xxx family of processors 2 Overview Provides an overview of the TASKING DSP56xxx Family toolchain and gives you some familiarity with the different parts of it and their relationship A sample session explains how to build a DSP56xxx application from your C file 3 Language Implementation Concentrates on the approach of the DSP56xxx architecture and describes the language implementation The C language itself is not described in this document We recommend The C Programming Language second edition by B Kernighan and D Ritchie 1988 Prentice Hall 4 Compiler Use Deals with control program and C compiler invocation command line options and pragmas 5 Compiler Diagnostics Describes the exit status and error warning messages of the compilers 6 Libraries Contains the library functions supported by the compilers and describes their interface and header files XIV Manual Purpose and Structure e
10. _swi SWI c56 or TRAP c563 software interrupt 3 43 3 44 Chapter 3 Function Description _vsl Viterbi shift left c563 only _wait WAIT wait mode saves power consumption Table 3 6 Intrinsic functions Prototypes for the intrinsic functions are present in c56 hc Below are the details of the implemented intrinsic functions in alphabetical order sample C source with generated assembly are given below abs int _abs int operand Absolute integer value Generate ABS instruction Returns the result Example volatile int ia ib ia _abs ib Code move x SS_main 23 b ib abs Db _abs ib move bl x ss_mainr24 ia asm void _asm const char asm This function can be used to generate inline assembly The asm argument must be a string constant with valid assembly code The compiler will prefix the string with a tab For more information see section 3 12 1 Using the asm Intrinsic Function Returns nothing Language Implementation 3 45 Example define SAVEINTSTAT asm move SR X r2 _asm ori 03 MR SAVEINTSTAT Code move SR X r2 ori 03 MR asm void __asm const char instruction_template output_param_list 8 inpune Treue Liet regsave This function can be used to generate inline assembly with parameter passing The Znstruction template argument must be a string constant with valid
11. cmul complex multiplication csub complex division ext Extend high order part of accumulator for unsigned chars and shorts Language Implementation Function Description _fabs Absolute value of _ fract argument _ fract2int Convert _fract to int _ fsgrt Generate a JSR to the run time library function Rfsqrt _ int2fract Convert int to _ fract _labs Absolute value of long argument Ifabs Absolute value of long _ fract argument _ lfract2long Convert long _ fract to long _ long2lfract Convert long to long _ fract _memcpy Copy block of memory Compact memcpy replacement _memset Fill block of memory Compact memset replacement nop NOP instruction not optimized away pdiv Calculates a b inline when it is known that a and b are both positive pflush Flush cache _pflushun Flush unlocked sectors _ pfree Global unlock _ plock Lock 1 sector in cache _ punlock Unock 1 sector in cache _rol Rotate left _ror Rotate right _round Specifies rounding fractional arithmetic operations _sema_clr Clear semaphore _sema_set Set semaphore _sema_tst Test semaphore _ stop STOP stop mode saves power consumption _ stremp String compare Compact strcmp replacement _ strcpy String copy Compact strcpy replacement _ strlen String length Compact strlen replacement
12. menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Undefine one or more predefined macros by disabling the corresponding check box Ea Uname Arguments The name macro you want to undefine Description Remove any initial definition of identifier name as in undef unless it is a predefined ANSI standard macro ANSI specifies the following predefined symbols to exist which cannot be removed _ FILE _ LINE _ TIME _ _ DATE _ STDC current source filename current source line number int type hh mm ss Mmm dd yyyy level of ANSI standard This macro is set to 1 when the option to disable language extensions A is effective Whenever language extensions are excepted STDC is set to 0 zero When c563 is invoked also the following predefined symbols exist C56 MODEL predefined symbol to identify the compiler This symbol can be used to flag parts of the source which must be recognized by the TASKING c56 or c563 compiler only It expands to the version number of the compiler identifies for which memory model the module is compiled It expands to a single character r for reentrant m for mixed s for static 16 for 16 bit 1624 for 16 24 bit or 24 for 24 bit that can be tested by the preprocessor See section Memory Models for details 4 78 i _DEFMEM DSP _STKMEM USP Chapter 4 identifies the default data memory See section Memory Models
13. return i warning W 184 empty pragma name in z option ignored The z option requires a pragma name I 185 prototype synthesized at line number in name This is an informational message containing the source file position where an old style prototype was synthesized This message is preceded by error E 146 W 147 W 148 W 150 E 154 W 182 or E 203 5 28 Chapter 5 186 array of type bit is not allowed An array cannot contain bit type variables 187 illegal structure definition A structure can only be defined initialized if its members are known So struct unknown s 0 is not allowed 188 structure containing bit type fields is forced into bitaddressable area This error occurs when you use a bitaddressable storage type for a structure containing bit type members 189 pointer is forced to bitaddressable pointer to bitaddressable is illegal A pointer to bitaddressable memory is not allowed 190 long float changed to float In ANSI C floating point constants are treated having type double unless the constant has the suffix f If you have specified an option to use float constants a long floating point constant such as 123 12 1 is changedtoa float 191 recursive struct union definition A struct or union cannot contain itself The following example generates this error struct s struct s a b error 192 missing filename after f option The f option requires a fi
14. 22 Chapter 4 e Option Q EDE always removes the output file on errors Ea e Description Remove the output file when an error has occurred With this option the make utility always does the proper productions Example c563 e test c Compiler Use 4 23 err Option 92 In EDE this option is not useful BE err Description Write errors to the file source err instead of stderr Example To write errors to the test err instead of stderr enter c563 err test c 4 24 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option tothe Additional options field E f file Arguments _ A filename for command line processing The filename denote standard input may be used to Description 2 Use file for command line processing To get around the limits on the size of the command line it is possible to use command files These command files contain the options that could not be part of the real command line Command files can also be generated on the fly for example by the make utility More than one f option is allowed Some simple rules apply to the format of the command file It is possible to have multiple arguments on the same line in the command file To include whitespace in the argument surround the argument with either single or double guotes If single or double guotes are to b
15. 4 or greater than or equal to the precision otherwise uses f n int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument This should be a pointer to an integer in default memory No value is printed p pointer hexadecimal 32 bit value No argument is converted a is printed Table 6 2 Printf conversion characters To print fractional numbers the value can be cast to a 1oat and printed as a float For single precision fractional numbers the printed value is exact for long _ fract it is rounded If you need more precision when printing long fract values you can print them in hexadecimal form include stdio h _fract fvalue 0 987654321 long fract lfvalue float 1 0 3 void main void printf fvalue is 8 6fWMn float fvalue printf lfvalue is 8 6f n float lfvalue printf lfvalue in hex is 121x n _lfract2long lfvalue putc include lt stdio h gt Me PETE ime WINE nee Ye T Puts one character onto the given stream d gt See also write Returns EOF on error 6 45 6 46 Chapter 6 i putcbar finclude stdio h HIME Jonee Gm J Puts one character onto standard output d gt See also _write Returns the character written or EOF on error puts tineclude lt Sic cln n gt ME UES COMmsic cime eg yp Writes the string to stdout the string is terminated by a newline
16. 7 Run time Environment Describes the run time environment for a DSP56xxx C application It deals with items like assembly language interfacing C startup code and stack heap size 8 Support for User designed Target Boards Contains the steps you have to take to support user designed target boards APPENDICES A Flexible License Manager FLEXlm Contains a description of the Flexible License Manager B Motorola Compatibility Describes the interoperability between the TASKING and Motorola tool sets It describes how to create a Motorola CLAS COFF object file and how to link CLAS COFF object files and libraries INDEX Manual Purpose and Structure XV RELATED PUBLICATIONS C Standards The C Programming Language second edition by B Kernighan and D Ritchie 1988 Prentice Hall e ANSI X3 159 1989 standard ANSI TASKING Tools e DSP56xxx Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Guide TASKING MA039 000 00 00 e DSP56xxx CrossView Pro Debugger User s Guide TASKING MA039 049 00 00 Core Reference Manuals e DSP56000 Digital Signal Processor Family Manual Motorola Inc e DSP560xx Digital Signal Processor User s Manual Motorola Inc e DSP56300 24 Bit Digital Signal Processor Family Manual Motorola Inc e DSP5623xx 24 Bit Digital Signal Processor User s Manual Motorola Inc e DSP56L307 24 Bit Digital Signal Processor User s Manual Motorola Inc e DSP56600 Digital Signal
17. MA039 002 00 00 Doc ver 1 24 DSP56xxx v3 6 C CROSS COMPILER USER S GUIDE all TASKING A publication of Altium BV Documentation Department Copyright O 2008 Altium BV All rights reserved Reproduction in whole or part is prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner TASKING is a brand name of Altium Limited The following trademarks are acknowledged FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Globetrotter Software Inc Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola Inc MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation SUN is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of X Open Company Ltd All other trademarks are property of their respective owners Data subject to alteration without notice http www tasking com http www altium com The information in this document bas been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate and reliable However Altium assumes no liabilities for inaccuracies in this document Furthermore tbe delivery of this information does not convey to the recipient any license to use or copy the software or documentation except as provided in an executed license agreement covering the software and documentation Altium reserves the right to change specifications embodied in this document without prior notice TABLE OF CONTENTS ail TASKING SLNAL
18. Or the number of digits printed after the decimal point only for floating point conversions Or the minimum number of digits to be printed for an integer conversion Instead of a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A length modifier h P or L h indicates that the argument is to be treated as a short or unsigned short number I should be used if the argument is a long integer L indicates that the argument is a long double Flags length specifier period precision and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following 96 is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Printed as d i int signed decimal o int unsigned octal x X int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase respectively u int unsigned decimal C int single character converted to unsigned char s S char or packed char respectively the characters from the string or packed string respectively are printed until a NULL character is found When the given precision is met before printing will also stop f double eE double m dddddde xx or m ddddddExxx where the number of d s is specified by the precision Libraries Character Printed as g G double uses 96e or E if the exponent is less than
19. Returns the length in number of characters of the packed string pointed to by p This is the number of characters when the string would be unpacked _urite include lt stdio h gt size_t _write int fd char base size_t size Low level block output function This function writes a block of data to the given stream It is used by all output functions The delivered library is targeted at TASKING or Motorola FSS File System Simulation The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function must be customized to perform I O on different file systems When not customized it will use _iowrite Returns the number of characters correctly written Libraries 6 21 abort include lt stdlib h gt wedl elsxoxsiE wedl RB Terminates the program abnormally It calls the function _exit which is defined in the start up module Returns nothing abs finclude lt stdlib h gt Lat ele Ame in g Returns the absolute value of the signed int argument acos finclude lt math h gt double eer ceu eM pg Returns the arccosine cos l x of x in the range 0 1 x 1 1 asctime finclude lt time h gt leue eu ae COMSIE NOE im WS p Converts the time in the structure tp into a string of the form Mon Jan 21 16 15 14 1989 n 0 Returns the time in string form 6 22 Chapter 6 asin finclude lt math h gt double asin double x Returns the arcsine si
20. The top level daemon logs this message when one of the child daemons dies RESERVE feature for HOST name RESERVE feature for USER name A license of feature is reserved for either user name or host name REStarted xxx internet port nnn Vendor daemon xxx was restarted at internet port 717111 Retrying socket bind address in use The license servers try to bind their sockets for approximately 6 minutes if they detect address in use errors A 28 Appendix A Selected EXISTING master node This license daemon has selected an existing master node as the master SERVER sbutdown requested A daemon was requested to shut down via a user generated kill command NEW Server started for feature list A possibly new server was started for the features listed Sbutting down xxx The license daemon is shutting down the vendor daemon xxx SIGCHLD received Killing cbild servers A vendor daemon logs this message when a shutdown was requested by the license daemon Started name The license daemon logs this message whenever it starts a new vendor daemon Trying connection to node The daemon is attempting a connection to node Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 29 4 2 CONFIGURATION PROBLEM MESSAGES hostname Not a valid server host exiting This daemon was run on an invalid hostname hostname Wrong bostid exiting The hostid is wrong for hostname BAD CODE for feature name The specified featur
21. long 1 0x4000000000L long _fract lf lf _long2lfract 1 Code move 4000 b move bl x Fl l move b0O x Fl move b x F1f 1 move b0O x Flf 3 54 Chapter 3 _memcpy WOiLG merear eni ME GIC ST ME om TEMO V e Size unsigned int size Copy a block of memory An optimized inlined version of the library function memcpy that works on all memory spaces amp The size parameter type is unsigned int not size t This is a small difference on the 16 2 bit model of the DSP563xx between memcpy and memcpy Returns the copy destination Example _memcpy for all memory spaces _X int a 10 Y amt b 10 void main void _memset a 1 sizeof a _memcpy b a sizeof a _memset VOL memset voite dest amit sine unsigned int size Fill a block of memory An optimized inlined version of the library function memset that works on all memory spaces amp The size parameter type is unsigned int not size t This is a small difference on the 16 24 bit model of the DSP563xx between _memset and memset Returns the destination Language Implementation Example _memset for all memory spaces X int a 10 Y int b 10 X void const p at5 Y void const q bt5 void main void space derived from _memset a 1 sizeof a space a resides in _memset b 2 sizeof b space b resides in memset p 3 5 space p points to me
22. switch b case l c 3 break case 2 case 3 c 0 break Compiler Use 4 67 Oy OY Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Peephole optimization EE Oy OY Pragma optimize y optimize Y on flow level Default Oy Description With Oy you enable peephole optimization Remove redundant code The peephole optimizer searches for redundent instructions or for instruction seguences which can be combined to minimize the number of instructions With OY you disable peephole optimization 4 68 Example Compile with OY 00 unnecessary instructions found Compile with Oy O0 peephole optimizer searches for patterns in the generated code which can be removed combined E g asl b add a b can be combined to addl a b long a long f void void main void long b b f0 a a lt lt 1 b d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Chapter 4 Compiler Use 4 69 Oz OZ Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Non sequential register allocation E Oz 0z Pragma optimize z optimize Z on flow level Default Oz Description With Oz the compil
23. 24 bit data models 7FFFFF 0 99999988079071044921875 16 bit data models 7FFF 0 99996948242875 Smallest positive mantissa 24 bit data models 400000 0 5 16 bit data models 4000 0 5 Floating point zero mantissa 24 bit data models 000000 0 0 16 bit data models 0000 0 0 Smallest negative mantissa 24 bit data models BFFFFF 0 500000119209289550781 25 16 bit data models BFFF 0 500030517578125 Largest negative mantissa 24 bit data models 800000 1 0 16 bit data models 8000 1 0 Reserved mantissas 24 bit data models 16 bit data models 000001 through 3FFFFF C00000 through FFFFFF 0001 through 3FFF C000 through FFFF Table 7 7 Supported mantissas e All reserved mantissas are illegal since they represent denormalized mantissas Denormalized numbers are not supported Assumed fixed point exponent 2 0 41 0 24 bit data models 00007F 16 bit data models 007F Smallest exponent 2 127 24 bit data models 000000 16 bit data models 0000 Largest exponent 2 128 24 bit data models 0000FF 16 bit data models 00FF Reserved exponents 24 bit data models 16 bit data models 000100 through FFFFFF 0100 through FFFF Table 7 8 Supported exponents If bit weight 28 is set exponent overflow has occurred Run time Environment 7 23 If bit weight 29 is set exponent underflow has occurred amp No distinct exponents
24. 3 62 test 3 63 setbuf 6 51 setjmp 6 51 setjmp h 6 7 longjmp 6 38 setjmp 6 51 setlocale 6 52 setting the environment 1 3 1 7 1 9 setvbuf 6 52 shift fractional data 3 88 short type 3 83 SIGABRT 6 53 SIGFPE 6 53 SIGILL 6 53 SIGINT 6 55 signal 6 53 signal h 6 7 raise 0 47 signal 6 53 signals 6 53 signed char 3 15 3 16 3 19 int 3 15 3 16 long 3 15 3 16 short 3 15 3 16 SIGSEGV 6 53 SIGTERM 6 53 silicon mask 4 33 sin 6 53 sinh 6 53 smart programming 3 83 software floating point See floating point source 4 90 sprintf 6 54 sqrt 6 54 srand 6 54 sscanf 6 54 Index stack 3 23 7 4 7 15 begin of 7 17 end of 7 17 organization of 7 16 system 7 15 user 7 15 stack extension 7 17 stack pointer 3 11 stack size 7 15 start asm 7 6 start obj 7 3 startup code 7 3 status register 7 12 stdarg h 6 7 va arg 6 64 va end 6 64 va slart 6 64 stddef h 6 7 offsetof 6 42 stdio h 6 7 close 6 14 _filbuf 6 14 _fisbuf 6 14 _fopen 6 15 _lseek 6 16 _open 6 17 read 6 19 write 6 20 clearerr 6 25 fclose 6 27 Jeof 6 27 ferror 6 27 fflusb 6 27 fgetc 6 28 fgetpos 6 28 fgets 0 28 fopen 6 29 Sprinif 6 30 Jfputc 6 30 puts 6 30 fread 6 31 freopen 6 31 fscanf 6 32 Index Index 15 fseek 0 32 fsetpos 6 53 fell 6 33 fwrite 6 33 getc 0 33 getchar 6 54 gels 0 34 perror 6 42 printf 6 43 putc 6 45 putchar 6 46 puts 6
25. 5 16 Chapter 5 101 vacuous declaration Something is missing in the declaration The declaration could be empty or an incomplete statement was found You must declare array declarators and struct union or enum members The following are examples of this error int error static nt alz 9 1 J error 102 duplicate case or default label Switch case values must be distinct after evaluation and there may be at most one default label inside a switch 103 may not subtract pointer from scalar The only operands allowed on subtraction of pointers is pointer pointer or pointer scalar So scalar pointer is not allowed The following is an example of this error int i int pi amp i ff l pi error 104 left operand of operator has not struct union type The first operand of a or gt must have a struct or union type 105 zero or negative array size ignored Array bound constants must be greater than zero So char a 0 is not allowed 106 different constructors Compatible function types with parameter type lists must agree in number of parameters and in use of ellipsis Also the corresponding parameters must have compatible types This error is usually followed by informational message I 111 The following is an example of this error int f int int f int int error different parameter list Compiler Diagnostics 5 17 E 107 different array sizes Corre
26. An identifier is required in a if defined identifier 54 non scalar controlling expression Iteration conditions and if conditions must have a scalar type not a struct union or a pointer For example after static struct int i si 0 itis not allowed to specify while si si i 55 operand has not integer type The operand of a if directive must evaluate to an integral constant So if 1 is not allowed 56 lt debugoption gt lt level gt no associated action This warning can only appear in the debug version of the compiler There is no associated debug action with the specified debug option and level 58 invalid warning number number The warning number you supplied to the w option does not exist Replace it with the correct number 59 sorry more than number errors Compilation stops if there are more than 40 errors 60 label label multiple defined A label can be defined only once in the same function The following is an example of this error f labl labl error 61 type clash The compiler found conflicting types For example a long is only allowed on int or double no specifiers are allowed with struct union or enum The following is an example of this error unsigned signed int i error 5 12 E Chapter 5 62 bad storage class for name The storage class specifiers auto and register may not appear in declaration specifiers of external definitions Also
27. C56INC for DSP5600x C563INC for DSP563xx C56INC and C563INC may contain more than one directory Finally the directory include relative to the directory where the compiler binary is located is searched This is the standard include directory supplied with the compiler package For Zinclude files whose names are in lt gt the directory of the file containing the Zinclude line is not searched However the directories named in I options and the one in C56INC C563INC for DSP563xx and the relative path are still searched Example c563 I proj include test c d gt Section Include Files 4 30 Chapter 4 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation For c563 only first disable the Use hardware stack extension check box Enter a stack level in the Max hardware stack use outside interrupt functions field Eg Lnumber Arguments The amount of hardware stack space available in a function 1 15 Default L7 Description Control the amount of hardware stack space available in a function The compiler generates hardware DO loops for the innermost loops only If a nested loop contains a function call no hardware loop is generated Example c563 L4 example c The code in example c is foE sse J depth 1 gt no hardware DO loop fori se depth 2 gt hardware DO loop stack level 2 for ax J depth 3 gt hardware
28. Description With Op you enable constant and copy propagation With this option the compiler tries to find assignments of constant values to a variable a subseguent assignment of the variable to another variable can be replaced by the constant value With OP you disable constant and copy propagation Example Compile with OP O0 i is actually assigned to j Compile with Op 0O0 15 is assigned to j i was propagated Ey int ij int j void main void i 10 j i 5 d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 57 Or OR Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Optimize single instruction hardware DO to REP loops Eg Or OR Pragma optimize r optimize R on flow level Default Or Description With Or you specify to optimize single instruction DO loops to REP loops Note that the option Oh enable hardware loops must be on to use this option With OR c563 will not optimize to REP loops This is advantageous for the interrupt latency as REP loops are not interruptible Example Compile with OR Oh a DO loop is used Compile with Or Oh optimize to REP loops ui void f void ine dy dg for i O i lt 1000 i a i return ati Section Hardware DO and REP Loops Pragm
29. For a binary file the position is set to offset characters from origin which may be SEEK SET for the beginning of the file SEEK_CUR for the current position in the file or SEEK END for the end of file For a text stream offset must be zero or a value returned by te11 In this case origin must be SEEK SET Returns zero if successful a non zero value on error Libraries 6 33 Jfsetpos finclude lt stdio h gt int fsetpos FILE stream const TOOSE pum p Positions st ream at the position recorded by fgetpos in ptr Returns zero if successful a non zero value on error Stell include lt stdio h gt long f vell FILE stream Returns the current file position for stream or 1L on error fwrite include lt stdio h gt size_t fwrite const void ptr Sige o Silwe Size Ilo FILE stream Writes nobj members of size bytes to the given stream from the array pointed to by ptr Returns the number of successfully written objects getc include lt stdio h gt int getc FILE stream Reads one character out of the given stream Currently defined as getchar because FILE I O is not supported d gt See also read Returns the character read or EOF on error 6 34 Chapter 6 i getchar include lt stdio h gt ime getchar Ez co GN Reads one character from standard input d gt See also read Returns the character read or EOF on error getenv
30. Imstat report status on license manager daemons and feature usage Synopsis Imstat a A c icense file f feature 1 regular expression s server S daemon t timeout Description License administration is simplified by the Imstat utility Imstat allows you to instantly monitor the status of all network licensing activities Imstat allows a system administrator to monitor license management operations including e Which daemons are running e Users of individual features e Users of features served by a specific DAEMON Options a Display all information A List all active licenses c license file Use the specified icense_file If no c option is specified Imstat looks for the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set Imstat looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX f feature List all users of the specified feature s l regular_expression List all users of the features matching the given regular_expression s server Display the status of the specified server node s S daemon List all users of the specified daemon s features Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 19 t timeout Specifies the amount of time in seconds Imstat waits to establish contact with the servers The default value is 10 seconds
31. Index 8 Flexible License Manager A 1 FLEXIm A 1 daemon log file A 25 daemon options file A 7 FAQ A 37 frequently asked questions A 37 license administration tools A 8 for Windows A 22 license errors A 33 float 3 15 3 16 float h 6 7 floating license 1 10 floating point 7 20 accumulators 7 28 arithmetic ieee 754 7 24 arithmetic conversions 7 20 basic operations 7 26 code generation 7 31 constant 7 20 fractional type 3 17 implementation 7 20 interfacing 7 26 internal register usage 7 29 single precision 7 21 memory usage 7 26 number range 7 23 storage 2 complement 7 29 type 7 20 floating point library 6 69 floor 6 28 fmod 6 29 fopen 6 29 formatters printf 6 67 scanf 6 67 fprintf 6 30 fputc 6 30 fputs 6 30 fractional data scaling 3 89 shifting 5 88 fractional data type 3 17 fractional number printing 6 45 Index fractional type 3 90 floating point constants 5 17 long 3 17 operations 3 17 rounding 3 17 saturation 5 18 wrapping 5 18 fread 6 31 free 6 31 freopen 6 31 frexp 6 32 frontend compiler pbase 2 5 optimization 2 5 2 6 fscanf 6 32 fseek 6 32 fsetpos 6 33 ftell 6 33 ftm 7 27 function pointers 3 11 function qualifier asmfunc 3 41 function return types 7 8 functions built in 3 42 intrinsic 3 42 fwrite 6 33 G getc 6 33 getchar 6 34 getenv 6 34 gets 6 34 global variables 4 50 gmtime 6 34 hardwar
32. OF 00 Compile with Of 00 compiler finds first time i is always lt 10 the unconditional jump is removed Y int i void main void for i 0 i lt 10 i do_something Compiler Use 4 45 The following example shows a conditional jump reversal Compile with OF 00 code as written sequential Compile with Of O0 code is rearranged Code rearranging enables other optimizations to optimize better e g CSE ox X F F 0X int i extern void dummy void void main do if i 1 7 else itr break dummy while i qo Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 46 Chapter 4 Og OG Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Register allocation graph optimization EE Og OG Pragma optimize g optimize G on function level Default Og Description With Og you switch on optimizations in the register allocation graph This will for one thing create instructions with the indexed addressing mode With OG no optimizations on the register allocation graph are performed Example Compile with OG 00 Compile with Og 00 register allocation graph optimization typedef struct long 1 int i STRUCT int f STRUCT s_p return s_p g
33. SZ SC DSP563xx only the first two registers are set up in the startup code if the hardware stack extension is enabled and must not be changed during program execution The stack count register could be used by a task switching kernel but is of little use otherwise and should be left untouched 7 6_ STACK The DSP563xx DSP566xx processors have a system stack hardware stack with 16 locations 15 for the DSP5600x divided in a system stack high word SSH and system stack low word SSL This system stack is used by the DSP for function calls long interrupts and program looping DO and REP loops For a C program the system stack size is not sufficient A deeply nested C program that also uses DO and REP loops and where long interrupts may occur would soon generate a system stack overflow because the system stack is also used by the DSP for return addresses of function calls Therefore all memory models except the static model c56 only use a user stack to store C variables common subexpressions temporary results and to pass parameters when all registers are occupied The mixed model for functions that are not explicitly declared _reentrant and the static model use overlayable sections for these purposes When hardware stack extension is not available DSP5600x or is not enabled the hardware stack size is very limited Therefore the changed hardware stack contents is transferred to the user stack during the function execution The
34. They are provided just to demonstrate the use ofthe __ asm keyword Situations where the __ asm keyword is used should give a definite improvement of the generated code to justify the complexity and lack of portability of the __ asm statement Assembly functions larger than ten statements should preferably be written in a separate assembly module not inline to improve readability and portability It is not allowed to create loops with multiple __ asm statements or generate conditional jumps across __ asm statements The compiler cannot detect these and will generate incorrect code for the registers involved If you want to create a loop with __ asm the whole loop must be contained in a single __ asm statement independent of it being a hardware loop or a backward jump The same restriction applies to conditional jumps As a rule of thumb all references to a label in an __asm statement must be contained in the same statement Example 1 A simple example without input or output parameters The mr register is not a register used by the compiler and therefore can be used without reserving it _ asm andi fS SFC mr Generated code andi FC mr Example 2 The simplest example it only generates a label Because the compiler inserts a tab character before emitting the first character of the template we must provide a newline first or follow the label with a semicolon asm Anmylabel Generated code note that th
35. Unlike a static variable an automatic variable does not have a fixed memory location and therefore the address of an automatic is not a constant The following is an example of this error int a automatic static int b amp a error 177 static variable ame not used A static variable is declared which is never used To eliminate this warning remove the unused variable 178 static function ame not used A static function is declared which is never called To eliminate this warning remove the unused function 179 inline function name is not defined Possibly only the prototype of the inline function was present but the actual inline function was not The following is an example of this error Compiler Diagnostics 5 27 inline int a void prototype main int b b a error E 180 illegal target memory memory for pointer The pointer may not point to memory For example a pointer to bitaddressable memory is not allowed E 181 invalid cast to function A cast to type function is not allowed A cast to a function pointer type is allowed W 182 argument Znumber different types With prototypes the types of arguments must be compatible W 183 variable name possibly uninitialized Possibly an initialization statement is not reached while a function should return something The following is an example of this warning int a int f void int i i 0 statement not reached
36. Warning messages can be controlled with the w mum option The last class of messages are the internal compiler errors The following format is used S number internal error please report Chapter 5 These errors are caused by failed internal consistency checks and should never occur However if such a SYSTEM error appears please report the occurrence to TASKING using a Problem Report form Please include a diskette or tape containing a small C program causing the error 5 2 RETURN VALUES c563 returns an exit status to the operating system environment for testing For example in a BATCH file you can examine the exit status of the program executed with ERRORLEVEL c563 s 1 c IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO STOP BATCH In a bourne shell script the exit status can be found in the variable for example c563 case in 0 echo ok 1 1213 echo error esac The exit status of c563 is one of the numbers of the following list 0 Compilation successful no errors 1 There were user errors but terminated normally 2 A fatal error or System error occurred premature ending 3 Stopped due to user abort Compiler Diagnostics 5 5 5 3 ERRORS AND WARNINGS Errors start with an error type followed by a number and a message The error type is indicated by a letter information error fatal error internal compiler error W warning GG vm pp o Frontend F 1 evaluation expired Your product ev
37. _ round fa fa _ round lfa fb _ round lfa Ifo Language Implementation 3 61 Semapbore intrinsics Semaphores are program flags that are used to synchronize processes and to force exclusive access to a resource Examples are an interrupt function that sets a semaphore when data is read and a processing loop that clears it when done or a serial port that is used by several parallel processes and must be line blocked To guarantee correctness semaphore actions must be atomic non interruptable The semaphore intrinsic functions guarantee this without the overhead of blocking and re enabling interrupts To do this the generated code contains a bit clear bit set or bit test assembly instruction to access the semaphore sema clr ae Sere Cli volatile ime Jo WTE T Ute mI ERN This function clears a semaphore a bit in a volatile int field pointed to by p bitnumber must be an integral constant expression and should not exceed the width of an int in the DSP program It can either be used to clear a semaphore ignoring the result or to test and clear a semaphore result contains previous state Returns the previous state of the semaphore Example typedef volatile int semaphore t void f void static semaphore_t flag 1 while sema clr amp flag O wait until we reset flag ourselves code to handle device _sema_set amp flag O free device for other processes 3 62
38. decreased Compiler Use 4 27 Examples To add symbolic debug information to the output files enter c563 g test c To add symbolic debug information to the output files and disable lifetime information for all types enter c563 gl test c To disable all symbolic debug information including type checking enter c563 gn test c qo o 4 28 Chapter 4 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Enter a filename in the Include this file before source field E nyie Arguments The name of an include file Description Include file before compiling the C source This is the same as specifying include file at the first line of your C source Example c563 Hstdio h test c qo Compiler Use 4 29 Select the Project Directories menu item Add one or more directory paths to the Include Files Path field Eg Idirectory Arguments The name of the directory to search for include file s Description Change the algorithm for searching include files whose names do not have an absolute pathname to look in directory Thus include files whose names are enclosed in are searched for first in the directory of the file containing the Zinclude line then in directories named in I options in left to right order If the include file is still not found the compiler searches in a directory specified with the environment variable
39. inc which contains the actual code Because these modules specifiy the run time environment of your DSP56xxx C application you might want to edit them to match your needs Therefore these modules and the file cstart inc are delivered in assembly source in the src subdirectory of the lib directory Typically you will copy the startup code file start asm and rename it to for example mystart asm and copy the file cstart inc to your own directory and edit it The file cstart inc contains macro preprocessor symbols to tune the code Include this file in your own startup code You can check the predefined target startup code files argel name asm to see what information you can put in your own startup code file To use the changed file you must add it to the file list EDE or makefile command line You must also select User supplied no library startup code EDE or T on the command line to avoid linking with a library startup file If you would link your own startup file with a library startup file you would get conflicts on all symbols in the startup files The invocation using the control program is cc56 c mystart asm DNODSTACK for the static model DSP5600x only or cc563 c mystart asm for all other models 7 4 Chapter 7 In the C startup code an absolute code section is defined for setting up the power on vector and the DSP56xxx C environment The power on vector contains a jump to the F START label This gl
40. increases code size The fast loop optimization is disabled when Hardware loop generation is enabled E Ol OL Pragma optimize l optimize L on function level Default OL Description With Ol you enable fast loops Duplicate the loop condition Evaluate the loop condition one time outside the loop just before entering the loop and at the bottom of the loop This saves one unconditional jump and gives less code inside a loop With OL you disable fast loops The fast loop optimization is switched off when hardware loop generation is enabled Oh 4 52 Chapter 4 i Example y Compile with OL 00 Compile with Ol O0 compiler duplicates the loop condition the unconditional jump is removed Int i void main void for i lt l0 i do_something d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 53 On ON Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable NOP insertion ess On ON Pragma optimize n optimize N on flow level Default On Description With On you enable NOP insertion This ensures the generation of correct code For some instructions for example moves to and from address type registers a nop instruction must be inserted before the pending instruction to take care of the
41. o file ppage rregister u w num wstrict zpragma Select memory model 24 bit 16 24 bit 16 bit or DSP566xx Do not use hardware stack extension Select default memory space X Y L or P Specify stack not in L memory only for c563 Control optimization Change default section name Remove preprocessor macro Display version header only Specify size of cache sectors for the DSP563xx Remove output file if compiler errors occur Send diagnostics to error list file err Read options from file Enable symbolic debug information unless gn is used Compile for silicon mask c563 only Send output to standard output Specify name of output file Specify number of Patriot memory pages Reserve a register for external use Merge C source code with assembly output Merge C source code and included files with assembly output Display lines min Treat all char variables as signed Suppress one or all warning messages Suppress warning messages 196 303 Identical to pragma pragma in the C source Table 4 2 Compiler options alpbabetical 4 7 4 8 Chapter 4 Description Include options Read options from file file Include file before starting compilation Hfile Look in directory for include files directory Preprocess options Preprocess options or emit dependencies E m l c i p x Define preprocessor macro Dmacro def Remove p
42. see table 3 2 DSP5600x signed and unsigned char and short DSP563xx in 24 bit arithmetic mode signed and unsigned char and short in 16 bit arithmetic modes signed and unsigned char DSP566xx signed and unsigned char 3 23 2 UNSIGNED Try to use the unsigned qualifier as little as possible because unsigned comparisons require more code than signed comparisons When retrieving unsigned values from memory the accumulator extension word can be set incorrectly Therefore the extension word has to be cleared before any comparison 3 23 3 HARDWARE LOOPS For the DSP5600x the loop counter register LC 16 bits is smaller than an unsigned int 24 bits The compiler only optimizes to a hardware DO loop when it is absolutely sure that the loop counter fits in the loop counter register When the start and end value of the loop iteration counter in the C code is fixed and fits within a 16 bit value this is the case Also when an unsigned short is used for loop iteration counter or loop conditions the compiler is sure the loop counter register will not overflow Therefore it is recommended to use unsigned short for loops and for loop conditions on the DSP5600x 3 84 Chapter 3 When using global variables inside the loop the compiler may not be able to produce a hardware DO loop that can be optimized to a REP loop For example _fract output 0 0 _fract _X x 10 _fract _Y c 10 main int i for i 0 i lt 10
43. text mode E g rb means read binary w b means create binary file for update The filename is limited to FILENAME MAX characters At most FOPEN MAX files may be open at once 6 30 Chapter 6 i Files opened in binary mode will read write full DSP words except when you used 8 whereas files opened in text mode will read write the low 8 bits only Sprintf include lt stdio h gt ALONE dtpoweunenEd VILLI watie GOMSic Cligie HOME ces E Performs a formatted write to the given stream d gt See also printf _write and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines Sputc include lt stdio h gt aie jee abeue ep JEN ewereesun g Puts one character onto the given stream qo See also write Returns EOF on error Sputs include lt stdio h gt ine FOUTS const Char Ss PILE S Ereamn i Writes the string to a stream The terminating NULL character is not written d gt See also _write Returns NULL if successful or EOF on error Libraries 6 31 fread finclude lt stdio h gt Size_ic dee wool pu size_t size size_t nobj FILE stream Reads nobj members of size bytes from the given stream into the array pointed to by pt r d gt See also read Returns the number of successfully read objects Sree include lt stdlib h gt void free void p Deallocates the space pointed to by p p Must point to space earlier alloc
44. the O2 option is automatically selected with g to switch off these optimizations When the g option is specified to the compiler with a higher optimization level the compiler will issue warning message W555 The M option specifies to generate map files The o option specifies the name of the output file 2 30 Chapter 2 The command in step 3 generates the object file calc ob 4 the locator map file calc map and the absolute output file calc abs The file calc abs is in the IEEE Std 695 format and can directly be used by CrossView Pro No separate formatter is needed Now you have created all the files necessary for debugging with CrossView Pro with one call to the control program If you want to see how the control program calls the compiler assembler linker and locator you can use the v0 option or v option The v0 option only displays the invocations without executing them The v option also executes them cc563 g M calc c o calc abs v0 The control program shows the following command invocations without executing them UNIX output c563 o tmp cc7208b src g M24x calc c as563 o calc obj gs M24x tmp cc7208b src 1k563 o tmp cc7208c out ddef targ dsc uR def targ calc obj 1c24 lfp24 lrt24 1c563 ocalc abs ddef targ dsc f1 M tmp cc7208c out The M2 x option of the compiler selects the 2 bit memory model with default data space in X memory The lc24 1fp24 and lrt24 opti
45. 118 constant expression out of valid range A constant expression used in a case label may not be too large Also when converting a floating point value to an integer the floating point constant may not be too large This warning is usually preceded by error E 16 or E 109 The following is an example of this warning Compiler Diagnostics 5 19 ij int i 10E88 error and warning E 119 cannot take sizeof bitfield or void type The size of a bit field or void type is not known So the size of it cannot be taken E 120 cannot take sizeof function The size of a function is not known So the size of it cannot be taken E 121 nota function declarator This is not a valid function This may be due to a previous error The following is an example of this error int f return 0 missing int g error g is not a formal parameter and therefore this is not a valid function declaration E 122 unnamed formal parameter The parameter must have a valid name W 123 function should return something A return in a non void function must have an expression E 124 array cannot hold functions An array of functions is not allowed E 125 function cannot return anything A return with an expression may not appear in a void function W 126 missing return function rame A non void function with a non empty function body must have a return statement E 129 cannot initialize rame Declarators
46. 2 9 bardware loop generation 2 9 leaf function bandling 2 9 loop unrolling 2 9 peephole optimizations 2 9 register contents tracking 2 9 optimization frontend common subexpression elimination 2 8 conditional jump reversal 2 7 constant folding 2 6 constant copy propagation 2 8 control flow optimization 2 7 cross jumping and branch tail merging 2 8 dead code elimination 2 8 expression rearrangement 2 6 expression simplification 2 7 jump chaining 2 7 logical expression optimization 2 7 loop optimization 2 8 loop rotation 2 7 Index remove useless jumps 2 7 switch optimization 2 7 optimize 4 90 options control program 4 4 output file 4 71 output function calling mechanism 6 6 P pack strings 4 90 packed strings 3 77 examples 3 78 library functions 3 77 pragmas 5 76 parallel move 2 10 3 88 4 55 4 58 parameter passing 7 7 parser 2 5 PATH 1 3 1 7 1 9 Patriot memory pages 4 72 peephole optimization 2 9 4 67 peephole optimizer 2 6 perror 6 42 pipeline scheduler 2 6 pointer 3 15 3 16 pointers 3 27 portable C code 3 82 pow 6 43 power on vector 7 4 pragma asm 3 40 4 86 asm_noflusb 3 40 4 86 cacbe_align_now 3 72 4 87 cache region end 3 73 4 87 cacbe region start 5 75 4 87 cache sector size 4 87 endasm 3 40 4 87 endoptimize 4 90 inline assembly 3 40 ilerale at leat once 4 88 Jumptable memory 4 89 no iterale at leat once 4 88 I
47. 3 3 1 The Fractional Data Types sis sasoina ie aa 3 17 3 3 2 The Complex Data Type YF Y Y YR 3 18 33 2 Unsigned Characters FF FF a 3 19 3 3 4 ANSI C Type Conversions 20 6 6 cece er Rem 3 19 3 3 5 Memory Mapped Registers eese 3 21 3 4 Automatic Variables VYF YF aU 2 23 3 5 Register Variables 3 24 3 6 Initialized Variables 0 0c YF renwa 3 25 3 7 Type Qualifier volatile 2 0 idae a 3 25 3 8 SUIS ethane aes fl ace tke E 3 26 23 9 POIMLETS cse eek tek Cra e ADU ee ye ex ce de 3 24 3 10 Integer Division and Modulo isses 3 27 3 11 Inline C Functions V FFF a 3 29 Table of Contents 3 12 352 1 3 12 2 3 12 3 3 12 4 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 16 1 3 16 2 3 16 3 3 16 4 3 17 3 18 3 18 1 3 18 2 3 18 3 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 23 1 3 23 2 3 23 3 3 23 4 3 23 5 3 23 6 3 23 7 3 23 8 3 23 9 3 23 10 3 23 11 3 23 12 Inline Assembly A dg E ERA CHER COS 3 31 Using the asm Intrinsic Function 3 31 Using the __asm Intrinsic Function 3 32 Using Inline Assembly Pragmas ee 3 40 Linking with Separate Assembly Routines 3 41 Intrinsic Functions ene 3 42 MGM PIS TP MD UU oa Whe 3 68 Circular B ffets ue ane ea a Ao is aes psc da pap doe waite o 3 70 DSP563xx Cache Support 9 FY RS 3 72 Cache Alignment ee UR dg Bw eed A Raus 3 72 Cache R gions sss Lae Re RYE egt ds
48. 46 remove 6 48 rename 6 48 rewind 6 48 scanf 6 49 setbuf 6 51 setvbuf 6 52 sprintf 6 54 sscanf 6 54 tmpfile 6 62 tmpnam 6 63 ungetc 6 64 vfprintf 6 65 vprintf 6 65 vsprintf 6 65 stdlib h 6 8 abort 6 21 abs 6 21 atexit 6 23 atof 6 23 atoi 6 23 atol 6 23 bsearch 6 24 calloc 6 24 div 6 26 exit 6 26 free 6 31 getenv 6 34 labs 6 37 ldiv 6 37 malloc 6 39 mblen 6 39 mbstowcs 6 40 mbtowc 6 40 qsort 6 46 rand 6 47 realloc 6 47 srand 6 54 strtod 6 60 strtol 6 60 strtoul 6 61 system 6 61 wcstombs 6 66 wctomb 6 66 storage specifier 3 5 _external 3 5 _internal 3 5 4 3 5 _near 3 5 Mol _X 3 5 X 3 5 strcat 6 55 strchr 6 55 stremp 6 55 strcoll 6 55 strcpy 6 56 strcspm 6 56 strerror 6 56 strftime 6 57 string 3 26 packed 3 77 string compare 3 64 string copy 3 64 string length 3 65 string h 6 8 _packsize 6 17 _packstr 6 17 pstr get 6 18 pstr put 6 18 _unpackstr 6 20 _unpsirlen 6 20 memcbr 6 40 memcmp 6 41 memcpy 6 41 Index 16 x memmove 6 41 memset 6 41 strcat 6 55 strchr 6 55 strcmp 6 55 strcoll 6 55 strcby 6 56 sircspn 6 56 strerror 6 56 strlen 6 58 strncat 6 58 strncmp 6 58 strnopy 6 58 strpbrk 6 59 strrchr 6 59 strspn 6 59 strstr 6 59 strtok 6 60 sirxfrm 6 61 strlen 6 58 strncat 6 58 strncmp 6 58 strncpy 6 58 strpbrk 6 59 strrchr 6 59 strspn 6 59 strstr 6 59 strtod 6 60 strtok 6
49. 60 strtol 6 60 strtoul 6 61 structure tag 3 80 strxfrm 6 61 subscript strength reduction 4 63 switch optimization 2 7 3 81 4 60 4 64 switch statement 3 81 symbols predefined 4 77 system 6 61 system stack 7 15 Index T tan 6 62 tanh 6 62 target memory 3 27 time 6 62 time h 6 8 asctime 6 21 clock 6 25 ctime 6 25 difftime 6 26 gmtime 0 34 localtime 6 38 mktime 6 42 strftime 6 57 time 6 62 TMPDIR 1 4 1 7 1 9 tmpfile 6 62 tmpnam 6 63 toascii 6 63 tolower 6 63 toupper 6 63 type qualifier volatile 3 25 typedef 3 80 U ungetc 6 64 unsigned char 3 15 3 16 3 19 int 3 15 3 16 long 3 15 3 16 short 3 15 3 16 unsigned characters 3 19 unsigned qualifier 3 83 updating makefile 2 29 user stack 7 15 7 17 Index Index 17 Vv va arg 6 64 va end 6 64 va start 6 64 variable automatic 3 23 initialized 3 25 7 5 register 5 24 variable argument list 3 12 variables from assembly 3 32 version information 4 80 vfprintf 6 65 volatile 3 25 vprintf 6 65 vsprintf 6 65 W warnings 5 5 warnings suppress 4 81 wcstombs 6 66 wctomb 6 66 wrapping 3 18 Index 18 INDEX Index
50. 8 73 Cache Intrinsic Functions YF FF eese 3 73 Examples se eng tod Ux SO TY RE RR ed Rn 3 74 Patriot Bank Switching Support a 3 75 Packed Strings osse Rr ER Ce ee em as 3 77 ibrary Funcions Asso scopre Sete GWD y OR AFON Y 3 77 PLAGINAS e Menu pd cit eae rette Seay apis ml cen 3 78 Examples PCT 3 78 Structure TASS eu ages ER ORIS X eRe RERO dux 3 80 Typedef ae ebrei aiden Prise d 3 80 Switch Statement sese FE EFA 3 81 Portable Code ssec darri IARE A DAW dies a 3 82 Efficient Use of the DSP56xxx Tool Set 3 83 Char and Short Types VV FF Y ee 3 83 do b4 eu RTT 3 83 Hardware Loops FY FFR FFF FF YR 3 83 Speed VS IZO 55 cp Y ye dd LUD O REF GORE 3 86 Assembly Interfacing se wg Eg ERE HEELS 3 86 Selecting the Most Efficient Model s 3 87 Memory Mapped I O from C1 1 eee 3 87 Parallel Moves ea acne m Rr RD ead Wend 4 3 88 Shifting Fractional Data VF FF FF FRAD 3 88 Dynamic Scaling eee 3 89 Reviewing the Optimized Code vee 3 89 Integer and Fractional Types suussa 3 90 VII VIII Table of Contents 3 23 13 Interrupt ROUUNES presican ne OE SOEUR RERO wale es COMPILER USE 4 1 4 1 Control Program yeu sk ep er hee ach metn 4 3 4 2 CODIDI GES zaie AR o Dad A Id Reel adn ental ale te 4 6 4 2 1 Detailed Description of the Compiler Options 4 10 4 3 Include Files ed A og Un YU eas 4
51. 83 4 4 an ei ME CANU FFFFFAFAFFAFFE A acces 4 86 4 5 Alias Checking ii eis a vel as dw ee dy hs 4 91 4 6 Compiler Limits aus sex e cenre eh rea REF 4 93 COMPILER DIAGNOSTICS 5 1 5 1 IntrOQUCtOft ces ete x ehe SR YY YR Re e RE AM 5 9 5 2 Return Values 0 Ga eve eere e vehe dddo 5 4 5 3 Errors and Warnings FF FR aU 5 5 LIBRARIES 6 1 6 1 IpntrodUctOohB 4 ues s sues te e eR V haa Odd AB Re 6 3 6 2 Rebuilding EiDtames i i ness es eae er e ex 6 4 6 3 Libraries Overview 42222 RR PERPE bad ER hw es 6 5 6 4 Input Output Functions YF rena 6 6 6 5 Header Files sexa REIR Rer ex CAI e mes 6 7 6 6 C Libraries yg oso erae NR e Ope eder 6 8 6 6 1 C Library Implementation Details s 6 8 6 6 2 C Library Interface Description isses 6 14 6 6 3 Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines 6 67 6 7 Run time Library FFF ee 6 68 6 8 Floating Point Library bean cake Ree 6 69 Table of Contents RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT 7 1 71 Startup Code ase ERE qt aka S 7 9 7 2 Register Usage isse 7 6 7 3 Calling Conventions sessa iinan draa uu 7 7 7 4 Section Usage ucc er Dieta e b tenue NI EROS 7 10 7 5 Compiler Hardware Environment 7 12 75 1 Operating Mode Register s sisse 7 12 7 5 2 Status Register aser enced hb he Re HR HE eg Ras 7 12 T2 Other Registers cuins rowena eed AR y n MU Rol 7 14 7 6 hielo JJ Y EN FENTER TAFF EEEE TETEE 7 15
52. A1 Description Control language extensions A without any flags specifies strict ANSI mode all language extensions are disabled This is eguivalent to ACDEFKLOPRSTV and A0 Flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the lower case letter and switched off with the uppercase letter Note that the usage of these options might have effect on code density and code execution performance The following flags are allowed c Default Do not check for assignments of a constant string to a non constant string pointer With this option the following example produces no warning char p void main void p hello C Conform to ANSI C by checking for assignments of a constant string to a non constant string pointer The example above produces warning W130 operands of are pointers to different types d Default Define storage for uninitialized constant rom data instead of implicit zero initialization The compiler generates a DS 1 for const char ille Compiler Use 4 13 D Uninitialized constant rom data is implicitly zero The compiler generates a BSC 1 for const char if 1 e Default Relaxed char short arithmetic overflow masking Do not force conversions on small types to prevent overflows E Select forced conversions on small types Normally the excess bits are not cleared or extended on a cast from a char or a short to an int or a long For signed values the ANSI specif
53. C Compiler entry and select Debug Enable Generate symbolic debug information Optionally enable the Include debug information for non referenced types check box and or disable the Include lifetime info for all types check box E gff l n c Default Generate type checking information only Description Add directives to the output files for incorporating symbolic information This facilitates high level debugging With gn you disable all debug including type checking With gl you disable the lifetime information for all types If you use gf high level language type information is also emitted for types which are not referenced by variables Therefore this sub option is not recommended If you use gc code to the application is added that performs a run time check on stack overflows When calling a function the stack usage of this function and the maximum number of parameters that will be passed on stack is checked If too little reserved memory for the stack is left a stack overflow occurs The application halts and stays on the label stack error When the compiler is set to a high optimization level the debug comfort may decrease Therefore the following rules are applied e When g is supplied and O is not supplied the compiler switches O2 on which enables higher debug comfort e When g is supplied and O with one or more flags is supplied the compiler issues warning W555 when the debug comfort would be
54. C interface See also section 3 13 Intrinsic Functions When calling an assembly routine from C in the mixed or reentrant model R7 must not be used in this function because this register is used as user stack pointer When no more address registers are available in your assembly routine you can save the contents of R7 to some memory location on entry of the routine and restore it before returning to C Note that interrupt functions in the reentrant model or interrupt functions declared _reentrant in the mixed model cannot be entered when R7 is not available as user stack pointer because these interrupt functions may want to save registers on the stack Language Implementation 3 87 3 23 6 SELECTING THE MOST EFFICIENT MODEL The DSP563xx compiler can generate code for 16 bit precision arithmetic in two models the 16 bit model and the 16 2 bit model Use the 16 24 bit model only if the code and or data require more than 64k words of memory because pointer arithmetic is much more efficient in the 16 bit model The DSP5600x compiler supports three models Static Mixed and Reentrant Select the most efficient model for your application The compiler generates the best code for the static model The code density generated for the mixed model is close to the static model because it only cannot use R7 which is reserved for user stack pointer The code density for the reentrant model is less than the static and mixed model Use the static m
55. COSp CkomweE clnee gu E Compares string cs to string ct Returns 0ifcs lt ct O ifcs ct gt 0ifcs gt ct strcoll finclude lt string h gt iit Sicizeolil const char OS const char ot DE Compares string cs to string ct The comparison is based on strings interpreted as appropriate to the program s locale Returns 0ifcs lt ct O ifcs ct gt 0ifcs gt ct 6 56 Chapter 6 i strcpy finclude lt string h gt Clase mes Chai me consti lees cle Je Copies string ct into the string s including the trailing NULL character Returns S strcspn finclude lt string h gt ale le Creson Const mE OS const Clavie Cle Jg Returns the length of the prefix in string cs consisting of characters not in the string ct strerror include lt string h gt char Sseiewicor Salve de im yp Returns pointer to implementation defined string corresponding to error n Libraries 6 57 strftime finclude lt time h gt size_t St EE me ela Sy em ct y COM Siem nica mes Eme consi Struct tm 7Co p Formats date and time information from the structure tp into s according to the specified format fmt fmt is analogous to a printf format Each c is replaced as described below a A b B 96c d H I j m 96M p S U W W 96x X y Y 967 9696 abbreviated weekday name full weekday name abbreviated month name full month name local date and time
56. Cross Assembler c56 generates assembly source code using the DSP5600x assembly language specification You must assemble this code with the TASKING DSP5600x Cross Assembler This manual uses as56 as a shorthand notation for TASKING DSP5600x Cross Assembler 2 4 Chapter 2 You can link the generated object with other objects and libraries using the TASKING DSP563xx DSP566xx linker In this manual we use 1k563 as a shorthand notation for TASKING DSP563xx DSP566xx linker You can also link Motorola COFF objects and libraries with Ik563 You can locate the linked object to a complete application using the TASKING DSP563xx DSP566xx locator In this manual we use 1c563 as a shorthand notation for TASKING DSP563xx DSP566xx locator Use 1k56 and 1c56 for the DSP5600x linker and locator The DSP56xxx toolchain also accepts C source files C source files or sources using C language features need to be preprocessed by cp563 DSP563xx DSP566xx cp56 DSP5600x The output generated by cp563 is DSP563xx or DSP566xx C which can be translated with the C compiler c563 The output generated by cp56 is DSP5600x C which can be translated with the C compiler c56 Note that the C compilers are not part of the C compiler package They can be ordered separately from TASKING The programs cc56 and cc563 are control programs for the DPS5600x and DSP563xx DSP566xx respectively The control program facilitates the invocation of various compone
57. DO loop stack level 4 d gt Section Hardware DO and REP Loops in chapter Overview Compiler Use 4 31 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation Select a Memory Model and a Default Data Memory Ea M model n mem L at least one argument must be specified Arguments The memory model to be used where model is one of s static c56 only m mixed c56 only r reentrant c56 only 24 24 bit c563 only 1624 16 24 bit c563 only 16 16 bit c563 only 6 DSP566xx c563 only and mem is one of x X memory y Y memory 1 L memory p P memory other arguments n do not use hardware stack extension c563 only L stack not in L memory default X or Y only Default Mmx for c56 M24x for c563 4 32 Chapter 4 Description Select memory model and default memory space to be used With Mn c563 only the compiler selects pushing and popping the return address on the user stack DSP563xx only To circumvent hardware stack extension silicon problems on the DSP563xx the compiler can avoid using the hardware stack for function calls by saving the return address on the user stack The use of default P data memory Mp is not recommended because it leads to much more object code It is meant for applications with special hardware layouts only Example c56 Mr test c c563 M16 test c d gt Section Memory Models C
58. Diagnostics 5 33 W 512 number illegal interrupt number 1 or 0 to 63 ignored The interrupt vector number must be 1 or in the range 0 to 63 Any other number is illegal E 513 calling an interrupt routine use swi An interrupt function cannot be called directly you must use the intrinsic function swi E 514 conflct in attribute type attribute The attributes of the current function qualifier declaration and the previous function qualifier declaration are not the same E 515 different long interrupt fast interrupt number The interrupt number of the current function qualifier declaration and the previous function qualifier declaration are not the same E 516 memory type is illegal memory for function program P only The storage type is not valid for this function W 517 conversion of long address to short address The compiler converts a long address to a short address when you assign a value to an near object W 518 conversion of fractional to integer type occurred The compiler converts a fractional type to an integer type when fracts are mixed in expressions This can also occur when constants are folded In most cases this is an error that can be avoided with a type Cast W 519 conversion of integer to fractional type occurred The compiler converts an integer type a fractional type in the code This can also occur when constants are folded In most cases this is an error W 520 conversion of circul
59. Fcirc get move 24 1 m0 move x r0 a move 1 m0 rts 3 12 3 USING INLINE ASSEMBLY PRAGMAS c563 supports inline assembly using the following pragmas pragma asm Insert assembly text following this pragma pragma asm noflush Same as pragma asm but the peephole optimizer will not flush the code buffer pragma endasm Switch back to the C language The peephole optimizer in the compiler maintains a code buffer for optimizing sequences of assembly instructions before they are written in the output file The compiler does not interpret the text of inline assembly It passes inline assembly lines directly to the output file Example pragma asm ori 03 MR pragma endasm The compiler will not save any registers prior to the pragma asm and also does not restore the original contents of the registers after the pragma endasm This implies that when registers must be used within the pragma asm endasm you have to save the contents of these registers first For using registers within the inline assembly you cannot rely on the registers the compiler allocated for C variables Changing the C code may change the register allocation Also the register allocation may change in future versions of the C compiler You should use the __asm intrinsic function if your code requires parameter passing Language Implementation 3 41 These pragmas can also be used outside the scope of a function for instance to create temporary storage f
60. Fctl a move x Fd x0 move x Fdrl xl1 jsr Rfpmulf2 move b x0 H move a xl move r7 move x r7 n7 a s move r7 A move x r7rn7 b H jsr Rfpsubf2 E move a x Ferl E move b x Fe move r7 n7 H reserve user stack space pass floating point a in fac pass floating point b in ftml perform add user stack offset first stack element push result mantissa from fac on stack second stack element push result exponent from fac on stack pass floating point c in fac pass floating point d in ftml perform multiply store result from fac in ftml first stack element pop mantissa result from stack to fac second stack element pop exponent result from stack to fac perform subtract store result from fac in e fr reserved user stack space 7 34 RUN TIME Chapter 7 SUPPORT FOR USER DESIGNED TARGET BOARDS ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Support for User designed Target Boards 8 3 To This chapter contains the steps you have to take to support user designed target boards create support files for a user designed target board Create a mytarget asm file in the 1ib src directory by copying one of the startup files for example de targ asm Change the new file to contain adequate values for the AARx registers etcetera for the board Refer to the DSP manual and the hardware manual of the board for the correct settings Add the new startup file to your project Using ED
61. How to Start tbe CrossView Pro Debugger Once the files have been compiled assembled linked located and formatted they can be executed by CrossView Pro To start CrossView Pro 1 Click on the Debug application button The following button is the Debug application button which is located in the toolbar El CrossView Pro is launched CrossView Pro will automatically download the compiled file for debugging How to Load an Application You must tell CrossView Pro which program you want to debug To do this 1 From the File menu select Load Symbolic Debug Info The Load Symbolic Debug Info dialog box appears 2 Click Load How to View and Execute an Application To view your source while debugging the Source Window must be open To open this window 1 From the View menu select Source Source lines The source window opens Before starting execution you have to reset the target system to its initial state The program counter stack pointer and any other registers must be set to their initial value The easiest way to do this is 2 From the Run menu select Reset Target System To run your application step by step 3 From the Run menu select Animate 2 28 Chapter 2 The program calc abs is now stepping through the high level language statements Using the toolbar or the menu bar you can set breakpoints monitor data display registers simulate I O and much more See the CrossView Pro Debugger User s G
62. OacefghijLnOprSTuvwxyz all optimizations which can be debugged optimized for speed Ne A Ov Example c563 OacefghijLnOprsTUvwxyz test c d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Chapter 4 function function function function function function function function function flow flow function flow flow flow function function flow flow flow flow no optim default size debug size speed debug speed Compiler Use 4 37 Onumber Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select an optimization level in the Optimization box Optionally enable the Reduce optimization for debugging check box EE Onumber Arguments A number in the range 0 4 Default O1 Description Control optimization You can specify a single number in the range 0 4 to enable or disable optimization The options are a combination of the other optimization flags 00 same as OACEFGHIJLNOPRSTUVWXYZ Switchable optimizations switched off 01 same as OacefghijLnoprsTUvwxyz Default Set optimization to let c563 generate the smallest code 02 same as OacefghijLnOprsTUvwxyz Set optimization flags to let c563 generate the smallest code but switch off optimizations that affect the ability to debug 03 same as OacefghijLnoprSTuvwxyz Set optimization flags to let c563 generate the
63. Returns nothing clock finclude lt time h gt geek iE llock weil Determines the processor time used Returns number of seconds since the last reset assuming a 66 MHz cpu cos finclude lt math h gt double cos double x Returns the cosine of x cosh include lt math h gt double cosh double x Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x ctime include lt time h gt Gloves Celie eons came ie see Ps Converts the calender time tp into local time in string form This function is the same as asctime localtime tp 6 25 6 26 Chapter 6 Returns the local time in string form difftime finclude lt time h gt double difftime time_t time2 time_t timel Returns the result of time2 timel in seconds div finclude lt stdlib h gt Clive chiwi abes mum suse clemem F Both arguments are integers The returned quotient and remainder are also integers Returns a structure containing the quotient and remainder of num divided by denom exit include lt stdlib h gt WO eie ime EEUU E Terminates the program normally Acts as if main returns with status as the return value Returns zero on successful termination exp include lt math h gt double exp double x Returns the result of the exponential function e Libraries 6 27 Jabs include lt math h gt double fabs double x Returns the absolute double value of x x fclose includ
64. SINGLE PRECISION FLOATING POINT FORMAT Floating point number m e including mantissa sign Decimal value m 2 fbias Bit number 23 0 23 0 Binary encoding s mmm mmmm mmmm mmmm mmmm mmmm 0000 0000 0000 0000 eeee eeee Bit Weight 2 0 1 23 7 0 s sign bit m mantissa bit e exponent bit Table 7 5 2 Complement Format for 24 bit data models Bit number 15 0 15 0 Binary encoding s mmm mmmm mmmm mmmm 0000 0000 eeee eeee Bit Weight 2 0 1 15 7 0 S sign bit m mantissa bit e exponent bit Table 7 6 2 Complement Format for 16 bit data models m 24 bit mantissa or 16 bit mantissa 16 bit models two s complement normalized fraction 23 bit or 15 bit 16 bit models mantissa precision plus 1 bit mantissa sign gives precision of approximately 7 or 4 16 bit models decimal digits A minimum of 6 decimal digits is prescribed by the ANSI C standard for single precision floating point The 24 bit mantissa 24 bit models or 16 bit mantissa 16 bit models was chosen to maximize precision with efficient use of the MPY and MAC instructions A hidden leading 1 is not implemented in this format 8 bit exponent unsigned integer biased by fbias 127 stored as a 24 bit or 16 bit 16 bit models unsigned integer with 16 or 8 16 bit models leading zeros 7 21 7 22 Chapter 7 Largest positive mantissa
65. TASKING DSP563xx toolchain 2 15 2 16 Chapter 2 C source file CC l C compiler C source file cp563 a ic C preprocessor C compiler c563 control program assembly file add dd CLAS assembly file asm assembler as563 list file 1st relocatable object library maintainer module ghj object reader ar563 pr563 relocatable object brary aa CLAS object file n soln incremental linker Ik563 stinker map file linker object file lnl out locator description fille dsc locator lc563 C _ locator map file i 1 map Intel Hex Motorola Srrecord IEEE 695 absolute CLAS absolute object file object file object file object file no debug info hex sre abs cld High level language DSP56xxx debugger Execution CrossView xfw56x Environment Figure 2 1 DSP563xx development flow For the DSP5600x toolchain each executable name ends in 56 Overview The next figure explains the relationship between the different parts of the TASKING DSP563xx toolchain and the Motorola toolchain This path is active when the S option of cc563 is used or when the tool set with Motorola tools is selected in EDE C source file CC C compiler cp563 C source file eC iG i C preprocessor C compiler c563
66. W Default Ow Description on flow level With Ow the compiler chooses the best switch method possible jump chain or jump table unless Ot is used Ot forces the generation of a jump table With OW the compiler generates a jump chain for switch statements unless Ot is used Ot forces the generation of a jump table Overview Ot Ow OT Ow Ot OW OT OW jump table smart jump table jump chain Compiler Use 4 65 Example Compile with OW OT 00 always generate jump chain Compile with Ow OT 00 choose best switch method in this case this is also a jump chain x int i void main void switch i case 1 i 0 case 2 i 1 case 3 i 2 default i 3 d gt Section Switch Statement Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Ot OT 4 66 Chapter 4 Ox OX Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Register contents tracking Eg Ox OX Pragma optimize x optimize X on function level Default Ox Description With Ox you switch on register contents tracking With OX you disable register contents tracking Example Compile with OX 00 Compile with Ox 00 register contents tracking the overlay scratch section is removed iA int a b c void main void a 2
67. Wbat bappens wben tbe license server dies FLEXIm applications send periodic heartbeats to the server to discover if it has died What happens when the server dies is then up to the application Some will simply continue periodically attempting to re checkout the license when the server comes back up Some will attempt to re checkout a license a few times and then presumably with some warning exit Some GUI applications will present pop ups to the user periodically letting them know the server is down and needs to be re started How do you tell if a port is already in use 99 44 of the time if it s in use it s because lmgrd is already running on the port or was recently killed and the port isn t freed yet Assuming this is not the case then use telnet host port if it says can t connect its a free port A 41 A 42 Appendix A Does FLEXlm reguire root permissions No There is no part of FLEXIm Imgrd vendor daemon or application that requires root permissions In fact it is strongly recommended that you do not run the license server Imgrd as root since root processes can introduce security risks If Imgrd must be started from the root user for example in a system boot script we recommend that you use the su command to run Imgrd as a non privileged user su username c path lmgrd c path license dat 1 path log where username is a non privileged user and path is the correct paths
68. allocate the rest of the available RAM for the stack as done in the startup code You can use the locator defined labels F 1c bs and F_lc_es in your application to retrieve the begin and end address of the stack Please note that the locator will only allocate a stack section if the application refers to one of the locator defined symbols F 1c bs or F_lc_es This is usually done in the startup code Remember that there must be enough space allocated for the stack which grows upwards For non reentrant functions non register automatics and non register parameters are allocated in a static area and therefore do not use any stack space For reentrant functions a user stack is used in memory Automatics and parameters are all accessed using a user stack pointer register allocated as a 16 bit pointer USP The stack pointer USP points to the last occupied location on the stack If the compatibility option Cs is used the stack pointer USP points to the first free location on the stack The stack frame also contains a so called user frame pointer UFP The saved registers are also accessed using a user stack pointer The user stack pointer USP is maintained in register R7 or R6 if the compatibility option is used The stack must be placed in default memory or at least contain default memory so L memory can be used for it when default memory is X or Y The UFP is always relative to the USP To save registers the UFP is not maintained
69. allowed int i char i 2 NOT allowed A cast may not yield an lvalue to conform strict ANSI C mode same as ACDEFKLOPRSTV disable all strict ANSI C same as Acdefkloprstv default enable all Example To disable C comments enter c563 AP test c 4 16 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Output Enable or disable the Generate Motorola compatible assembly check box Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation Enable or disable the following check boxes User stack pointer points to first free location e All functions with compatible calling convention Use R6 as user stack pointer cag Arguments One or more compatibility option flags Default CACGRS Description You can use the C command line option to switch global compatibility options C without any flags specified enables all compatibility options This is the same as specifying Cacgrs or C1 Flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the lower case letter and switched off with the uppercase letter The following flags are allowed a Motorola assembler compatible output The compiler will use conditional assembly to generate assembly sources that are compatible with the Motorola assembler while retaining all features of the TASKING toolchain The output will be a little longer
70. an optimization method that allows instruction re ordering and parallelization of instructions 2 10 Chapter 2 i 2 2 4 1 REPLACING NOPS In some cases the contents of an address register are not available in the next instruction due to pipeline effects In such cases the compiler generates a NOP instruction The assembler tries to replace these NOPs with other instructions when possible The compiler enables the NOP optimization of the assembler by generating an OPT directive in the assembly source 2 2 4 2 INSTRUCTION PARALLELIZATION PARALLEL MOVES In general one or two moves can be performed together with an arithmetic instruction which are called parallel moves The parallel moves are restricted by the addressing mode used and not all arithmetic instructions can have all possible parallel moves In this manual a place where a parallel move can be performed is called a move slot If there is an arithmetic instruction without a parallel move you can see this as an empty move slot The compiler does not generate parallel moves So all move slots are empty The assembler tries to fill up the move slots as efficiently as possible The compiler enables the parallel move optimization of the assembler by generating an OPT directive in the assembly source 2 2 4 3 HARDWARE DO AND REP LOOPS Typical DSP applications often processes data in loops The available hardware loop instruction supports fast loops It is impo
71. and somewhat harder to read Use this option and the S option of the TASKING assembler together with assembler optimization options to produce an optimized Motorola compatible assembler file A Default TASKING assembler output Compiler Use 4 17 0 1 All functions are generated and called with Motorola compatible calling convention including external functions This also means that any libraries linked in including the C library must have been translated with this option otherwise conflicts in the passing of parameters will result In most cases using the compatible qualifier for only those functions reguiring it will be more convenient and gives more efficient compilation results Default TASKING calling convention Create COFF style debug information Default IEEE 695 style debug information User stack pointer register is R6 instead of R7 This option is required to link objects created by the Motorola C compiler Default Register R7 is used as the user stack pointer Stack pointer points to the next item above the top of stack item first unused location as used by Motorola and by TASKING compilers prior to version 2 2r1 Default Stack pointer points to the top of stack item last used location same as CACGRS disable all default same as Cacgrs all compatibility options Example To enable all compatibility options enter c563 C1 test c 4 18 Chapter 4 c c563 only Opt
72. are stored using default register parameter passing extern int f int extern int g int int extern int h int int int int a0 int al int a2 void foo void f a0 a0 on stack as is this string g a0 al a0 via accumulator remainder on stack h a0 al a2 a0 via A al via B remainder on stack When there are too many arguments to be passed in the registers the remaining arguments are passed on the stack If the _asmfunc qualifier is used the compiler will issue an error message 7 8 Chapter 7 e For C function return types the following registers are used Return type Register Description char A accumulator short int A accumulator long A accumulator _fract A accumulator long _fract A accumulator float AB floating point stack see section 7 8 for floating point information pointer RO scratch address registers spointer RO address registers circular pointer RO MO address registers Table 7 2 Function return types The address register R7 or R6 is used as user stack pointer not for the DSP5600x in the static memory model R6 is used if the corresponding compatibility switch Cr is selected During the execution of the called function callee all registers can be used The caller saves all registers that must be preserved over the function call save by caller calling convention with the exception of the modifier regi
73. assembly does not contain any macros The assembler is also equiped with an optimizer This optimizer takes care of move parallelization NOP removal and DO REP optimization All phases of both frontend and backend of the compiler are combined into one program The compiler does not use intermediate files for communication between the different phases of compilation The backend part is not called for each C statement but starts after a complete C function has been processed by the frontend in memory thus allowing more optimization The compiler only requires one pass over the input file resulting in relatively fast compilation 2 2 2 FRONTEND OPTIMIZATIONS The command line option O controls the amount of optimization applied on the C source Within a source file the pragma pragma optimize sets the optimization level of the compiler Using the pragma certain optimizations can be switched on or off for a particular part of the program Several optimizations cannot be controlled individually for example constant folding will always be done The compiler performs the following optimizations on the intermediate code They are independent of the target processor and the code generation strategy Constant folding Expressions only involving constants are replaced by their result Expression rearrangement Expressions are rearranged to allow more constant folding E g 1 x 3 is transformed into x 1 3 which can be folded
74. assembly file Src assembler as563 Motorola assembly file asm Motorola assembler asm56300 CLAS object file sein Motorola linker dsplnk CLAS absolute object file with debug info cold ads56300 Execution Environment Figure 2 2 Motorola toolchain connection 2 17 2 18 Chapter 2 The program cc563 is a so called control program which facilitates the invocation of various components of the DSP56xxx toolchain C source programs are compiled by the C compiler C source programs are compiled by the compiler assembly source files are passed to the assembler A C preprocessor program is available as an integrated part of the C compiler The control program recognizes the file extensions a and obj as input files for the linker The control program passes files with extensions out and dsc to the locator All other files are considered to be object files and are passed to the linker The control program has options to suppress the locating stage cl the linker stage c or the assembler stage cs Optionally the locator lc563 produces output files in Motorola S record format Motorola CLAS compatible object format or Intel Hex format The default output format is IEEE 695 Normally the control program removes intermediate compilation results as soon as the next phase completes successfully If you want to retain all intermediate files
75. bit model c56 supports three memory models for the DSP5600x static mixed and reentrant By default the c56 compiles for the mixed model You can select one of these models with the M option Programs for the DSP563xx and DSP566xx are always compiled using a reentrant model since a static model would not improve code performance The compiler also enables you to select a different default memory space The default memory space is where all data without memory space modifiers is placed This can be important for backward compatibility and special hardware layouts On the DSP5600x and DSP563xx X Y L and P can be selected Moreover if you select X or Y memory as default memory the stack will be placed in L memory by default This improves the execution speed because on L memory double word moves are possible Separate versions of the C and run time libraries are supplied for all supported models avoiding the need for you to re compile or re build these when using a particular model Language Implementation 3 9 3 2 2 1 16 AND 24 BIT MODELS FOR DSP563XX The DSP563xx supports 24 and 16 bit arithmetic modes and 24 and 16 bit addressing modes The c563 C compiler supports the following models for these modes 24 bit arithmetic and 24 bit addresses 24 bit model 16 bit arithmetic and 24 bit addresses 16 2 bit model 16 bit arithmetic and 16 bit addresses 16 bit model The 24 bit model is the default for c563 c563 can als
76. checksum If this option is specified Imcksum will compute the checksum using the exact case of the F EATUR E s and F EATUR ES ET s encryption code Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 11 3 2 LMDIAG Windows only Name Imdiag diagnose license checkout problems Synopsis Imdiag c cense file n feature Description Imdiag Windows only allows you to diagnose problems when you cannot check out a license If no feature is specified Imdiag will operate on all features in the license file s in your path Imdiag will first print information about the license then attempt to check out each license If the checkout succeeds Imdiag will indicate this If the checkout fails Imdiag will give you the reason for the failure If the checkout fails because Imdiag cannot connect to the license server then you have the option of running extended connection diagnostics These extended diagnostics attempt to connect to each port on the license server node and can detect if the port number in the license file is incorrect Imdiag will indicate each port number that is listening and if it is an Imgrd process Imdiag will indicate this as well If Imdiag finds the vendor daemon for the feature being tested then it will indicate the correct port number for the license file to correct the problem Parameters feature Diagnose this feature only Options c license file Di
77. compiler generates code that pops the return address from the system stack and pushes it on the user stack reentrant function or saves it in a static area on function entry static function Before returning from the function it reverses this operation A leaf function does not move the return address from the system stack The following diagrams show the structure of the stack The first diagram reflects the system stack The second diagram shows the user stack when using reentrant functions 7 16 Chapter 7 system stack SSH SSL high memory loop address loop register LA counter LC sp sp program status system stack counter PC register SR fp fp grows up low memory user stack reentrant functions high memory usp k temporary stack pointer storage adjust local n local 1 stacksize saved registers user stack grows up return address ufp Y parameter 1 s framesize parameter n Y low memory Figure 7 1 Stack diagrams The user stack is defined in the locator description file dsc in directory etc with the keyword stack which results in a section called stack The description file tells the locator where to allocate the user stack Run time Environment 7 17 The user stack size can be controlled with the keyword length size in the description file If you do not specify the stack size the locator will
78. cycle the absolute minimum The hardware loop instruction do can be replaced by a rep because there is only one instruction left within the loop The optimization of DO to REP loops can be controlled with the OR Or command line option of the compiler This option can also be used with the pragma optimize to turn the optimization on or off for some code parts Example pragma optimize R turn DO to REP optim off for some loop pragma optimize r turn DO to REP optim on Overview 2 13 The compiler will not use a hardware loop when e the loop conditions cannot be evaluated in DO REP instructions e a function call is detected inside the loop unless hardware stack extension is active e the allocated hardware stack space is exhausted When one of these criteria is met the compiler generates loops that consist of branch and jump instructions which make it possible to do some optimizations not possible on hardware DO loops The nesting depth of hardware DO loops can be controlled with the L command line option as each loop takes two hardware stack loads Counting the nesting is restricted to one function level Unless hardware stack extension is enabled loops containing a function call will not be implemented as hardware loops The compiler cannot determine the hardware stack use of the called function and must avoid exhausting it When the stack depth is exceeded the compiler will not genera
79. d gt See also _write Returns NULL if successful or EOF on error qsort finclude lt stdlib h gt _reentrant void gsort const ON base SHE CN CNN dL ES dL ey dine C9 my Const voire p CoOmsic weasel Jy This function sorts an array of n members The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The given array is sorted in ascending order according to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Libraries 6 47 raise finclude lt signal h gt int raise int sig Sends the signal sig to the program d gt See also signal Returns zero if successful or a non zero value if unsuccessful rand finclude lt stdlib h gt dime geeumel woe p Returns a sequence of pseudo random integers in the range 0 to RAND MAX qo See also srand realloc include lt stdlib h gt void realloc void p size_t size Reallocates the space for the object pointed to by p The contents of the object will be the same as before calling realloc The maximum space that can be allocated can be changed by customizing the heap size see the section Heap By default no heap is allocated When realloc is used while no heap is defined the linker gives an error See also malloc In this implementation the returned address will be the same as the original address if realloc is successfully used to decrease the size of a buffer The minimal amou
80. delay slot With ON you disable NOP insertion The assembler is instructed to insert nops instead 4 54 Chapter 4 Example Jj Compile with ON NOP is not inserted Compile with On NOP is inserted int i void main void 0 call a function for i0 i lt 1 i a ij d gt Section Replacing NOPs Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 55 Oo OO Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Generate parallel moves ss Oo OO Pragma optimize o optimize O on flow level Default Oo Description With Oo the compiler generates the opt op option for the assembler to enable move parallelization and nop reduction With OO you disable the assembler optimization Example To disable the assembler optimization enter c563 OO test c Section Replacing NOPs and section Instruction Parallelization parallel moves in chapter Overview Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 56 Chapter 4 Op OP Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Constant and copy propagation data flow EE Op OP Pragma optimize p optimize P on function level Default Op
81. either _compatible or callee save LIBRARIES ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Libraries 6 3 6 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the library functions delivered with the compiler Some functions e g printf scan can be edited to match your needs c563 comes with libraries in object format per memory model and with header files containing the appropriate prototype of the library functions The library functions are also shipped in source code C or assembly A number of standard operations within C are too complex to generate inline code for e g 32 bit signed divide These operations are implemented as run time library functions The run time library routines are added to the C library The C libraries supplied with the compiler are suitable for Mx the default data space X memory In the following cases you must rebuild the libraries to avoid conflicts if you change the default data space or change the data space of the user stack default L memory ML e if you change the user stack pointer Cr e if you select the default calling convention Cc or compatible e if you select the old style Motorola compatible stack frame Cs Use the same options for both rebuilding the libraries as building your application The sources of these libraries and a makefile are included in the compiler package 6 4 Chapter 6 6 2 REBUILDING LIBRARIES Use the following procedure to r
82. exist in the network database probably etc hosts Im server lost all connections This message is logged when all the connections to a server are lost This probably indicates a network problem NO DAEMON lines exiting The license daemon logs this message if there are no DAEMON lines in the license file Since there are no vendor daemons to start there is nothing to do NO DAEMON line for name A vendor daemon logs this error if it cannot find its own DAEMON name in the license file Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 31 4 3 DAEMON SOFTWARE ERROR MESSAGES accept message An error was detected in the accept system call ATTEMPT TO START VENDOR DAEMON xxx witb NO MASTER A vendor daemon was started with no master selected This is an internal consistency error in the daemons BAD PID message from nm pid xxx msg A top level vendor daemon received an invalid PID message from one of its children daemon number xxx BAD SCONNECT message message An invalid server connect message was received Cannot create pipes for server communication The pipe call failed Can t allocate server table space A malloc error Check swap space Connection to node TIMED OUT The daemon could not connect to node Error sending PID to master server The vendor server could not send its PID to the top level server in the hierarchy Illegal connection request to DAEMON A connection request was
83. fastest code 04 same as OacefghijLnOprSTuvwxyz Set optimization flags to let c563 generate the fastest code but switch off optimizations that affect the ability to debug amp The flags 0 to 4 cannot be concatenated with other flags For example Oa3c is not allowd OacE is allowed 4 38 Chapter 4 Example To optimize for code size and debug information enter c563 O2 test c l gt Compiler Use 4 39 Oa OA Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Relaxed alias checking requires CSE EE Oa OA Pragma optimize a optimize A on function level Default Oa Description With Oa you relax alias checking If you specify this option c563 will not erase remembered register contents of user variables if a write operation is done via an indirect calculated address You must be sure this is not done in your C code check pointers before turning on this option amp The option Oc must be on to use this option With OA you specify strict alias checking If you specify this option the compiler erases all register contents of user variables when a write operation is done via an indirect calculated address Example An example is given in section Alias in this chapter l gt 0 Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 40 Chapter 4
84. for the jumptable memory pragma Please change this memory type into either X Y or P W 568 Depth of hardware stack limited without disabling hardware stack extension The L option is best served in combination with the Mn option Mn assures maximum hardware stack array capacity when stack extension is off If stack extension is on there is no reason to limit the stack array because it is automatically extended into data memory when exceeded W 569 Motorola compatibility mode selected with stack in L memory use ML to disable The Motorola debugger does not support placing the stack in L memory So this combination is of limited use E 570 compatible function definition not allowed with new style stackframe use Cs to disable The Motorola compatibility calling convention requires the old style stack layout stack pointer points to first unused location F 571 Maximum number of nested loops exceeded Control structures and compound statements have been nested too deeply F 572 arg of function qualifier bank out of range check p option The indicated argument in the bank function qualifier is out of range Use the command line option ppage page is 1 8 to specify the total number of pages 5 38 Chapter 5 W 573 Not possible to use different calling conventions on same function function qualifier qualifier ignored You specified two calling conventions on the same function The second function gualifier is ignored Use
85. fractional value without generating any conversion code Returns the result Example int i 0x400000 _fract f f int2fract i Code move f lt 40 y0 move y0 x Fi move y0 x Ff 3 52 Chapter 3 _labs long labs long operand Absolute long value Generate ABS instruction Returns the result Example volatile long la 1b la _labs lb Code move xX SS_main 18 b move x ss_mainr17 b0 abs b _labs lb move bl x ss main 20 la move b0 x ss main 19 la _Sfabs dey _ificaeie _ lluosi Long _ifieecie Cyoxeu eunrol p Absolute long _ fract value Generate ABS instruction Returns the result Example long _fract lfa lfb lfb _lfabs lfa Code move x SS_main 8 b move x ss main 7 b0 abs b _lfabs lfb move b x ss main 10 lfa move b0 x ss main 9 lfa Language Implementation 3 53 _lfraci2long long _lfract2long _lfract operand This intrinsic function changes a long fractional value into a long value without generating any conversion code Returns the result Exambple long l long _fract lf 0 5 l _lfract2long lf Code move lt 40 x1 move 0 x0 move x1 x F1f 1 move x0 x Flf move xl x Fl l move x0 x Fl _long2lfract Jbr ewe _ dieere lonc yeu Yy This intrinsic function changes a long value into a long fractional value without generating any conversion code Returns the result Example
86. has no output and uses a scratch register for the copying action it also demonstrates the use of C expressions in the parameters Notice that the address registers have been declared as output registers because they are destroyed in the routine To get the same registers in the input parameter list the number of the output parameter is used instead of the constraint character The instruction template has been split up over several shorter source lines for better readability The lines can be written on a single line as well with n seguences int _Y array 100 void main void _ asm do 20 copy Mn move y 0 y0 Mn move yO y 1 Vn copy Mn lA aan O amp array 20 1 amp array 40 yO Generated code move Farray 20 r0 move fFarrayr40 rl do 120 copy move y r0 r y0 move y0 y rl t _copy 3 38 Chapter 3 Example 6 The previous example can be improved in two ways the loop count can be made a parameter as well and we can leave it to the compiler to decide which scratch integer register to use It is better to reserve a work register through an unassigned output parameter than through the reserved list because specifying a group gives the compiler more optimization opportunities than handpicking a register define BLOCKSIZE 10 int _Y array 10 BLOCKSIZE void main void _ asm do 425 copy NU move y 0 2 Nea
87. heap space which the malloc routine can use for allocating memory 4 LINKING MOTOROLA CLAS COFF The TASKING linker has the capability to read in Motorola CLAS COFF object files and library files It will convert debug information in these files into that of the TASKING IEEE 695 object format This allows debugging a program compiled with the Motorola tools with CrossView Pro The TASKING linker looks at the filename extension to determine what kind of input file it is In order for the linker to recognize a file as a Motorola CLAS COFF file the file must have the extension cln A Motorola CLAS COFF library file must have the extension clb Example This example links the CLAS COFF object file util cln with the program prog c The Motorola library is specified as well in order to resolve any run time routines which might be called from util cln The control program automatically links with the TASKING libraries cc563 g prog c util cln lib563x clb B 8 Appendix B 7 Known restrictions The Motorola linker locator uses internally defined symbols like DSIZE This symbol defines the beginning of the dynamic stack The TASKING linker locator does not know the DSIZE symbol Therefore this will remain an unresolved symbol This will only happen if you link with the Motorola startup code crt 0563x c1n Use the TASKING startup code instead The TASKING libraries are translated with a different calling convention than the M
88. hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase O Cc oO single character converted to unsigned char s S char or _packed char respectively a string of non white space characters The argument should point to an array of characters or packed characters respectively large enough to hold the string and a terminating NULL character float e E float lt m ddddddexxx or m ddddddE xx where the number of d s is specified by the precision g G float uses 96e or E if the exponent is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision otherwise uses f int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument No scanning is done pointer hexadecimal 32 bit value which must be entered without Ox prefix Matches a string of input characters from the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to terminate the string Specifying includes the character in the set of scanning characters Matches a string of input characters not in the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to terminate the string Specifying includes the T character in the set Literal no assignment is done Table 6 3 Scanf conversion characters Libraries 6 51 setbuf include lt stdio h gt void setbut FILE stream char but Buffering is turned off for the stream if buf is NULL Otherwi
89. host actually improves performance Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 43 Does FLEXIm work witb NFS Yes FLEXlm has no direct interaction with NFS FLEXlm uses an NFS mounted file like any other application Does FLEXIm work with ATM ISDN Token Ring etc In general these have no impact on FLEXIm FLEXIm requires TCP IP or SPX Novell Netware So long as TCP IP works FLEXIm will work Does FLEXIm work witb subnets fully qualified names multiple domains etc Yes although this behavior was improved in v3 0 and v6 0 When a license server and a client are located in different domains fully qualified host names have to be used A fully qualified hostname is of the form node domain where node is the local hostname usually returned by the hostname command or uname n domain is the internet domain name e g globes com To ensure success with FLEXIm across domains do the following 1 Make the sure the fully gualified hostname is the name on the SERVER line of the license file 2 Make sure ALL client nodes as well as the server node are able to telnet to that fully qualified hostname For example if the host is locally called speedy and the domain name is corp com local systems will be able to logon to speedy via telnet speedy But very often telnet speedy corp com will fail locally Note that this telnet command will always succeed on hosts in other domains assuming everything is
90. i Stack or memory operand number other operand same as number Used when in and output operands must be the same Table 3 4 Available input output operand constraints Available operand modifiers Char Constraint Operand Remark j A C nO n7 Offset register matching with address register You must save and restore these registers V A C m0 m7 Modulo register matching with address register this modifier is not supported in Motorola C e D a1 b1 High part of accumulator D a0 b0 Low part of accumulator D a2 b2 Extension word of accumulator g R S x1 x0 y1 y0 Other part of input register i R S X y Long input register matching with integer sized input register f m X y pi l Insert memory space for the operand i 0000 FFFF Force 16 bit sized constant i 000000 FFFFFF Force 24 bit sized constant Table 3 5 Available operand modifiers Possible work registers d aU al a2 b bO bl b2 xy xO xl Yy YO yl r0 r7 n0 n7 except user stack pointer r and n register Language Implementation 3 35 is m0 m7 cannot be reserved they must be restored in the template to 1 after use Of course the associated r register must be set free either by making it an output parameter or by placing it in the reserved register list Most of the examples below are very trivial and could be coded in C just as well with similar results
91. in struct union A R7 is replaced by that case A points points to the address R6 if R7 is used for to the address to store it user stack pointer where it is stored DSP563xx A B rest on stack Y1 YO R2 N2 A except when DSP566xx R3 N3 R7 N7 returning a struct union in When returning a R7 N7 are replaced that case R7 struct union R7 by R6 N6 if R7 is points to the points to the address used for user stack address where it is to store it pointer stored Table 7 3 Compatible calling convention In the save by callee calling convention selected with the _callee_save qualifier all registers are preserved by the callee The compiler tries to limit the number of registers used in the function when this has been selected The parameter passing convention is the same as the default Although this can have advantages in some cases the default calling convention in combination with the flexible register allocation guarantees the best performance An example of the _callee_save qualifier is listed below ifndef _CALLEE SAVE define _who_saves else define _who_saves _callee_save endif int i _who_saves void _ inc void itt 7 9 7 10 Chapter 7 Default it will compile with the standard save by caller calling convention and the assembly will look as follows F inc move x Fi r3 move r3 move r3 x Ei rts But when you compile with the define CALLEE SAVE the callee
92. include lt stdlib h gt chae getenv const chae name Returns the environment string associated with name or NULL if no string exists gets include lt stdio h gt chari gets c hr M Reads all characters from standard input until a newline is found The newline is replaced by a NULL character d gt See also read Returns a pointer to the read string or NULL on error gmtime finclude lt time h gt yen cm epum COME cima e SED P Converts the calender time tp into Coordinated Universal Time UTC Returns a structure representing the UTC or NULL if UTC is not available Libraries 6 35 isalnum finclude lt ctype h gt ime aSsellingna sit el g Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character or a number A Z a z 0 9 isalpba finclude lt ctype h gt Tone cLeelleineu aise e J P Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character A Z a z isascii finclude lt ctype h gt ime 3bgeugeuid aime Yp Returns a non zero value when c is in the range of 0 and 127 This is a non ANSI function iscntrl finclude lt ctype h gt ime Lemel ame gp Returns a non zero value when c is a control character isdigit finclude ctype h IME gredyd dcm Jy Returns a non zero value when c is a numeric character 0 9 6 36 Chapter 6 isgrapb finclude lt ctype h gt Me glec ola iae Gl J Returns a non zero value when c is pri
93. integer bitfield either signed or unsigned or an object of enumeration type may be used in an expression wherever an integer may be used If a signed int can represent all the values of the original type then the value is converted to signed int otherwise the value will be converted to unsigned int This process is called integral promotion Integral promotion is also performed on function pointers and function parameters of integral types using the old style declaration To avoid problems with implicit type conversions you are advised to use function prototypes Many operators cause conversions and yield result types in a similar way The effect is to bring operands into a common type which is also the type of the result This pattern is called the usual aritbmetic conversions 3 20 Chapter 3 Integral promotions are performed on both operands then if either operand is unsigned long the other is converted to unsigned long Otherwise if one operand is long and the other is unsigned int the effect depends on whether a long can represent all values of an unsigned int ifso the unsigned int operand is converted to long if not both are converted to unsigned long Otherwise if one operand is long the other is converted to long Otherwise if either operand is unsigned int the other is converted to unsigned int Otherwise both operands have type int Sometimes surprising results may occur for example when unsigned char is
94. on different file systems See the file iowrite c in the libNsrc directory for the example implementations of this low level output function Returns the character written or EOF if an error occurred _lseek include lt stdio h gt long _ils elk iba iol long Oise dme Gucubgnum JF Low level file positioning function This function sets the file position of a file Iseek is used by all file positioning functions fgetpos fseek fsetpos ftell rewind The delivered library is targeted at TASKING or Motorola FSS File System Simulation The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function must be customized to perform I O on different file systems See the file_lseek c in the 1ibNsrc directory for the example implementations of this low level file function Returns the new file position or EOF if an error occurred Libraries 6 17 open include lt stdio h gt int _open const char filename int flags Low level file open function This function opens a file with name filename and access type flags open is called from the function _fopen and from system initialization for stdin stdout and stderr With FSS File System Simulation this function opens a file on the host system The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function can be adapted to work on different file systems the given stream should be properly
95. opened Returns the descriptor of the file opened or 1 if an error occurred _packsize include lt string h gt sizent _ eye ae COMmsic ehari jm r Returns the size of a string when it is packed _packstr include lt string h gt Bpecked clneue acsi dekec ea 4 jo cons elmveue 9 winye p Pack string pointed to by unp in the buffer pointed to by p Returns a pointer to the packed string 6 18 Chapter 6 i pstr get echar joe eret eee clmaue ja See ie glocb Jp This function should be used to obtain one character from a packed string The packed string is supplied via the p argument The index in the string is supplied via the i zx argument This index is the count in bytes starting at Zero Returns the character at the given index in the packed string Example int printpstring packed char p int idx 0 char c while c pstr get p idxt putchar c return idx qo See also section section 3 18 Packed Strings pstr put NOL exse qwe exelkexel leue jo Sue lb sob ehar p This function updates one character one byte in a packed string pointed to by p The character is supplied in the argument c and the index in idx This index is the count in bytes starting at zero Returns nothing Libraries 6 19 Example finclude lt stdio h gt _packed char p 10 void main void int Zdxj char c a for idx 0 idx lt 10 i
96. output routine 6 12 Chapter 6 File Imple mented Routine name Description Reason stdlib h lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt T lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Pe ae Deel et na ad abort abs atexit atof atoi atol bsearch calloc div exit free getenv labs Idiv malloc gsort strtod strtol strtoul rand realloc srand system mblen mbstowcs mbtowc wcstombs wctomb Calls _ exit in cstart Calls _ exit in cstart No OS present No OS present wide chars not supported wide chars not supported wide chars not supported wide chars not supported wide chars not supported Libraries File Imple z o o o Routine name Description Reason string h memchr memcmp memcpy memmove memset strcat strchr strcmp strcoll strcpy strcspn strerror strlen strncat strncmp strncpy strpbrk strrchr strspn strstr strtok strxfrm wide chars not supported wide chars not supported time h lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 7 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt T lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt asctime clock ctime difftime gmtime localtime mktime strftime time real time clock not supported but the DSP timer is used to maintain relative time 6 13 6 14 Chapter 6 i 6 6 2 C LIBRARY INTERFACE DESCRIPTION close include lt stdio h g
97. pointer 24424 Oto 16777215U float double 2448 1 1754940E 38 3 4028235E 38 enum 24 8388608 to 8388607 _ complex 2 24 1 1 for both fields Table 3 3 Data types DSP5600x char short in implicit automatic conversions Chapter 3 t and long are all integral types supporting all although the char type is 8 bit each char occupies one memory word because the DSP56xxx has no instructions to access one byte efficiently char and short are treated as 8 bit and 16 bit int respectively the DSP56xxx convention is used storing variables with the most significant part at the higher memory address Little Endian Double is equal to float Language Implementation 3 17 3 3 1 THE FRACTIONAL DATA TYPE The compiler supports the additional data type _fract to do fixed point arithmetic without the use of expensive special libraries The implementation of this data type depends on the selected family member Fractions can have values between 1 and 1 and can be used like integers and floating points and combine little code overhead with a high dynamic range constant with value 0 3333 const _fract one third 1 0 3 Fixed point arithmetic follows the rules for floating point calculations Floating point constants in 1 1 are interpreted as a fractional type which allows fixed point arithmetic with fractional constants without suffixes or casting Floating point
98. pointer register can not be reserved Reserved user stack pointer will be ignored 5 32 Chapter 5 Backend W 501 function qualifier used on non function A function qualifier can only be used on functions W 502 fract constant saturation occurred An overflow occurred The following is an example of this warning _fract a int f void a 75 5 1 25 overflow E 503 cache pragma requires function address The argument of a cache_region_start and cache_region_end pragma must be a function pointer defined with the cache region qualifier W 504 24 bit pointer calculation requires mode switching A pointer calculation is generated for the 16 24 bit model that requires switching to the 24 bit model temporarily and therefore gives inefficient coding W 508 function qualifier duplicated Only one function qualifier is allowed The duplicate qualifier is ignored F 509 invalid name option The specified option is not valid See the invocation syntax for a list of options and their suboptions F 510 illegal number in option name For the c option only the values 128 and 256 are allowed The L option only accepts numbers in the range 1 15 The m option only accepts the values 0 and 1 See the invocation syntax for more information E 511 interrupt function must have void result and void parameter list A function declared with interrupt n may not accept any arguments and may not return anything Compiler
99. representation day of the month 01 31 hour 24 hour clock 00 23 hour 12 hour clock 01 12 day of the year 001 366 month 01 12 minute 00 59 local eguivalent of AM or PM second 00 59 week number of the year Sunday as first day of the week 00 53 weekday 0 6 Sunday is 0 week number of the year Monday as first day of the week 00 53 local date representation local time representation year without century 00 99 year with century time zone name if any 96 Ordinary characters including the terminating 0 are copied into s No more than smax characters are placed into s Returns the number of characters 0 not included or zero if more than smax characters where produced 6 58 Chapter 6 strlen finclude lt string h gt ale ie cite lens cons ehari Oe Returns the length of the string in cs not counting the NULL character strncat include lt string h gt chori yc ec ee Clim Ss CONSE cle Ce ene Em p Concatenates string ct to string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character Returns S strncmp finclude lt string h gt IME Sweden cm Const Chee Cs const Glaze CE Size Ue Jm p Compares at most n bytes of string cs to string ct Returns 0ifcs lt ct O ifcs ct gt 0ifcs gt ct strncpy include lt string h gt Chaz Sexe cles S come Glue Ce Size b m p Copies string ct onto the stri
100. section 3 16 DSP563xx Cacbe Support contains more infomation about these pragmas 4 88 Chapter 4 iterate at least once no iterate at least once default For the compiler it is not always possible to determine whether a loop condition is valid for the first iteration In these cases the compiler will generate code to check the loop end condition for this first iteration If it is certain that the loop will be executed at least once this code is superfluous The iterate at least once pragma tells the compiler that the following loop s are iterated at least once and that it does not have to generate the code for checking the end condition for the first iteration This pragma remains valid until the no iterate at least once pragma is specified A If the iterate_at_least_once pragma is specified for a loop which is not iterated at least once the results of the loop will not be as expected Example void foo int i while i gt 0 printf Sd n i Ly Code Ffoo move r7 do al L11 move al n5 move al x r7 1 move n5 a move L8 r0 jsr Fprintf move x r7 1 a sub l a L11 void a r0 n5 move r7 rts The compiler does not know the start value of i and therefore cannot predict whether the end condition is true for the first loop The iterate at least once pragma tells the compiler that the condition is valid for the first iteration and the compiler will not generate code to test the con
101. space needed may vary from call to call As a result the compiler does not know how much space should be allocated for passing parameters to the function with a variable argument list For non reentrant functions with variable argument lists the compiler generates eleven words For long argument lists this may not be enough To overcome this problem functions with variable argument lists are implicitly reentrant in the mixed memory model 3 2 2 6 REENTRANT MODEL If recursion or reentrancy is required the application must be compiled using the reentrant scheme It implies that all functions are declared _reentrant The code generator then uses a software stack to pass parameters and for allocation of automatics Register R7 is used as stack pointer by default Language Implementation 3 13 3 2 2 7 MODEL DSP DEFMEM AND STKMEM c563 introduces the predefined preprocessor symbols _ MODEL _DSP and _ DEFMEM The value of MODEL represents the memory model selected Mmodel option The value of _DSP represents the processor family 0 1 3 or 6 for the different families The value of _ DEFMEM represents the default memory space selected Mmem option This can be very helpful in making conditional C code in one source module used for different applications in different memory models See also the section Portable C Code explaining the include file c56 h The _STKMEM symbol represents the memory space used for the stack i
102. stop at obj cc Compile C files to c and stop Compiler Use Option Description cl Do not locate stop at out clas Set locator output file format to CLAS compatible cs Do not assemble compile C and C files to src and stop file Read arguments from file denotes standard input ieee Set locator output file format to IEEE 695 default ihex Set locator output file format to Intel Hex nolib Do not link with the standard libraries o file Specify the output file srec Set locator output file format to Motorola S records tiof Set locator output file format to TIOF 695 tmp Keep intermediate files V Show command invocations v0 Show command invocations but do not start them WC Enable C and assembler warnings for C files Table 4 1 Control program options 4 5 4 6 Chapter 4 t 4 2 COMPILERS The invocation syntax of the C compilers is c563 option file When you use a UNIX shell Bourne shell C shell arguments containing special characters such as and must be enclosed with or escaped The option in the C shell becomes or The C compilers accept C source file names and command line options in random order Source files are processed in the same order as they appear on the command line left to right Options are indicated by a leading character Each C source file is compiled separately and
103. the compilers generate an output file with suffix src per C source module containing assembly source code The priority of the options is left to right when two options conflict the first most left one takes effect The D and U options are not considered conflicting options so they are processed left to right for each source file You can overrule the default output file name with the o option The compiler uses each o option only once so it is possible to specify multiple o options for multiple source files When you invoke c563 without any argument the invocation syntax is displayed same as option A summary of the options is given below The next section describes the options in more detail Option Description Display invocation syntax A flag Control language extensions Cflag Control compatibility options Dmacro zdef Define preprocessor macro E ml l c i p x Preprocess options or emit dependencies H file Include file before starting compilation ldirectory Look in directory for include files Lnumber Specify depth of hardware stack use M m s r xly l p L Select memory model mixed static or reentrant Select default memory space X Y L or P Specify stack not in L memory only for c56 Compiler Use Option Description M 24 1624 16 6 n x y l p L Oflag R dname zsname Umacro err f file g fll n c mmask n
104. the license server about a changed license data file If Imreread succeeds informing the license server but the error message persists there are basically three possibilities The license key is incorrect If this is the case then there must be an error message in the log file of Imgrd Correct the key using the license data sheet for the product Finally rerun Imreread The log file of Imgrd is usually specified to Imgrd at startup with the 1 option or with gt Your network has more than one FLEXIm license server daemon and the default license file location for Imreread differs from the default assumed by the program Also there must be more than one license file Try one of the following solutions on the same host which produced the error message type lmreread c usr local flexlm licenses license dat setLM LICENSE FILE to the license file location and retry the Imreread command use the Imreread program supplied with the product SW000098 Flexible License Manager SW000098 is bundled with all TASKING products Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 35 3 There is a protocol version mismatch between Imgrd and the daemon with the name Tasking the vendor daemon according to FLEXIm terminology or there is some other internal error These errors are always written to the log file of Imgrd The solution is to upgrade the Imgrd daemon to the one supplied in SW000098 the bundled Flexible License M
105. the only storage class specifier allowed in a parameter declaration is register 63 name redeclared The specified identifier was already declared The compiler uses the second declaration The following is an example of this error struct T int i struct T long j error 64 incompatible redeclaration of ame The specified identifier was already declared All declarations in the same function or module that refer to the same object or function must specify compatible types The following is an example of this error 0 int 15 char i error 66 function ame variable name not used A variable is declared which is never used You can remove this unused variable or you can use the w66 option to suppress this warning 67 illegal suboption option The suboption is not valid for this option Check the invocation syntax for a list of all available suboptions 68 function zame parameter name not used A function parameter is declared which is never used You can remove this unused parameter or you can use the w68 option to suppress this warning 69 declaration contains more than one basic type specifier Type specifiers may not be repeated The following is an example of this error int char i error Compiler Diagnostics 5 13 E 70 break outside loop or switch A break statement may only appear in a switch or a loop do for or while So if 0 break is not allowed 71 illegal t
106. to lmgrd 1icense dat and debug log file You will have to ensure that the vendor daemons listed in patb to license license dat have execute permissions for username The paths to all the vendor daemons in the license file are listed on each DAEMON line Is it ok to run lmgrd as root UNIX only It is not prudent to run any command particularly a daemon as root on UNIX as it may pose a security risk to the Operating System Therefore we recommend that Imgrd be run as a non privileged user not root If you are starting Imgrd from a boot script we recommend that you use su username c umask 022 path lmgrd c path license dat 1 path log to run Imgrd as a non privileged user Does FLEXIm licensing impose a heavy load on tbe network No but partly this depends on the application and end user s use A typical checkout request requires 5 messages and responses between client and server and each message is 150 bytes When a server is not receiving requests it requires virtually no CPU time When an application or Imstat requests the list of current users this can significantly increase the amount of networking FLEXlm uses depending on the number of current users Also prior to FLEXIm v5 use of port amp host can increase network load since the license file is down loaded from the server to the client port amp host should be if possible limited to small license files say lt 50 features In v5 port
107. to install RPM packages so either login as root or use the su command 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Mount the CD ROM on a directory for example cdrom See the Linux manual pages about mount for details 1 6 3 is Chapter 1 Go to the directory on which the CD ROM is mounted cd cdrom To install or upgrade all products at once issue the following command rpm U SW rpm This will install or upgrade all products in the default installation directory usr local Every RPM package will create a single directory in the installation directory The RPM packages are relocatable so it is possible to select a different installation directory with the prefix option For instance when you want to install the products in opt use the following command rpm U prefix opt SW rpm For Red Hat 6 0 users The prefix option does not work with RPM version 3 0 included in the Red Hat 6 0 distribution Please upgrade to RPM verion 3 0 3 or higher or use the tar gz file installation described in the next section if you want to install in a non standard directory 1 3 2 DEBIAN INSTALLATION 1 Login as a user Be sure you have read write and execute permissions in the installation directory Otherwise login as root or use the su command Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Mount the CD ROM on a directory for example cdrom See the Linux manual pages about mount for details
108. use the TASKING software product the location of the license file must be known If it differs from the default location c flexlm license dat for Windows usr local flexlm licenses license dat for UNIX then you must set the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE See section 1 5 6 Modifying tbe License File Location for more information Step 6 Now all license infomation is entered the license manager must be started see section section 1 5 4 Or if it is already running you must notify the license manager that the license file has changed by entering the command located in the flexlm bin directory lmreread On Windows you can also use the graphical FLEXIm Tools Imtools Start Imtools if you have used the defaults this can be done by selecting Start Programs TASKING FLEXlm FLEXlm Tools fill in the current license file location if this field is empty click on the Reread button and then on OK Another option is to reboot your PC 1 14 Chapter 1 i The software product and license file are now properly installed Wbere to go from bere The license manager daemon must always be up and running Read section 1 5 4 on how to start the daemon and read section 1 5 5 for information how to set up the license daemon to run automatically If the license manager is running you can now start using the TASKING product d gt See the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm appendix for detailed information on FL
109. value 1 0 will be interpreted as the closest fractional value to 1 possible Long Fractional Type The long keyword can be used in combination with the _fract data type The result is a fractional type with double precision 32 bit or 48 bit depending on the selected family member Example long _fract Lfval Rounding Rounding can be controlled by the intrinsic function round see section Intrinsic Functions Operations You can use all operations on fractional data which are also allowed on floating point numbers As an example you can add two fractional numbers but you cannot exclusive or them In addition you can use the shift operators on a fractional number the right side of the shift operator must be an integral type 3 18 Chapter 3 Example _fract f void main f lt lt 2 multiply f by 4 Wrapping and Saturation The default behavior of C fractional variables for an overflow is going into saturation Integer calculations will always truncate on overflows For some calculations such as those related to the maintenance of phase angle it is useful to let an overflow wrap around e g 75 5 gt 1 25 wraps to 75 In the Motorola DSP it can be done efficiently by storing A1 directly which bypasses the saturation The nosat keyword allows to define variables which will wrap around instead of going into saturation during calculations Example _fract nosat Angle Th
110. x Fcc gt xe ext unsigned long ext unsigned long operand Generate instructions to extend high order part of accumulator for unsigned chars and shorts Generate MOVE instructions Returns the result Example volatile unsigned long ula ulb ula _ext ulb Code move x ss_mainr14 b move x ss main 13 b0 move 0 b2 move bl x ss_maint16 move b0 x ss_maint15 E ula ula 3 49 3 50 Chapter 3 _fabs Mundo NES NE MEI ec NE Absolute _fract value Generate ABS instruction Returns the result Example volatile fract fa fb fb fabs fa Code move x ss_mainrll b fb abs Db _fabs fb move b x ss_maint12 fa _fract2int IME Erec Aime Erect ejereieeiarel F This intrinsic function changes a fractional value into an integer value without generating any conversion code Returns the result Example int i _fract f 0 5 i _fract2int f Code move 4 40 y0 move y0 x Ff move y0 x Fi Language Implementation 3 51 _fsgrt ceace iE o iee race Oye Je Calculate the square root of the fractional operand Calls the run time library function R sgrt Returns the result Example volatile fract fa fb fa _fsqrt fb ss Gode Ls move x Ss_maintll b jsr Rfsgrt move b x ss main 12 _int2fract fb _fsqrt fb fa _Ere e _limeZiricacie djs eye p This intrinsic function changes an integer value into a
111. 14 makefile automatic creation of 2 29 updating 2 29 malloc 6 39 mask 4 33 math h 6 7 acos 6 21 asin 6 22 alan 6 22 atan2 6 22 ceil 6 24 cos 6 25 cosh 6 25 exp 6 26 fabs 6 27 floor 6 28 fmod 6 29 frexp 6 32 Idexp 6 37 log 6 38 log10 6 38 modf 6 42 pow 6 43 sin 6 53 sinh 6 53 sqrt 0 54 tan 6 62 tanh 6 62 mblen 6 39 mbstowcs 6 40 mbtowc 6 40 memchr 6 40 memcmp 6 41 memcpy 6 41 memmove 6 41 memory copy 3 54 fill 3 54 memory access 3 4 memory mapped I O 3 87 memory mapped register 3 21 file 3 21 memory model 3 8 5600x limitations 3 11 566xx 3 9 mixed 3 8 mixed 5600x 3 11 mixed 563xx 3 9 reentrant 3 8 3 12 static 3 8 static 5600x 3 9 memory type 3 27 memset 6 41 mktime 6 42 model selection 3 87 modf 6 42 Motorola CLAS format 2 18 Motorola examples run from EDE B 8 Motorola S record 2 18 move slot 2 10 multi line macros 4 20 no iterate at leat once 4 88 node locked license 1 10 nop insertion 4 53 nopack strings 4 90 Index 12 nosource 4 90 o offsetof 6 42 operating mode register 7 12 optimization 4 35 4 37 backend 2 5 2 8 code 3 89 frontend 2 5 2 6 specific 2 9 absolute addressing mode usage 2 14 bitfields 2 14 bardware DO and REP loops 2 10 instruction parallelization 2 10 MAC instruction generation 2 14 replacing NOPs 2 10 optimization backend allocation grapb 2 8 dead store elimination
112. 19 unsigned int 3 15 3 16 unsigned long 3 15 3 16 unsigned short 3 15 3 16 dead code elimination 2 8 dead store elimination 2 9 debug information 4 26 debugger starting 2 27 detailed option description compiler 4 10 4 82 development flow 2 16 difftime 6 26 directory separator 4 84 div 6 26 DO loop 2 10 nesting depth 2 13 double 3 15 3 16 DSP 2 3 dynamic scaling 3 89 EDE 2 21 build an application 2 25 load files 2 25 open a project 2 25 select a CPU 2 25 select a toolchain 2 22 start a new project 2 28 starting 2 21 embedded development environment See EDE endasm 4 87 endoptimize 4 90 enum 3 15 3 16 environment variable C563INC 4 29 4 83 C56INC 4 29 4 83 LM LICENSE FILE 1 16 A 6 overview of 2 19 PATH 1 3 1 7 1 9 TMPDIR 1 4 js 7 1 9 used by toolcbain 2 19 errno h 6 7 error level 5 4 errors 5 5 backend 5 32 FLEXIm license A 33 frontend 5 5 example starting EDE 2 21 using EDE 2 21 using tbe control program 2 29 using tbe makefile 2 31 examples run from EDE B 8 execution speed 3 86 exit 6 26 exit status 5 4 exp 6 26 expression propagation 4 42 expression rearrangement 2 6 expression simplification 2 7 extensions to C 3 3 external memory interface 7 4 F F START 7 4 fabs 6 27 fac 7 27 FAQ FLEXIm A 37 fast loops 4 51 fclose 6 27 fcntl h 6 7 feof 6 27 ferror 6 27 fflush 6 27 fgetc 6 28 fgetpos 6 28 fgets 6 28
113. 1995 year Altium BV Serial 00000000 c563 V TASKING DSP563xx 6xx compiler vx yrz Build nnn Copyright 1996 year Altium BV Serials 00000000 Compiler Use 4 81 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics Select Display all warnings Suppress all warnings Or Suppress only certain warnings If you select Suppress only certain warnings type the numbers of the warnings you want to suppress in the corresponding field E wii wstrict Arguments Optionally the warning number to suppress Description w suppresses all warning messages wnum only suppresses the given warning wstrict suppresses all strict warning messages 196 303 Example To suppress warning 135 enter c563 filel c w135 4 82 Chapter 4 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field Eg zpragma Arguments A pragma as listed in section Pragmas Description With this option you can give a pragma on the command line This is the same as specifying pragma pragma in the C source Dashes on the command line in the pragma are converted to spaces A dash prefixed by another dash or space is never translated so it is still possible to specify a dash for negative numbers as pragma argument Example The following options zcache sector size 256 zjumptab
114. 2 9 2 2 4 1 Replacing NOBS 4 i5 eet eeu x EX ERROR o 2 10 2 2 4 2 Instruction Parallelization parallel moves 2 10 2 2 4 3 Hardware DO and REP Loops V YY A 2 10 2 2 4 4 BitBelds s bite erede Cadet Sages 4 2 14 2 2 4 5 MAC Instruction Generation neasa 2 14 2 2 4 6 Absolute Addressing Mode Usage 2 14 VI Table of Contents 2 3 Compiler structure a2 e or e Re DP CR D 2 15 2 4 Environment Variables sisi cee eee 2 19 2 5 Sample Session serans trari v dod e eek eser eS 2 21 2 54 Using EDE y isin Sere be diced ot Ht deerit eres 2 21 2 5 2 Using the Control Program Y eee 2 29 2 5 3 Using the Makefile io srs crar ta ceva mem 2 31 LANGUAGE IMPLEMENTATION 3 1 3 1 Introduction sdieri cid or aee ee a Re Re a eat 3 3 3 2 Accessing Memory tesis ririt YF FF FAR 3 4 3 2 1 Storage Specifiers YY Fa 3 5 3 2 2 Memory Models x53 pe dint ERR Cm ndn 3 8 3 2 2 1 16 and 24 bit Models for DSP563xx 3 9 3 2 2 2 DSP566xx Memory Model s Y uu 3 9 3 2 2 3 Static Model for DSP5600x V Fa 3 9 3 2 2 4 Mixed Model for DSP5600x V 000 eee 3 11 3 2 2 5 DSP5600x Static and Mixed Model Limitations 3 11 3 2 2 6 Reentranit Model eee Lr ER add SE 3 12 3 2 2 7 MODEL DSP DEFMEM and STKMEM 3 13 3 2 3 The atO AttriDut ces ex ep RE SR a REX Y T een 3 14 3 3 Data Types se Sepe Seas eee ined cbe SaaS 3 15
115. 3 11 LICENSE ADMINISTRATION TOOLS FOR WINDOWS 3 11 1 LMTOOLS FOR WINDOWS For the 32 Bit Windows Platforms an Imtools exe Windows program is provided It has the same functionality as listed in the previous sections but is graphically oriented Simply run the program Start Programs TASKING FLEXlm FLEXlm Tools and choose a button for the functionality required Refer to the previous sections for information about the options of each feature The command line interface is replaced by pop up dialogs that can be filled out The central EDIT field is where the license file path is placed This will be used for all other functions and replaces the c icense file argument in the other utilities The HOSTID button displays the hostid s for the computer on which the program is running The TIME button prints out the system s internal time settings intended to diagnose any time zone problems The TCP Settings button is intended to fix a bug in the Microsoft TCP protocol stack which has a symptom of very slow connections to computers After pressing this button the system will need to be rebooted for the settings to become effective Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 23 3 11 2 FLEXLM LICENSE MANAGER FOR WINDOWS Imgrd exe can be run manually or using the graphical Windows tool You can start this tool from the FLEXIm program folder Click on Start Programs TASKING FLEXIm FLEXIm Tools FLEXIm License Manager x
116. 3 64 _strlen 3 65 _swi 3 66 _tolower 6 19 toupper 6 20 _unpackstr 6 20 unpstrlen 6 20 _ USP 4 78 _ wait 3 67 write 6 20 2X 3 5 159 5 Numbers 2 complement values 7 29 A abort 6 21 abs 6 21 absolute addressing mode 2 14 absolute value intrinsic function 3 44 acos 6 21 adding files to a project 2 28 address absolute 3 14 alias 4 39 alias checking 4 91 allocation graph 2 8 ansi standard 2 3 3 3 4 77 as56 2 15 as563 2 15 asctime 6 21 asin 6 22 asm 4 86 Index asm noflush 4 86 assembly assessing variables 3 32 assembly functions 3 41 assembly interfacing 3 86 assembly source file 2 15 assert 6 22 assert h 6 7 assert 6 22 atan 6 22 atan2 6 22 atexit 6 23 atof 6 23 atoi 6 23 atol 6 23 automatic variables 3 23 backend compiler phase 2 5 optimization 2 5 2 8 bank switching 3 75 bitfield 2 14 branch tail merging 2 8 bsearch 6 24 buffer circular 3 70 built in functions 3 42 C inline functions 5 29 language extensions 3 3 C library 6 8 implementation details 6 8 interface description 6 14 C startup code 7 3 c56 h 3 82 6 7 C563INC 4 29 4 83 C56INC 4 29 4 83 Index Index 5 cache global variables 4 50 cache support 563xx 3 72 alignment 3 72 examples 3 74 intrinsic functions 5 75 regions 3 73 sector size 4 18 cache align now 4 87 cache region end 4 87 cache region start 4 87 cache sect
117. 3cy clb amp The Motorola assembler needs the c option in order to work correctly B 6 7 Appendix B Known restrictions Packed strings are not supported when generating Motorola compatible assembly The _packed keyword is ignored because the Motorola assembler does not have directives to support this The TASKING tools can move variables around between registers and or stack in order to get optimal code To allow the debugger to keep track of these moves the compiler generates lifetime information telling the debugger in which register the variable is located The COFF debug format cannot handle lifetime information Therefore this information is lost Watching an automatic variable in a debugger could result in looking at the wrong place This problem can be overcome by turning off the optimizations with OO The default memory model for the TASKING tools is X memory The Motorola tools use Y memory You need to specify another memory model for one of the tool chains You can either specify the My option to the TASKING control program for generating programs which use Y memory or you can specify the mx memory option to the Motorola control program The COFF libraries as supplied with the Tasking tools use the X memory Floating point variables generated by the Motorola C compiler have a format that differs from the TASKING format Restrict the use of floating point variables to one compilation system 3 USING LIBRARY FU
118. 5 e g set C563INC include proj include UNIX Space e g setenv C563INC include proj include 4 86 Chapter 4 4 4 PRAGMAS According to ANSI 3 8 6 a preprocessing directive of the form pragma pragma token list new line causes the compiler to behave in an implementation defined manner The compiler ignores pragmas which are not mentioned in the list below Pragmas give directions to the code generator of the compiler Besides the pragmas there are two other possibilities to steer the code generator command line options and keywords The compiler acknowledges these three groups using the following rule Command line options can be overruled by keywords and pragmas Keywords can be overruled by pragmas So the pragma has the highest priority This approach makes it possible to set a default optimization level for a source module which can be overridden temporarily within the source by a pragma c563 supports the following pragmas asm q Insert the following non preprocessor lines as assembly language source code into the output file The inserted lines are not checked for their syntax The code buffer of the peephole optimizer is flushed Thus the compiler will stop optimizations such as NOPs removal parallel moves and peephole pattern replacement and resumes these optimizations after the endasm pragma as if it starts at the beginning of a function For advanced assembly in lining
119. 5 code generalor pbase 2 6 optimization pbase 2 5 peepbole optimizer phase 2 6 pipeline scheduler 2 6 frontend 2 5 optimization phase 2 5 parser phase 2 5 preprocessor phase 2 5 scanner phase 2 5 compiler structure 2 15 complex 3 15 3 16 addition 3 18 3 46 division 3 18 3 47 multiplication 3 18 3 48 multiply accumulate 5 47 subtraction 3 18 3 49 complex type 3 18 compound assignment 4 42 conditional jump reversal 2 7 4 43 conio h 6 7 _insize 6 15 const 3 26 constant folding 2 6 constant propagation 2 8 4 56 control flow optimization 2 7 4 43 control program 4 3 options overview 4 4 conversions ANSI C 3 19 Index copy propagation 2 8 4 56 cos 6 25 cosh 6 25 creating a makefile 2 29 cross jumping 2 8 cross assembler 2 15 CSE 2 8 4 40 cstart inc 7 3 ctime 6 25 ctype h 6 7 _tolower 6 19 _toupper 6 20 isalnum 6 35 isalpha 6 35 isascii 6 55 iscnirl 6 35 isdigit 6 35 isgraph 0 36 islower 6 36 isprint 6 36 ispunct 6 36 isspace 6 36 isupper 0 37 isxdigil 6 37 toascii 6 63 tolower 6 63 toupper 6 63 data types 3 15 3 22 circ pointer 3 15 3 16 complex 3 15 5 16 _fract 3 15 3 16 double 3 15 3 16 enum 3 15 3 16 float 3 15 3 16 long _fract 3 15 3 16 pointer 3 15 3 16 signed char 3 15 3 16 3 19 signed int 3 15 3 16 Index Index 7 signed long 3 15 3 16 signed sbort 3 15 3 16 unsigned cbar 3 15 3 16 3
120. 5 16 The L option only accepts a hardware stack level depth in the range 1 15 1 16 for 563xx See the description of the L option for more information 536 illegal syntax used for default section name name in R option See the description of the R option for the correct syntax 537 default section name name not allowed See the description of the R option for the correct syntax Compiler Diagnostics 5 35 W 538 default section name name already renamed to new name Only use one R option for section name or use another name W 542 optimization stack underflow no optimization options are saved with Zpragma optimize This warning occurs if you use a pragma endoptimize while there were no options saved by a previous pragma optimize W 543 fastinterrupt code section too large long interrupt substituted The section became too large to fit in a fast interrupt code section so the compiler placed it in a long interrupt code section W 544 fast interrupt routine must be committed to a vector ignored A fast interrupt function must have a vector in the range 0 63 W 546 illegal modifier for this type ignored For example short _ fract is illegal E 547 assignment of a circular object to a non circular pointer assignment of a non circular object to a circular pointer Only circular objects can be assigned to circular pointers E 549 only circ pointers and arrays structs unions are allowed ignor
121. 7 6 1 Stack Extension cipa u ey ace EET GAY 7 17 7 7 HOD ae Y a Dad Ge tereti qa um d demens 7 19 7 8 Bloatne ROME s separe er rar ax eod aate UR up 7 20 7 8 1 Software Floating Point Implementation 7 20 7 8 1 1 Characteristics of Floating Types ee 7 20 7 8 1 2 Floating Point Constants FFY ees 7 20 7 8 1 3 Usual Arithmetic Conversions 7 20 7 8 1 4 Single Precision Floating Point Format 7 21 7 8 1 5 Single Precision Floating Point Number Range 7 23 7 8 1 6 Comparison to IEEE 754 Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic 7 24 7 8 1 7 Single Precision Floating Point Memory Usage 7 26 7 8 2 Software Floating Point Interfacing 7 26 7 8 2 1 The Basic Floating Point OperationsS 7 26 7 8 2 2 The Floating Point Accumulators 7 28 7 8 2 3 Storage 2 Complement Format Values 7 29 7 8 2 4 Internal Register Usage sse 7 29 7 8 3 Floating Point Code Generation 7 31 SUPPORT FOR USER DESIGNED TARGET BOARDS 8 1 X Table of Contents FLEXIBLE LICENSE MANAGER FLEXIm A 1 1 Tntroductiof uuo kG ex ERR e Red wea HA A 3 2 License Administration Y YF FAU A 3 2 1 OVOEVIOW aus tons dd tn Eu eror yn ecc ELE A 3 2 2 Providing For Uninterrupted FLEXIm Operation A 5 2 3 Daemon Options File FF YY Y SEa A 7 3 License Ad
122. 767 unsigned short 16 0 to 65535U 16 0 to 65535U 16 0 to 65535U signed int 16 32768 to 32767 24 8388608 to 8388607 16 32768 to 432767 unsigned int 16 0 to 65535U 24 0 to 16777215U 16 0 to 65535U signed long 32 2147483648 to 48 140737488355328 to 32 2147483648 to 42147483647 140737488355327 2147483647 unsigned long 32 0 to 4294967295UL 48 0 to 281474976710655 32 0 to 4294967295UL _fract 16 1 1 24 1 1 16 1 1 long fract 32 1 1 48 1 1 32 1 1 pointer 16 0 to 65535U 24 0 to 16777215U 24 0 to 16777215U Circ pointer 16416 0 to 65535U 24 24 0 to 16777215U 24 24 Oto 16777215U float double 1648 1 1750E 38 2448 1 1754940E 38 16 8 H 1 1750E 38 3 4028E 38 3 4028235E 38 3 4028E 38 enum 16 32768 to 32767 24 8388608 to 8388607 16 32768 to 432767 complex 2 16 1 1 for both fields 2 24 1 1 for both fields 2 16 1 1 for both fields Table 3 2 Data types DSP563xx 6xx DSP5600x Data Type Size Range bit signed char 8 128 to 127 unsigned char 8 0 to 255U signed short 16 32768 to 432767 unsigned short 16 0 to 65535U signed int 24 8388608 to 8388607 unsigned int 24 0 to 16777215U signed long 48 140737488355328 to 140737488355327 unsigned long 48 0 to 281474976710655 _ fract 24 1 1 long _ fract 48 1 1 pointer 24 0 to 16777215U Circ
123. 8 Type conversions amp The fractional value is truncated and not rounded Example 3m i _fract f is B fF i will be 0 0 t 5s f i f wi be 1 0 f 5 0 5 i fj i will be O f 0 1 f iw be 0 f 1 0 5 iw be 1 Language Implementation 3 91 The following code shows the result of a conversion from ract to int and vice versa uou extern int i oe extern _fract f 6 i f _fract to int move x Ff a get f into accu a neg a negate to set flags move 0 a result in i is O jle L3 if value was gt 0 result in i is 0 jes L3 or if value was 1 0 if extension not in use result in i is 0 move gt l a else result in i is 1 L3 move a x Fi store i 8 f gs ant to fract move x Fi b get i into accu b tst b check value of i move 0 b result in f is 0 0 jge L4 if i gt 0 result in f is 0 0 move sf lt 80 b else result in f is 1 0 L4 move b x Ff store f It is obvious that when integer and fractional types are mixed freguently the above conversions also occur freguently Therefore it is more efficient to use only fractional types or only integer types in expressions The above of course also applies to the types char short long and long fract When you do not want the conversion as described above there are three ways to achieve this 1 Use the _int2fract and _fract2int intrinsic functions See section 3 13 Intrinsic Func
124. A conditional jump over an unconditional jump is transformed into one conditional jump with the jump condition reversed This reduces both the code size and the execution time 2 8 Chapter 2 Cross jumping and brancb tail merging Identical code seguences in two different execution paths are merged when this is possible without adding extra instructions This transformation decreases code size rather than execution time but under certain circumstances it avoids the execution of one jump Constant copy propagation A reference to a variable with known contents is replaced by those contents Common subexpression elimination The compiler has the ability to detect repeated uses of the same sub expression Such a common expression may be temporarily saved to avoid recomputation This method is called common subexpression elimination abbreviated CSE Dead code elimination Unreachable code can be removed from the intermediate code without affecting the program However the compiler generates a warning message because the unreachable code may be the result of a coding error Loop optimization Invariant expressions may be moved out of a loop and expressions involving an index variable may be reduced in strength 2 2 3 BACKEND OPTIMIZATIONS The following optimizations are target dependent and are therefore performed by the backend Allocation grapb Variables parameters intermediate results and common subexpressi
125. A larger value may be desirable if the daemons are being run on busy systems or a very heavily loaded network qo Imgrd A 20 Appendix A 3 9 LMSWITCHR Windows only Name Imswitchr switch the report log file Synopsis Imswitchr c cense_file feature new file Or Imswitchr c cense_file vendor new file Description Imswitchr Windows only switches the report writer REPORTLOG log file It will also start a new REPORTLOG file if one does not already exist Parameters feature Any feature this daemon supports vendor The name of the vendor daemon such as Tasking new file New file path Options c license file Use the specified license file If no c option is specified Imswitchr looks for the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set Imswitchr looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 21 3 10 LMVER Name Imver report the FLEXIm version of a library or binary file Synopsis Imver filename Description The Imver utility reports the FLEXIm version of a library or binary file Alternatively on UNIX systems you can use the following commands to get the FLEXIm version of a binary strings file grep Copy Parameters filename Name of the executable of the product A 22 Appendix A
126. ANSI C mode e 511 external identifiers in one translation unit D e 127 identifiers with block scope declared in one block D e 1024 macro identifiers simultaneously defined in one translation unit D e 31 parameters in one function declaration D e 31 arguments in one function call D e 31 parameters in one macro definition D e 31 arguments in one macro call D e 509 characters in a logical source line 1500 e 509 characters in a character string literal or wide string literal after concatenation 1500 4 94 Chapter 4 e 8 nesting levels for included files 50 e 257 case labels for a switch statement excluding those for any nested switch statements D e 127 members in a single structure or union D e 127 enumeration constants in a single enumeration D 15 levels of nested structure or union definitions in a single struct declaration list D COMPILER DIAGNOSTICS ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Compiler Diagnostics 5 3 5 1 INTRODUCTION c563 has three classes of messages user errors warnings and internal compiler errors Some user error messages carry extra information which is displayed by the compiler after the normal message The messages with extra information are marked with T in the list below They never appear without a previous error message and error number The number of the information message is not important and therefore this number is not displayed A
127. E add mytarget asm to the project file list Using the command line add mytarget asm to the makefile Alternatively you can add the new startup file to the libraries From the command line in the product directory add the new file to the libraries with example for the DSP563xx binNas563 lib src mytarget asm O gt NUL bin ar563 r lib 563xx libc24 a mytarget obj gt NUL bin as563 lib src mytarget asm M16 O gt NUL binNar563 r lib 563xx libcl6 a mytarget obj gt NUL binNar563 r lib 563xx libcl624 a mytarget obj gt NUL del mytarget obj Create a correct memory description of your board for the locator Memory descriptions are in the product etc directory mem for several targets They are included in the dsc files If you created a mytarget asm file name these files mytarget dsc and mytarget mem mytarget dsc can be a copy of any of the dsc files just replace the mem include with mytarget mem and the cpu include with the correct cpu type 8 4 Chapter 8 Create a mytarget mem file with the correct sizes of the external memory One of the existing mem files can be used as a starting point for this Take care that your bus structure is correct some files have a unified bus X Y P maps to the same physical memory so sections are placed after each other others have separate buses X Y P map to different chips so sections can be placed in parallel Take the file that resembles your board
128. EF Typedef declarations follow the same scope rules as any declared object Typedef names may be re declared in inner blocks but not at the parameter level However in typedef declarations memory specifiers are allowed A typedef declaration should at least contain one type specifier Examples typedef _P int PINT storage type _P OK typedef int _X DATAPTR logical type X storage type default Language Implementation 3 81 3 21 SWITCH STATEMENT c563 supports two ways of code generation for a switch statement a jump chain linear switch or a jump table A jump chain is comparable with an if else if else if else construction A jump table is a table filled with JMP instructions for each possible switch value The switch argument is used as an index to jump within this table By default the compiler will try to use the switch method which uses the least space in ROM It is obvious that especially for large switch statements the jump table approach executes faster than the jump chain approach Also the jump table has a predictable behavior in execution speed No matter the switch argument every case is reached in the same execution time With a small number of cases the jump chain method can be faster in execution and shorter in size The compiler chosen switch method can be overruled by using one of the following option combinations OT OW force jump chain code ot force jump table
129. EXlm 1 5 4 STARTING THE LICENSE DAEMON The license manager daemon must always be up and running To start the daemon complete the following steps on each license server Windows 1 Start the license manager tool by Start Programs TASKING FLEXlm FLEXlm License Manager 2 In the Control tab click on the Start button 3 Close the program by clicking on the OK button UNIX 1 Log in as the operating system administrator usually root 2 Change to the FLEXIm installation directory default usr local flexlm cd usr local flexlm 3 For C shell users start the license daemon by typing the following bin lmgrd 2 p c licenses license dat gt gt amp var tmp license log amp Software Installation 1 15 Or for Bourne shell users start the license daemon by typing the following bin lmgrd 2 p c licenses license dat gt gt var tmp license log 2 gt amp 1 amp In these two commands the 2 and p options restrict the use of the Imdown and Imremove license administration tools to the license administrator You omit these options if you want Refer to the usage of lmgrd in the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm appendix for more information 1 5 5 SETTING UP THE LICENSE DAEMON TO RUN AUTOMATICALLY To set up the license daemon so that it runs automatically whenever a license server reboots follow the instructions below that are approrpiate for your platform steps on each lice
130. Index Symbols define 4 19 include 4 29 4 83 pragma 4 86 pragma optimize 4 35 undef 4 77 DNOCOPY 7 5 M option 3 8 asm 3 32 3 45 _ DATE 4 77 _ FILE 4 77 _ LHNE 4 77 STDC 4 77 _ TIME 4 77 abs 3 44 asm 3 31 3 44 _asmfunc 3 41 _at attribute 3 14 bank 3 75 C56 3 82 4 77 cache get end 3 46 cache get start 3 45 CACHE SECTOR SIZE 4 78 cadd 3 46 callee save 7 9 Cdiv 3 47 circ 3 70 Circ pointer 3 15 3 16 Close 6 14 cmul 3 48 compatible 7 8 complex 3 15 3 16 _csub 3 49 _ DEFMEM 3 13 4 78 _DSP 3 13 4 78 _ ext 3 49 external 3 5 _fabs 3 50 filbuf 6 14 flsbuf 6 14 _fopen 6 15 _fract 3 15 3 16 3 17 _fract2int 3 50 _fsqrt 3 51 inline 3 29 _insize 6 15 _int2fract 3 51 internal 3 5 _ioread 6 15 _ioread c 6 14 6 15 _iowrite 6 16 _iowrite c 6 16 _L 3 5 _labs 3 52 _lfabs 3 52 _lfract2long 3 53 _long2lfract 3 53 _lseek 6 16 _lseek c 6 16 _memcpy 3 54 memset 3 54 MODEL 3 13 4 77 near 3 5 nop 3 55 nosat 3 18 open 6 17 55 5 packed 3 77 _packsize 6 17 _ packstr 6 17 pdiv 3 55 pflush 3 56 _pflushun 3 56 pfree 3 57 plock 3 57 pstr get 6 18 pstr put 6 18 punlock 3 58 read 6 19 rol 3 59 ror 3 59 round 3 60 sema clr 3 61 Index 3 sema set 3 62 sema tst 3 63 STKMEM 3 13 4 78 Stop 3 63 _strcmp 3 64 3 66 Strcpy
131. L source line The pragmas asm and endasm are allowed in inline functions This makes it possible to define inline assembly functions See also the section Inline Assembly in this chapter 3 30 The generated code is o Cac move move NE Col move move add move 12 13 Chapter 3 ll add 1 2 3 r5 r5 x Fw N ll add x y x Fy yl x Fx b yl b bl x Fz Language Implementation 3 31 3 12 INLINE ASSEMBLY c563 supports using assembly in the following ways 1 by using the asm intrinsic function 2 by using the asm intrinsic function which allows passing and returning values to the assembly code 3 by using pragmas 4 by linking with separate assembly modules amp C modules that contain inline assembly are not portable and harder to prototype in other environments 3 12 1 USING THE ASM INTRINSIC FUNCTION c563 supports the intrinsic function _asm for inline assembly The argument of this function is a string that contains the assembly code to be inlined For example asm ori 03 MR disable interrupts This is equal to pragma asm ori 03 MR pragma endasm The advantage is that the _asm intrinsic can be used in pre processor defines define disable interrupts _asm ori 03 MR 3 32 Chapter 3 3 12 2 USING THE _ ASM INTRINSIC FUNCTION To allow access to local variables from inline assembly the compiler prov
132. ME information can be obtained from within the Windows Control Panel Select Network click on Identification look for Computer name How will tbe locking mechanism work e For node locked licenses FLEXlm will first search for an ethernet card If one exists it will lock onto the number of the ethernet card If an ethernet card does not exist FLEXIm will lock onto the hard disk serial number For floating licenses the ethernet card number will be used Wbat bappens if I try to move my node locked license to anotber system The software will not run Wbat does linger time for floating licenses mean When the TASKING product starts to run it will try to obtain a license from the license server The license server keeps track of the number of licenses already issued and grants or denies the request When the software has finished running the license is kept by the license server for a period of time known as the linger time If the same user requests the TASKING product again within the linger time he is granted the license again If another user requests a license during the linger time his request is denied until the linger time has finished Wbat is tbe lengtb of tbe linger time for floating licenses The length of the linger time for both the PC and UNIX floating licenses is 5 minutes Can tbe linger time be changed Yes A customer can change the linger time to be larger but not shorter than the time spec
133. NCTIONS Due to certain differences between the TASKING compiler and the Motorola compiler it is normally not possible to use the standard Motorola libraries with COFF objects generated with the TASKING tools Therefore the TASKING libraries are supplied in both IEEE object format and in COFF object format These COFF libraries fully support Motorola s file system support The libraries support the 563xx in 24 bit mode librt24 clb libfp24 clb libc24 clb the 566xx Librt6 clb libfp6 clb libc6 clb and the 5600x librt clb libfp clb libcm clb libcs clb libcr clb Even when using the TASKING COFF libraries it is necessary to use the crt0 startup files as provided by Motorola This is necessary because this file contains numerous variables that are filled in by the Motorola linker Motorola Compatibility B 7 When using the malloc functions from the TASKING COFF libraries you must use a linker memory control file in order to specify the heap Normally theTASKING linker locator allocates the heap and generates symbols for the start and end of it You have to specify the symbols F lc bh and F lc eh where F 1c bh indicates the beginning of the heap area and the F 1c eh the end of the heap area amp The heap must reside in default memory space An example of a memory control file is given here reserve y 3000 S3fff symbol F_lc_bh y 3000 symbol F lc eh y 4000 This will define the Y memory from 3000 till 4000 as
134. NOD Table of Contents SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1 1 11 IntroductOn ga ng es ea pce en idea pens 1 3 1 2 Installation for WindOwS YF 1 3 1 2 1 Setting the Environment YF a 1 3 1 8 Installation for LINUX i e RERO Re Rs 1 5 131 RPM Installation 4 ei wy day ed Yd GWEFR ORA ER 1 5 1 3 2 Debian Installation etes egt eR ORDERS 1 6 1 3 3 Tar 27 Installation aged bag thea BUWYD Ey EA 1 7 1 3 4 Setting the Environment YF Y au 1 7 1 4 Installation for UNIX Hosts 1 8 1 4 1 Setting the Environment Y FFY YF eee 1 9 1 5 Licensing TASKING Products sese 1 10 1 5 1 Obtaining License Information 05 1 10 1 5 2 Installing Node Locked Licenses 1 11 1 5 3 Installing Floating LicenSeS YY eee 1 12 1 5 4 Starting the License Daemon Y eee 1 14 1 5 5 Setting Up the License Daemon to Run Automatically 1 15 1 5 6 Modifying the License File Location 1 16 1 5 7 How to Determine the Hostid 1 17 1 5 8 How to Determine the Hostname 1 18 OVERVIEW 2 1 21 Introduction to DSP56xxx Family C Cross Compiler 2 3 2 2 General Implementation FFF esses 2 25 2 2 1 Compiler Phases sa sse HR ege teme UU 2 5 2 2 2 Frontend Optimizations Y AU 2 6 2 2 8 Backend Optimizations Y FF Y FRAD 2 8 2 2 4 Specific Optimizations FF YF ee
135. Oc OC Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Common subexpression elimination CSE Oc OC Pragma optimize c optimize C on function level Default Oc Description With Oc you enable CSE common subexpression elimination With this option specified the compiler tries to detect common subexpressions within the C code The common expressions are evaluated only once and their result is temporarily held in registers amp The Oc option must be on to enable the relax alias checking Oa expression propagation Oe and moving invariant code outside a loop Oi With OC you disable CSE common subexpression elimination With this option specified the compiler will not try to search for common expressions Also relax alias checking expression propagation and moving invariant code outside a loop will be disabled Compiler Use 4 41 Example Compile with OC O0 Compile with Oc 00 common subexpressions are found f and temporarily saved char x y a b c d void main void x a b c d y a b c d d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 42 Chapter 4 Oe OE Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in
136. Processor Family Manual Motorola Inc e DSP5660x Digital Signal Processor User s Manual Motorola Inc e DSP56652 Baseband Digital Signal Processor User s Manual Motorola Inc e DSP56654 Baseband Digital Signal Processor User s Manual Motorola Inc XVI Manual Purpose and Structure e CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL The notation used to describe the format of call lines is given below Items shown inside curly braces enclose a list from which you must choose an item Items shown inside square brackets enclose items that are optional The vertical bar separates items in a list It can be read as OR italics Items shown in italic letters mean that you have to substitute the item If italic items are inside square brackets they are optional For example filename means type the name of your file in place of the word filename An ellipsis indicates that you can repeat the preceding item zero or more times screen font Represents input examples and screen output examples bold font Represents a command name an option or a complete command line which you can enter For example command option filename This line could be written in plain English as execute the command command with the optional options option and with the file filename Illustrations The following illustrations are used in this manual amp This is a note It gives you extra information A This is a warning Rea
137. RVNOREADLIC 61 MOTOROLA COMPATABILITY ail TASKING XIaN3iddV Motorola Compatibility B 3 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the interoperability between the TASKING and Motorola tool sets That means how to create an application with the TASKING DSP56xxx C compiler which can be debugged with the Motorola debugger or how to link Motorola object files and library files with the TASKING linker 2 CREATING A MOTOROLA COFF OBJECT FILE The TASKING tools do not have the capability to generate objects in the Motorola CLAS COFF object format with debug information In order to overcome this limitation it is possible to generate an assembly file with the TASKING tools which can then be assembled with the Motorola assembler Generating an assembly file with the TASKING tools uses the following path l V so c563 cc563 control program V src as563 l V asm The control program calls both the compiler and the assembler The compiler generates a source file This source file generated by the compiler contains COFF style debug information that will be converted by the Motorola assembler The generated source file is taken through the TASKING assembler to further optimize this assembly code Among the optimizations performed by the TASKING assembler are move parallelization jump and branch optimizations and DO into REP conversion The assembler generates an assembly file that
138. Run Automatically amp It is not recommended to run a license manager on a Windows 95 or Windows 98 machine Use Windows NT instead or UNIX Step 3 If FLEXIm has already been installed as part of a non TASKING product you have to make sure that the bin directory of the FLEXIm product contains a copy of the Tasking daemon see step 1 Software Installation 1 13 Step i is Insert the license information contained in the License Information Form in the license file which is being used by the license server This file is usually called 1icense dat The default location of the license file is in directory c N lexlm for Windows and in usr local flexlm licenses for UNIX If you wish to install the license file in a different directory see section 1 5 6 Modifying tbe License File Location If the license file does not exist you have to create it using an ASCII editor You can use the license file license dat from the toolchain s flexlm subdirectory as a template If you already have a license file add the license information to the existing license file If the SERVER lines in the license file are the same as the SERVER lines in the License Information Form you do not need to add this same information again If the SERVER lines are not the same you must use another license file See section 1 5 6 Modifying the License File Location for additional information Step 5 On each PC or workstation where you will
139. SE FILE 7594 elliot d gt See the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm appendix for detailed information 1 5 7 HOW TO DETERMINE THE HOSTID The hostid depends on the platform of the machine Please use one of the methods listed below to determine the hostid Platform Tool to retrieve hostid Example hostid SunOS Solaris hostid 170a3472 Windows tkhostid 0800200055327 or use Imhostid Table 1 1 Determine the hostid amp If you do not have the program tkhostid you can download it from our Web site at http www tasking com support flexlm tkhostid zip It is also on every product CD that includes FLEXIm 1 18 i Chapter 1 1 5 8 HOW TO DETERMINE THE HOSTNAME To retrieve the hostname of a machine use one of the following methods Platform Method SunOS Solaris hostname Windows 95 98 Go to the Control Panel open Network click on Identification Look for Computer name Windows NT Go to the Control Panel open Network In the Identification tab look for Computer Name Table 1 2 Determine tbe bostname OVERVIEW ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Overview 2 3 2 1 INTRODUCTION TO DSP56XXX FAMILY C CROSS COMPILER This manual provides a functional description of the TASKING DSP56xxx Family C Cross Compiler This manual uses c563 the name of the binary as a shorthand notation for TASKING DSP563xx DSP566xx C Compiler and
140. SERVER lines you must use another license file See section 1 5 6 Modifying tbe License File Location for additional information The software product and license file are now properly installed 1 12 Chapter 1 i d gt See the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm appendix for more information on FLEXlm 1 5 3 INSTALLING FLOATING LICENSES Keep your License Information Form ready If you do not have such a form read section 1 5 1 Obtaining License Information before continuing Step 1 Install the TASKING software product following the installation procedure described earlier in this chapter on the computer or workstation where you will use the software product As a result of this installation two additional files for FLEXIm will be present in the 1ex1m subdirectory of the toolchain Tasking The Tasking daemon vendor daemon license dat A template license file Step 2 If you already have installed FLEXIm v6 1 or higher for Windows or v2 4 or higher for UNIX for example as part of another product you can skip this step and continue with step 3 Otherwise install SW000098 the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm on the license server where you want to use the license manager The installation of the license manager on Windows also sets up the license daemon to run automatically whenever a license server reboots On UNIX you have to perform the steps as described in section 1 5 5 Setting Up tbe License Deaemon Io
141. _sema_tst amp dev started 15 wait until device is operational code using device Code org p ptext L3 btst 15 x Fdev started Sema tst jcc L3 rts _stop enol Stool wal pg Generate STOP instruction Returns nothing Example _stop 4 Gode stop 3 64 Chapter 3 _strcmp sime itec Const char gol Conse clus Gy yp Perform a string compare An optimized inlined version of the library function strcmp that works on all memory spaces Returns 0 if op1 lt op2 0 if op1 op2 gt 0 if op1 gt op2 Example char sa strna char sb strnb main int result result _strcmp sa sb Code move x Fsa r6 move x Fsb r5 move x r5 r y0 L5 move x r6 r a sub y0 a jne L6 add y0 a x r5 y0 jne L5 L6 _strcpy Clie _psiciecjoy Chace Gol Comst Ger ex g Perform a string copy An optimized inlined version of the library function strcpy that works on all memory spaces Returns op1 Language Implementation Example char sa strna char sb strnb main _strcpy sa sb Code move x Fsa r6 move x Fsb r5 LS move x r5 r a tst a a x r6 r jne L5 _strlen iumgpeexel aime _sieielein Comsic ehari gyeMl p Calculate the length of a string An optimized inlined version of the library function strlen that works on all memory spaces Returns the length of the string
142. a bug WARNING CORRUPTED options list o gt next 0 Options list TERMINATED at bad entry An internal inconsistency was detected in the daemon s option list Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 33 5 FLEXLM LICENSE ERRORS FLEXIm license error encryption code in license file is inconsistent Check the contents of the license file using the license data sheet for the product Correct the license file and run the Imreread command However do not change the last fourth field of a SERVER line in the license file This cannot have any effect on the error message but changing it will cause other problems license file does not support tbis version If this is a first time install then follow the procedure for the error message FLEXlm license error encryption code in license file is inconsistent because there may be a typo in the fourth field of a FEATURE line of your license file In all other cases you need a new license because the current license is for an older version of the product Replace the FEATURE line for the old version of the product with a FEATURE line for the new version it can be found on the new license data sheet Run the Imreread command afterwards You can have only one version of a feature previous versions of the product will continue to work FLEXIm license error cannot find license file Make sure the license file exists If the pathname printed on the line after the error message is incorr
143. a optimize in section Pragmas 4 58 Chapter 4 Os OS Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Favor code size abov xecution speed EE Os OS Pragma optimize s optimize S on flow level Default Os Description With Os you tell the compiler to generate smaller code Whenever possible fewer instructions are used Note that this may result in more instruction cycles With OS you disable the smaller code optimization Example int sa b void main void Compiling once with Os and once OS results in the following difference in code Os generates smaller code bset 0 b amp OS 1 word 4 cycles move gt 1 b OS 2 words 3 cycles Compiler Use amp The number of cycles is calculated for zero wait state memory the cycle count for the OS option increases rapidly for non zero wait states so that small code will execute faster here Os OS 1 wait 5 5 cycles 2 wait 6 7 cycles qo Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 59 4 60 Chapter 4 Ot OT Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Select an entry from the Code generation for switch statement box G ot OT Pragma optimize t optimize T
144. a string that is not the name of an existing file and returns a pointer to an internal static array tmpnam s creates a string and stores it in s and also returns it as the function value s must have room for at least L_tmpnam characters At most TMP MAX different names are guaranteed during execution of the program Returns a pointer to the temporary name as described above toascii finclude lt ctype h gt IME oee ame p Converts c to an ascii value strip highest bit This is a non ANSI function Returns the converted value tolower include lt ctype h gt ime cColewee dee d p Returns c converted to a lowercase character if it is an uppercase character otherwise c is returned toupper finclude ctype h ime Couper ime el E Returns c converted to an uppercase character if it is a lowercase character otherwise c is returned 6 64 Chapter 6 ungetc include lt stdio h gt LIE WINGS Linke Cp IIL Sd yg Pushes at the most one character back onto the input buffer Returns EOF on error va_arg include lt stdarg h gt Va_eueg va list aid ee NF Returns the value of the next argument in the variable argument list Its return type has the type of the given argument type A next call to this macro will return the value of the next argument va_end include lt stdarg h gt cle WGN A E HD This macro must be called after the arguments have been processed It should be called befo
145. agnose the specified icense file If no c option is specified Imdiag looks for the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set Imdiag looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX n Run in non interactive mode lmdiag will not prompt for any input in this mode In this mode extended connection diagnostics are not available A 12 Appendix A 3 3 LMDOWN Name Imdown graceful shutdown of all license daemons Synopsis Imdown c icense file q Description The Imdown utility allows for the graceful shutdown of all license daemons both Imgrd and all vendor daemons such as Tasking on all nodes You may want to protect the execution of Imdown since shutting down the servers causes users to lose their licenses See the p option in Section 3 4 Imgrd Imdown sends a message to every license daemon asking it to shut down The license daemons write out their last messages to the log file close the file and exit All licenses which have been given out by those daemons will be revoked so that the next time a client program goes to verify his license it will not be valid Options c license file Use the specified cense_file If no c option is specified Imdown looks for the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE in order to find the license file to use If that env
146. ains a makefile for building the calc demo example It uses the default mk563 rules 2 Be sure that the directory of the binaries is present in the PATH environment variable 3 Compile assemble link and locate the modules using one call to the program builder mk563 mk563 This command will build the example using the file makefile To see which commands are invoked by mk563 without actually executing them type mk563 n a amp The option a causes all files to be rebuild regardless wether they are out of date or not This command produces the following output TASKING DSP563xx 6xx program builder vx yrz Build nnn Copyright 1996 year Altium BV Serial 00000000 cc563 g calc c o calc abs cc563 cs gn s intrnsic c cc563 cs gn s intrpt c 2 32 Chapter 2 The g option in the makefile is used to instruct the C compiler to generate symbolic debug information This information makes debugging an application written in C much easier to debug The o option specifies the name of the output file To remove all generated files type mk563 clean LANGUAGE IMPLEMENTATION ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Language Implementation 3 3 3 1 INTRODUCTION The TASKING DSP563xxx DSP566xx Family C cross compiler c563 offers a new approach to high level language programming for the DSP563xx DSP566xx family c56 is the DSP5600x Family C cross compiler They conform to the ANSI standard but allow
147. aluation period has expired Contact your local TASKING office for the official product W 2 unrecognized option option The option you specified does not exist Check the invocation syntax for the correct option E 4 expected number more ffendif The preprocessor part of the compiler found the if ifdef or ifndef dirctive but did not find a corresponding endif in the same source file Check your source file that each af ifdef or Yifndef has a corresponding endif E 5 no source modules You must specify at least one source file to compile F 6 cannot create file The output file or temporary file could not be created Check if you have sufficient disk space and if you have write permissions in the specified directory F 7 cannot open file Check if the file you specified really exists Maybe you misspelled the name or the file is in another directory F 8 attempt to overwrite input file fle The output file must have a different name than the input file E Chapter 5 9 unterminated constant character or string This error can occur when you specify a string without a closing double guote or when you specify a character constant without a closing single quote This error message is often preceded by one or more E 19 error messages 11 file stack overflow This error occurs if the maximum nesting depth 50 of file inclusion is reached Check for Zinclude files that contain other Zinclude files Tr
148. amp The result type is unsigned int not size t This is a small difference on the 16 24 bit model of the DSP563xx between strlen and strlen Example char sa strna main int length length _strlen sa Code move x Fsa r5 move x r5 b lua r5 n5 L4 tst b x i rb 4 b jne L4 lua r5 n5 b 3 65 3 66 Chapter 3 _swi edl Swi soul 9 Software interrupt Generate SWI c56 or TRAP c563 instruction Returns nothing Example Swi Code swi _vsl vou Val long ool ime 6392 lome t G23 r Perform a Viterbi shift left operation Generates a VSL assembler instruction Returns Nothing The high part of op1 is stored in _X op3 the low part of op1 is shifted left one bit and the value of op2 0 or 1 is added to it and stored in _Y op3 Example long _L result long input 0x12345678 main _vsl input 0 amp result _vsl input 1 amp result Code vsl b 0 1 Fresult vsl b 1 1 Fresult This function only generates code for the DSP563xx and DSP566xx On the DSP563xx a warning is generated because the opcode is not supported on all silicon revisions Language Implementation _wail vone _wWwelshe voc p Generate WAIT instruction Returns nothing Example _wait ss Code wait 3 67 3 68 Chapter 3 3 14 INTERRUPTS DSP56xxx C introduces two new reserved words _long_interrupt and _fast_inte
149. anager product On the other hand if Imreread complains about not being able to connect to the license server then follow the procedure described in the next section for the error message Cannot read license file data from server The only difference with the current situation is that not the product but a license management utility shows a connect problem FLEXIm license error Cannot read license file data from server This indicates that the program could not connect to the license server daemon This can have a number of causes If the program did not immediately print the error message but waited for about 30 seconds this can vary then probably the license server host is down or unreachable If the program responded immediately with the error message then check the following if the LM LICENSE FILE variable has been set to the format number amp bost is the number correct It should match the fourth field of a SERVER line in the license file on the license server host Also the host name on that SERVER line should be the same as the host name set in the LM LICENSE FILE variable Correct LM LICENSE FILE if necessary In any case one should verify if the license server daemon is running Type the following command on the host where the license server daemon Imgrd is supposed to run On SunOS 4 x ps wwax grep lmgrd grep v grep On SunOS 5 x Solaris 2 x ps ef grep lmgrd grep v grep If th
150. and the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Enable the Preprocess only and capture output check box E F m 1 c i p x Description Run the preprocessor of the compiler only and send the output to stdout When you use the E option use the o option to separate the output from the header produced by the compiler With the Em option the compiler generates dependency rules which can be used by a make utility With the El option you can use multi line macros A backslash used to continue a macro on the next source line will be expanded as a new line instead of a concatenation of the lines With the Ec option comments in the c file are preserved With the Ei option include libraries are not included in the c file while the Zinclude statement remains present With the Ep option no line numbers are added to the c file With the Ex option macros are not expanded while the macro definition and calls to macros remain present in the c file Examples The following command preprocesses the file test c and sends the output to the file preout c563 E o preout test c The following command preprocesses the file test c which may contain multi line macros and sends the output to the file multi c563 El test c o multi Compiler Use 4 21 The following command generates dependency rules for the file test c which can be used by mk563 the make utility c563 Em test c test sro test c 4
151. and then just change the memory sizes in the chips section of the file If you added a new startup file to your project in step 3 disable the startup file from the libraries and specify the correct startup code label and description file Using EDE Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the Linker Locator entry and select Control File Select User supplied no library startup code in the Target list box In the User defined target name field fill in mytarget This will tell the tools to include the startup file mytarget asm from the library and to use the file mytarget dsc for the locating process Using the command line Add Tmytarget to the control program cc563 command line If you added a new startup file to the libraries in step 3 specify the correct description file Using EDE Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the Linker Locator entry and select Control File Select User supplied target definition in the Target list box Specify mytarget dsc in the field of the Use project specific linker locator control file dsc radio button Using the command line Add T mytarget dsc to the control program cc563 command line FLEXIBLE LICENSE MANAGER FLEXIm ail TASKING XIaN3iddV Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 3 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix discusses Globetrotter Software s Flexible License Manager and how it is inte
152. apter 1 1 4 INSTALLATION FOR UNIX HOSTS 1 Login as a user Be sure you have read write and execute permissions in the installation directory Otherwise login as root or use the su command If you are a first time user decide where you want to install the product By default it will be installed in usr local 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and mount the CD ROM on a directory for example cdrom Be sure to use an ISO 9660 file system with Rock Ridge extensions enabled See the UNIX manual pages about mount for details 3 Go to the directory on which the CD ROM is mounted cd cdrom 4 Run the installation script sh install Follow the instructions appearing on your screen First a question appears about where to install the software The default answer is usr local On certain sites you may want to select another location On some hosts the installation script asks if you want to install SW000098 the Flexible License Manager FLEXlm If you do not already have FLEXIm on your system you must install it otherwise the product will not work on those hosts See section 1 5 Licensing TASKING Products If the script detects that the software has been installed before the following messages appear on the screen WARNING SWXXXXXX XXXX XXXX already installed Do you want to REINSTALL y n Answering n no to this question causes installation to abort and the following message being disp
153. ar pointer does not preserve circular information Ifa circular pointer is converted to a long or unsigned long the circular information will be lost F 524 illegal memory model The memory model you specified does not exist See the M option for a list of the available arguments 5 34 Chapter 5 W 525 function qualifier reentrant ignored for static memory model _reentrant is only allowed in non static memory models 526 illegal asm constraint string The character used for a register type in an __ asm intrinsic function is not valid 527 illegal _ asm modifier char for register reg The character used for a register modifier in an __ asm intrinsic function is not valid 528 at requires a numerical address You can only use an expression that evaluates to a numerical address 529 at address out of range for this type of object The absolute address is not present in the specified memory space 530 at only valid for global variables Only global variables can be placed on absolute addresses 531 at only allowed for uninitialized variables Absolute variables cannot be initialized 532 at has no effect on external declaration When declared extern the variable is not allocated by the compiler 533 c56 language extension keyword used as identifier A language extension keyword is a reserved word and reserved words cannot be used as an identifier 534 hardware stack level must be in range 1 1
154. are product Floating license 1 If you need a floating license you must determine the hostid and hostname of the computer where you want to use the license manager Also decide how many users will be using the product See section 1 5 7 How to Determine tbe Hostid and section 1 5 8 How to Determine tbe Hosiname When you order a TASKING product provide the hostid hostname and number of users to your local TASKING sales representative The License Information Form which contains your license key information will be sent to you with the software product 1 5 2 INSTALLING NODE LOCKED LICENSES Keep your License Information Form ready If you do not have such a form read section 1 5 1 Obtaining License Information before continuing Step 1 Install the TASKING software product following the installation procedure described in section 1 2 Installation for Windows Step 2 amp amp Create a file called 1icense dat in the c 1ex1m directory using an ASCII editor and insert the license information contained in the License Information Form in this file This file is called the license file If the directory c N 1exlm does not exist create the directory If you wish to install the license file in a different directory see section 1 5 6 Modifying tbe License File Location If you already have a license file add the license information to the existing license file If the license file already contains any
155. are you can set some environment variables to make invocation of the tools easier When you are using EDE all settings are configurable from within EDE A list of all environment variables used by the toolchain is present in the section Environment Variables in the chapter Overview Make sure that your path is set to include all of the executables you have just installed when you invoke the tools from a command prompt If you installed the software under c c56 you can include the executable directory c c56 bin in your search path Chapter 1 amp For the DSP563xx DSP566xx family the default installation path is c563 92 In EDE select the Project Directories menu item Add one or more executable directory paths to the Executable Files Path field The environment variable TMPDIR can be used to specify a directory where programs can place temporary files The DSP5600x compiler uses the environment variable C56INC to search for include files Use C563INC for the DSP563xx DSP566xx family An example of setting this variable is given below d gt See also the section Include Files in the chapter Compiler Use Example Windows 95 98 Add the following line to your autoexec bat file set C563INC c c563 include amp You can also type this line in a Command Prompt window but you will loose this setting after you close the window Example Windows NT 1 Rright click on the My Computer icon on your desktop and select Properties
156. are loop instruction when the loop body contains function calls Language Implementation 3 11 To limit the hardware stack usage the return address of non leaf functions is saved in the separate section for parameters locals and temporary storage Whenever possible variables and common subexpressions CSE are allocated in a register Using registers increases performance and reduces power consumption Local variables that are allocated in a register during the entire function do not need to be allocated in memory 3 2 2 4 MIXED MODEL FOR DSP5600X Using a mixed memory model implies that the functions are not reentrant and recursion is therefore not possible except for functions explicitly declared _reentrant This is the default memory model for the DSP5600x The difference with the static model is that in the static model no register is reserved as stack pointer while in the mixed model register R7 is always reserved as stack pointer This implies that the compiler cannot use this register for storing automatics or temporary results in the mixed model 3 2 2 5 DSP5600X STATIC AND MIXED MODEL LIMITATIONS Function Pointers When using the static memory model DSP5600x only the parameter space and local variable space is allocated in a fixed area in memory When programming with function pointers the compiler is not able to find out where to place arguments Normally the compiler places arguments specified in the fu
157. are reserved for plus infinity minus infinity Not a Number IEEE NaN minus zero or denormalized numbers 7 8 1 5 SINGLE PRECISION FLOATING POINT NUMBER RANGE Floating point number Mantissa Exponent Decimal Value Largest positive 24 bit data model 7FFFFF 0000FF 3 402823E 38 16 bit data model 7FFF 00FF 3 403E 38 Smallest positive 24 bit data model 400000 000000 2 938736E 39 16 bit data model 4000 0000 2 939E 39 Floating point zero 24 bit data model 000000 000000 40 0 16 bit data model 0000 0000 40 0 Smallest negative 24 bit data model BFFFFF 000000 2 938736E 39 16 bit data model BFFF 0000 2 939E 39 Largest negative 24 bit data model 800000 0000FF 9 402823E438 16 bit data model 8000 00FF 3 403E 38 Table 7 9 Floating point number range Note that the two s complement mantissa does not have egual positive and negative ranges Only sign magnitude formats possess this property These ranges should be checked after most arithmetic operations Chapter 7 7 8 1 6 COMPARISON TO IEEE 754 STANDARD FOR BINARY FLOATING POINT ARITHMETIC Since the IEEE Floating Point Arithmetic Standard is well publicized it is useful to compare these two floating point formats This floating point format is compared to the single precision IEEE format and it differs from the IEEE standard primarily in its handling of floating point exceptions Othe
158. assembly code and optional register placeholders The compiler will prefix the string with a tab For more information see section 3 12 2 Using the __asm Intrinsic Function Returns nothing _cache_get_start sm 2 Cache Gee feu acude acea gno YN OO This function gets the start address of the cache region belonging to fptr Returns the start address of the cache region belonging to fprr Example d gt See example with _plock function This function is only available for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support 3 46 Chapter 3 cacbe get end int P cache get end WOuel eewelwe egin seem yg This function gets the end address of the cache region belonging to fptr Returns the end address of the cache region belonging to prr Example d gt See example in section 3 16 4 Examples This function is only available for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support _cadd _complex _cadd _complex opl _complex op2 Complex addition Returns the result Example complex ca cb cc cc cadd ca cb Code move x Fca b move x Fcarl a move x Fcb x0 move x Fcbrl xl add x0 b add xl a move a x Fccrl cc move b x Fcc ee Language Implementation 3 47 _cdiv _complex _cdiv _complex opl _complex op2 Complex division Calculate op7 op2
159. ate result optimization Only the second operand must be loaded in accumulator ftm1 The following example illustrates this d at b oc move x Fa b pass floating point a in fac move x Fatl a move x Fb x0 pass floating point b in ftml move x Fbrl xl jsr Rfpaddf2 perform add The intermediate floating point result stays in fac move x Fc x0 pass floating point c in ftm 1 move x Fcrl xl jsr Rfpsubf2 perform subtract move a x Fd 1 Store result from fac in d move b x Fd The floating point mechanism is based on the fact that when the floating point accumulator is loaded with a floating point operand and a next operand must be loaded in it then the current contents of fac is saved on the user stack Next example is for the DSP5600x and illustrates the use of the user stack in a floating point expression which needs to subtract two intermediate results The first intermediate floating point result is stored on the user stack and the second can be hold in the accumulator fac To perform the subtraction the intermediated result is popped from the user stack and loaded in accumulator ftm1 This example shows generation of reentrant code Run time Environment 7 33 a b c d move r7 move r7 move x Fa b move x Fatl a move x Fb x0 move x Fbrl xl jsr Rfpaddf2 move 2 n7 move r7 E move a x r7 n7 H move r7 move b x r7 n7 A move x Fc b move x
160. ated by a call to callocQ malloc or realloc Otherwise the behavior is undefined d gt See also calloc malloc and reallocQ Returns nothing Jfreopen include lt stdio h gt ig Ilia vw Exeopeni const char filename const char mode FILE stream Opens a file for a given mode and associates the stream with it This function is normally used to change the files associated with stdin stdout or stderr d gt See also fopen Returns stream or NULL on error 6 32 Chapter 6 i Jrexp finclude lt math h gt double frexp double x int exp Splits x into a normalized fraction in the interval 1 2 1 gt which is returned and a power of 2 which is stored in exp If x is zero both parts of the result are zero For example frexp 4 0 amp var results in 0 5 2 3 The function returns 0 5 and 3 is stored in var d gt See also ldexp Returns the normalized fraction Jfscanf include lt stdio h gt int fscanf FILE stream COMSE ceues ORME ess JE Performs a formatted read from the given st ream qb See also scanf read and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines Returns the number of items converted successfully fseek include lt stdio h gt Lmt fseek FILE stream long offset int origin Sets the file position indicator for stream A subseguent read or write will access data beginning at the new position
161. ates this error Compiler Diagnostics 5 25 void f void main int i i int f error E 170 recursive expansion of inline function name An inline function may not be recursive The following example generates this error inline int a int i a i recursive call return i main a l error E 171 too much tail recursion in inline function rame If the function level is greater than or equal to 40 this error is given The following example generates this error inline void a W 172 adjacent strings have different types When concatenating two strings they must have the same type The following example generates this warning char b L abc def strings have different types E 173 void function argument A function may not have an argument with type void 5 26 Chapter 5 174 not an address constant A constant address was expected Unlike a static variable an automatic variable does not have a fixed memory location and therefore the address of an automatic is not a constant The following is an example of this error int a static int b a error 175 notan arithmetic constant In a constant expression no assignment operators no operator no operator and no functions are allowed The following is an example of this error int a static int b att error 176 address of automatic is not a constant
162. athname If you have more than one product using the FLEXlm license manager you can specify multiple license files by separating each pathname path with a on UNIX also Windows set LM LICENSE FILE patb fpatb UNIX setenv LM LICENSE FILE path fpath If you are running the TASKING software on multiple nodes you have three options for making your license file available on all the machines Place the license file in a partition which is available via NFS on Unix systems to all nodes in the network that need the license file Copy the license file to all of the nodes where it is needed Set LM LICENSE FILE to port bost where host and port come from the SERVER line in the license file Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 7 When the main license daemon Imgrd already runs it is sufficient to type the command lmreread for notifying the daemon that the 1icense dat file has been changed Otherwise you must type the command lmgrd usr tmp license log amp Both commands reside in the flexlm bin directory mentioned before 2 3 DAEMON OPTIONS FILE It is possible to customize the use of TASKING software using a daemon options file This options file allows you to reserve licenses for specified users or groups of users to restrict access to the TASKING toolchain and to set software timeouts The following table lists the keywords that are recognized at the start of a line of a daem
163. ation some optimize pragmas can be used on a function scope only function level whereas other optimize pragmas can be used on cach source line flow level On function level means that if a pragma optimize is found within a function it is interpreted as if it was found just before the function A pragma optimize number must be specified outside a function body The optimization level of each optimize pragma is described for each O option 4 36 An overview of the flags is given below relax alias checking needs Oc common subexpression elimination expression propagation needs Oc code flow order rearranging register allocation graph optimization hardware loops move invariant code outside loop needs Oc cache global variables in functions fast loops increases code size nop insertion move parallelization nop reduction assembler data flow constant copy propagation single instruction DO to REP small code size force jump table for switch statement loop unrolling subscript strength reduction smart switch statement table or chain register contents tracking peephole optimization non sequential register allocation op tH ro Rae Need de rans same as OACEFGHIJLNOPRSTUVWXYZ same as OacefghijLnoprsTUvwxyz same as OacefghijLnOprsTUvwxyz all optimizations which can be debugged optimized for code size same as OacefghijLnoprSTuvwxyz same as
164. atterns Next click OK Overview 2 29 e To add existing files to a project by selecting individual files click on the Add existing files to project button in the Project Properties dialog Select the directory that contains the files you want to add to your project Add the applicable files by double clicking on them or by selecting them and pressing the Open button The new project is now open 6 From the Project menu select Load Files to open the files you want on your EDE desktop EDE automatically creates a makefile for the project EDE updates the makefile every time you modify your project 2 5 2 USING THE CONTROL PROGRAM A detailed description of the process using the sample program calc c is described below for the DSP563xx DSP566xx For the DSP5600x use cc56 where cc563 is used This procedure is outlined as a guide for you to build your own executables for debugging 1 Make the subdirectory c of the examples directory the current working directory 2 Be sure that the directory of the binaries is present in the PATH environment variable 3 Compile assemble link and locate the modules using one call to the control program cc563 cc563 g M calc c o calc abs The g option specifies to generate symbolic debugging information This option must always be specified when debugging with CrossView Pro Some optimizations may affect the ability to debug the code in a high level language debugger Therefore
165. be on to use this option Relaxing alias checking may reduce code size Example 1 int i void func char p char Oc char d ift i p c else p amp d c 2 d 3 p 4 i euer ai Pat or d may write to c aliasing object c or d p might have changed the value of c So c may not be used from register contents but MUST be read from memory alias checking MUST be ON in this case y ard 4 91 4 92 Chapter 4 Example 2 int i void func char p char Cc char d c 2 d 3 p 4 cannot write to c or d but to some other object i c p cannot have changed the value of c so c may be used from register contents TA gt alias checking may be OFF in this case Example 3 typedef union struct unsigned int exponent _fract fraction binary double value _FDEF define _FBIAS 127 double frexp excerpt double value int exp double loc_value value prevent taking address of argument value exp FDEF amp loc value binary exponent _FBIAS _FDEF amp loc_value gt binary exponent FBIAS if loc value 1 0 exp 1 return 0 5 return loc value The compiler will make a CSE on 1oc value ignoring the write through the type casted pointer because it is
166. ber of the correct sign If exponent underflow occurs the result is limited to the minimum representable floating point number which is zero Although this format does not provide the arithmetic safety offered by the IEEE standard it avoids extensive error checking and exceptions in favor of real time execution speed and efficient implementation All exception conditions are handled in line according to predefined rules This accepts the fact that real time systems have no choice but to provide an output with some amount of error if an exception occurs It is not possible to stop execution until the application program determines a solution to the problem and fixes it One major difference is the use of affine arithmetic in the IEEE standard versus the use of saturation arithmetic in this 2 complement floating point format Affine arithmetic gives separate identity to plus infinity minus infinity plus zero and minus zero In operations involving these values finite quantities remain finite and infinite quantities remain infinite In contrast this format gives special identity only to unsigned zero This format performs saturation arithmetic such that any result out of the representable floating point range is replaced with the nearest floating point representation In the analog world overflow is analogous to an analog opamp output clamping at the power supply rails The IEEE floating point standard provides extensive error handling req
167. c The heap is a reserved area in default memory it cannot be placed in a different memory type because the library functions handling it rely on the memory type If you use one of the memory allocation functions listed above the locator automatically allocates a heap as specified in the locator description file with the keyword heap A special section called heap is used for the allocation of the heap area You can place the heap section anywhere in default memory using the locator description file You can specify the size of the heap using the keyword length size in the locator description file If you do not specify the heap size and yet refer to it e g call malloc the locator will allocate the rest of the available X memory for the heap The locator defined labels F 1c bh and F 1c eh begin and end of heap are used by the library function sbrk which is called by malloc when memory is needed from the heap 7 20 Chapter 7 7 8 FLOATING POINT This section describes the definition and implementation of the TASKING Software Floating Point Library for the Motorola DSP56xxx Family of Digital Signal Processors 7 8 4 SOFTWARE FLOATING POINT IMPLEMENTATION 7 8 1 1 CHARACTERISTICS OF FLOATING TYPES There are three floating types defined by the ANSI C standard document designated as float double and long double The characteristics for the double and long double types are equal to the float type as describ
168. canf doscan 1 fgetc getc _filbuf _read fscanf gets getchar getchar H _ oread fgets fread getc Figure 6 1 Calling mecbanism of input function in C library FSS write printf doprint fputc putc _flsbuf H write fprintf puts putchar putchar fflush iowrite fputs fwrite putc Figure 6 2 Calling mecbanism of output function in C library function is implemented as a macro if stdio h is included the C libraries contain them as well for example in cases where a function pointer needs the address of such a function jnternal function Libraries 6 7 6 5 HEADER FILES The following header files are delivered with the C compiler lt assert h gt lt c56 h gt lt conio h gt lt ctype h gt lt errno h gt lt fcntl h gt lt float h gt lt limits h gt lt locale h gt lt math h gt assert Special file with c563 definitions No C functions Can be used for prototyping your application on a host using a standard C compiler _insize kbhit isalnum isalpha isascii iscntrl isdigit isgraph islower isprint ispunct isspace isupper isxdigit toascii tolower tolower toupper toupper Error numbers No C functions Definition of flags used by open Constants related to floating point arithmetic Limits and sizes of integral types No C functions localeconv setlocale Delivered as skeletons acos asin atan atan2 ceil cos cosh
169. cannot perform a function call on an object that is not a function The following example generates this error int i gj j i error i is not a function Compiler Diagnostics 5 21 E 139 operator cannot have aggregate type The type name in a cast must be a scalar not a struct union or a pointer and also the operand of a cast must be a scalar The following are examples of this error static union ui int a ui ui union ui 9 cannot cast to union ff int ui cannot cast a union to something else E 140 type cannot be applied to a register bit bitfield object or builtin inline function For example the amp operator address cannot be used on registers and bit fields So func amp r6 and func amp bitf a are invalid E 141 operator requires modifiable lvalue The operand of the or operator and the left operand of an assignment or compound assignment lvalue must be modifiable The following is an example of this error const int i 1 i 3 error const cannot be modified E 143 too many initializers There may be no more initializers than there are objects The following is an example of this error static int a 1 1 2 error only one object can be initialized W 144 enumerator ame value out of range An enum constant exceeded the limit for an int The following is an example of this warning enum A INT MAX B warning B does not fi
170. code OT Ow let the compiler decide the switch method used The last one is also the default of the compiler Using an option or a pragma cannot overrule the restrictions as described earlier d gt See pragma jumptable memory in section 4 4 Pragmas 3 82 Chapter 3 3 22 PORTABLE C CODE If you are developing C code for the DSP56xxx family using c563 or c56 you might want to test some code on the host you are working on using a C compiler for that host Therefore we deliver the include file c56 h This header file checks if _C56 is defined and redefines the storage type specifiers if it is not defined When using this include file you are able to use the storage type specifiers when needed and yct write portable C code Furthermore an adapted prototype of each DSP56xxx C intrinsic function is present because these functions are not Known by another ANSI compiler If you use these functions you should write them in C performing the same job as the DSP56xxx and link these functions with your application for simulation purposes Language Implementation 3 83 3 23 EFFICIENT USE OF THE DSP56XXX TOOL SET The following sections give you some guidelines and hints to get the best results from the DSP56xxx tool set 3 23 1 CHAR AND SHORT TYPES Avoid types smaller than int whenever possible as they need more instructions for conversions and do not save data space Types smaller than int are
171. compatible keyword you can specify that a function must have the same calling convention as the Motorola C compiler The callee save keyword can be used to indicate that a function must save all registers instead of leaving this to the caller intrinsic functions A number of pre declared functions can be used to generate inline assembly code at the location of the intrinsic built in function call This avoids the overhead which is normally used to do parameter passing and context saving before executing the called function circular buffers c563 supports the type modifier circ for circular data structures and pointers bank switching You can specify a function to be located in a particular bank with the keyword _bank A bank is a combination of an address range and a page number 3 2 ACCESSING MEMORY Members of the DSP56xxx family have separate program memory and data memory and the data memory of the DSP5600x DSP563xx and DSP566xx is in turn divided into two separate memory spaces X and Y The combination of X and Y memory space is called L memory space Each address range is accessible through 16 bit or 24 bit addresses Also the entire address range is bit addressable c563 offers language extensions to deal with the separate memory spaces You can specify a storage type and in case of a pointer the storage type of the object it points to with the declaration of a C variable Language Implementation 3 5 I
172. compiler must generate instead Example To generate the section name myst ring instead of the default section name xstring enter c563 R xstring mystring test c By specifying c563 R xstring test c the section name xstring has been renamed to xstringtest 4 74 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation Add one or more registers to the Reserve address or offset register field EE rregister Arguments A register name The register argument must be one of the following For the DSP5600x and DSP563xx DSP566xx RO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 MO M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 NO N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 In the static model DSP5600x only R7 M7 and N7 can also be used in the other models these registers are used for the user stack pointer Description Reserve a register The compiler avoids the use of the register while allocating registers When you want to reserve a register that is to be used in for example an interrupt routine it is recommended to do this application wide This implies that you will have to specify the r option for each module translated If the register is not reserved in all modules the compiler may allocate it and overwrite its contents Because an R and an M register are very close related the compiler also reserves the M register when an R register is reserved E g reserving R1 implies also reserving M1 You can
173. configured correctly since the network will resolve speedy corp com automatically 3 Finally there must be an alias for speedy so it s also Known locally as speedy corp com This alias is added to the etc hosts file or if NIS Yellow Pages are being used then it will have to be added to the NIS database This requirement goes away in version 3 0 of FLEXIm If all components application Imgrd and vendor daemon are v6 0 or higher no aliases are required the only requirement is that the fully qualified domain name or IP address is used as a hostname on the SERVER or as a hostname in LM LICENSE FILE port host or host A 44 Appendix A Does FLEXIm work witb NIS aud DNS Yes However some sites have broken NIS or DNS which will cause FLEXIm to fail In v5 of FLEXIm NIS and DNS can be avoided to solve this problem In particular sometimes DNS is configured for a server that s not current available e g a dial up connection from a PC Again if DNS is configured but the server is not available FLEXIm will fail In addition some systems particularly Sun SGI require that applications be linked dynamically to support NIS or DNS If a vendor links statically this can cause the application to fail at a site that uses NIS or DNS In these situations the vendor will have to relink or recompile with v5 FLEXIm Vendors are strongly encouraged to use dynamic libraries for libc and networking libraries since this tends to
174. cribed in the following sections The c56 compiler and the c563 compiler in DSP566xx memory model ignore the cache features which makes it possible to write portable code 3 16 1 CACHE ALIGNMENT Instructions are cached in sectors of 128 or 256 words depending on the cache size The size of the cache varies by DSP563xx derivative The following pragma is supported for forcing alignment on a 128 or 256 word boundary pragma cache align now Aligns current address at a cache boundary This can be done only once per function The alignment may introduce an unused memory alignment gap at the beginning of the section Whether the cache alignment is on a 128 or 256 word boundary depends on the compiler command line option csze or the pragma cache sector size size The size is either 128 or 256 words The compiler has a predefined macro for the cache sector size CACHE SECTOR SIZE that expands to size value Language Implementation 3 73 3 16 2 CACHE REGIONS Cache regions are a start and end address of memory to be locked in the cache Such a region can be bound to a function or function pointer The user can lock and unlock the cache sectors in a region using intrinsic functions The function or function pointer must have the function qualifier cache region For a function with this function qualifier the compiler will generate a start and an end label Functions having this gualifier are always aligned on t
175. cted The Control Program and EDE will automatically select the correct libraries depending on the memory model specified The 1ib directory contains the subdirectories with the library files for the DSP5600x DSP563xx and DSP566xx Compiler Processor Model Libraries C Run time Floating point c56 DSP5600x Static libcs a librt a libfp a Reentrant libcr a Mixed libcm a c563 DSP563xx 16 bit libc16 a librt16 a libfp16 a 16 24 bit libc1624 a 24 bit libc24 a librt24 a libfp24 a DSP566xx libc6 a librt6 a libfp6 a Table 6 1 Overview of Libraries The 1k563 linker uses this naming convention when specifying the l option For example with 1c16 the linker looks for 1ibc16 a in the DSP type specific subdirectory of the system lib directory Specifying the libraries is a job taken care of by the control program When you use floating point the floating point library must always be the last library linked it should be placed after the C library Arithmetic routines like sin cos etc are not present in these libraries only basic floating point operations can be done 6 6 Chapter 6 E 6 4 INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS FSS read s
176. d the information carefully Manual Purpose and Structure XVII Q This illustration indicates actions you can perform with the mouse EE This illustration indicates keyboard input qo This illustration can be read as See also It contains a reference to another command option or section XVIII MANUAL STRUCTURE Manual Purpose and Structure SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Software Installation 1 3 1 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes how you can install the TASKING C Cross Compiler for the DSP56xxx Family DSP563xx DSP566xx DSP5600x on Windows 95 98 XP NT 2000 and several UNIX hosts 1 2 INSTALLATION FOR WINDOWS 1 2 Start Windows 95 98 XP NT 2000 if you have not already done so Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If tbe TASKING Sbowroom dialog box appears proceed witb Step 5 Click the Start button and select Run In the dialog box type d Nsetup substitute the correct drive letter for your CD ROM drive and click on the OK button Tbe TASKING Sbowroom dialog box appears Select a product and click on the Install button Follow the instructions that appear on your screen You can find your serial number on the Start up kit envelope delivered with the product License the software product as explained in section 1 5 Licensing TASKING Products 1 2 4 SETTING THE ENVIRONMENT After you have installed the softw
177. dicate any compatibility differences In particular some elements of FLEXIm didn t require certain patches so a 2 4 Imgrd will work successfully with a 2 4b vendor daemon I ve received a new copy of a product from a vendor and it uses a new version of FLEXIm Is my old license file still valid Yes Older FLEXlm license files are always valid with newer versions of FLEXIm 6 3 WINDOWS QUESTIONS Wbat Windows Host Platforms can be used as a server for Floating Licenses The system being used as the server where the FLEXlm License Manager is running for Floating licenses must be Windows NT The FLEXIm License Manager does not run properly with Windows 95 98 Wby do I need to include NWlink IPX SPX on NT This is necessary for either obtaining the Ethernet card address or to provide connectivity with a Netware License server Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 39 6 4 TASKING QUESTIONS How will the TASKING licensing pricing model change with License Management FLEXlm TASKING will now offer the following types of licenses so you can purchase licenses based upon usage License Description Pricing Node Locked This license can only be usedona The pricing for this specific system It cannot be license will be the moved to another system current product pricing Floating This license requires a network The pricing for this license server and a TCP IP or license will be 50 IPX SPX connection betw
178. dition for the first iteration Compiler Use For do while loops which are always iterated at least once the iterate at least once pragma indicates that the do while loop end condition is false for the first iteration Example void foo int i do printf dNn 1 L gt while i gt 0 Code Ffoo move r7 do al L5 move al r5 move al x r7 1 move Ya move L3 r0 jsr Fprintf move x r7 1 a sub l a L5 void a r0 r5 move 47 Ces jumptable memory Specifies in which memory the switch jump table is generated The default is P memory Please note that changing the default into X or Y memory will result in a possibly large entry in the copy table This pragma is given in the form f pragma jumptable memory mem where mem can be either P X or Y 4 89 4 90 Chapter 4 optimize Controls the amount of optimization The remainder of the source line is scanned for option characters which are processed like the flags of the O command line option Please refer to the O option for the list of available flags This pragma is given in the form pragma optimize flags Depending on the optimization some optimize pragmas can be used on a function scope only function level whereas other optimize pragmas can be used on each source line flow level On function level means that if a pragma optimize is found within a function it is interpreted as if it was found just befo
179. dx c _pstr_put p idx c build string abcd printf SWMn p print packed string qo See also section section 3 18 Packed Strings _read include lt stdio h gt size_t Dredd ant Ed char base Sizet size Low level block input function This function reads a block of data from the given stream It is used by all input functions The delivered library is targeted at TASKING or Motorola FSS File System Simulation The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function must be customized to perform I O on different file systems When not customized it will use _ioread Returns the number of characters read _tolower include lt ctype h gt Wye _ cOloveri ime CN Converts c to a lowercase character does not check if c really is an uppercase character This is a non ANSI function Returns the converted character 6 20 Chapter 6 _toupper include lt ctype h gt Ime _ ic OUPpPE cse El pg Converts c to an uppercase character does not check if c really is a lowercase character This is a non ANSI function Returns the converted character _unpackstr include lt string h gt Glace snm ee Stern Eb NS const packed char p Unpack string pointed to by p in the buffer pointed to by ump Returns a pointer to unpacked string _unpstrlen include lt string h gt Sive 1e nps t e leni Cems _isackecl Glee ja jg
180. e Lines beginning with the sharp character 4 are ignored and can be used as comments For example the following options file would reserve one copy of feature SWxxxxxx xx for user pat three copies for user lee and one copy for anyone on a computer with the hostname of terry and would cause QUEUED messages to be omitted from the log file In addition user joe and group pinheads would not be allowed to use the feature SWXXXXXX XX GROUP pinheads moe larry curley RESERVE 1 SWxxxxxx xx USER pat RESERVE 3 SWXXXXXX XX USER lee RESERVE 1 SWxxxxxx xx HOST terry EXCLUDE SWxxxxxx xx USER joe EXCLUDE SWxxxxxx xx GROUP pinheads NOLOG QUEUED 3 LICENSE ADMINISTRATION TOOLS The following utilities are provided to facilitate license management by your system administrator In certain cases execution access to a utility is restricted to users with root privileges Complete descriptions of these utilities are provided at the end of this section Imcksum Prints license checksums Imdiag Windows only Diagnoses license checkout problems lmdown Gracefully shuts down all license daemons both Imgrd all vendor daemons such as Tasking on the license server Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 9 Imgrd The main daemon program for FLEXIm Imbostid Reports the hostid of a system Imremove Removes a single user s license for a specified feature Imreread Causes the license daemon to r
181. e chapter Software Installation Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 5 2 2 PROVIDING FOR UNINTERRUPTED FLEXLM OPERATION TASKING products licensed through FLEXIm contain a number of utilities for managing licenses These utilities are bundled in the form of an extra product under the name SW000098 TASKING products themselves contain two additional files for FLEXIm in a ex m subdirectory Tasking The Tasking daemon vendor daemon license dat A template license file If you have already installed FLEXIm e g as part of another product then it is not needed to install the bundled SW000098 After installing SW000098 on UNIX the directory usr 1ocal flexilm will contain two subdirectories bin and licenses After installing SW000098 on Windows the directory c NV 1exlm will contain the subdirectory bin The exact location may differ if FLEXIm has already been installed as part of a non TASKING product but in general there will be a directory for executables such as bin That directory must contain a copy of the Tasking daemon shipped with every TASKING product It also contains the files lmgrd The FLEXlm daemon license daemon lm A group of FLEXIm license administration utilities Next to it a license file must be present containing the information of all licenses This file is usually called 1icense dat The default location of the license file is in directory c NX 1exlm for Windows and in usr local flexlm licenses f
182. e lt stdio h gt int fclose FILE stream Flushes any unwritten data for stream discards any unread buffered input frees any automatically allocated buffer then closes the stream Returns zero if the stream is successfully closed or EOF on error feof finclude lt stdio h gt int feof FILE stream Returns a non zero value if the end of file indicator for stream is set ferror finclude lt stdio h gt int ferror FILE stream Returns a non zero value if the error indicator for stream is set Jflusb finclude lt stdio h gt dime Ed oea Liki eee cecim p Writes any buffered but unwritten data if stream is an output stream If stream is an input stream the effect is undefined Returns zero if successful or EOF on a write error 6 28 Chapter 6 Jgetc finclude lt stdio h gt int fgetc FILE stream Reads one character from the given stream Returns the read character or EOF on error Jgetpos finclude stdio h IME LEGSCOOS Id Sgydau eos Jeux Jp Stores the current value of the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream in the object pointed to by ptr The type fpos_t is suitable for recording such values Returns zero if successful a non zero value on error Jgets include lt stdio h gt ehari fgets Chiaie EG saline i MII Streami Reads at most the next n 1 characters from the given stream into the array s until a new
183. e command does not produce any output then the license server daemon is not running See below for an example how to start Imgrd A 36 Appendix A Make sure that both license server daemon Imgrd and the program are using the same license data All TASKING products use the license file usr local flexlm licenses license dat unless overruled by the environment variable LM_LICENSE_FILE However not all existing Imgrd daemons may use the same default In case of doubt specify the license file pathname with the c option when starting the license server daemon For example lmgrd c usr local flexlm licenses license dat 1 usr local flexlm licenses license log amp and set the LM LICENSE FILE environment variable to the license dat pathname mentioned with the c option of Imgrd before running any license based program including Imreread lmstat Imdown If Imgrd and the program run on different hosts transparent access to the license file is assumed in the situation described above e g NFS If this is not the case make a local copy of the license file not recommended or set LM LICENSE FILE to the form number host as described earlier If none of the above seems to apply i e Imgrd was already running and LM LICENSE FILE has been set correctly then it is very likely that there is a TCP port mismatch The fourth field of a SERVER line in the license file specifies a TCP port numbe
184. e envase Sets the components of an object with type struct lconv with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities according to the rules of the current locale Returns a pointer to the filled in object localtime include lt time h gt Gee tm llya we comm Ele Ie ED yg Converts the calender time tp into local time Returns a structure representing the local time log finclude lt math h gt double log double ex Returns the natural logarithm 1n x x gt 0 log10 finclude lt math h gt double log10 double x Returns the base 10 logarithm log10 x x gt 0 longjmp finclude set jmp h void longjmp jmp buf env int val Restores the environment previously saved with a call to setjmp The function calling the corresponding call to setjmp may not be terminated yet The value of val may not be zero Libraries 6 39 Because of the low level nature of this routine it will not work correctly with the Cc switch all functions compatible With minor changes to adapt it to the compatible calling convention this can be changed but it cannot run under both calling conventions On the DSP563xx this routine will also fail when the stack extension is in use and the required stack level is located in the extension area malloc finclude stdlib h vordi malloc size E eXue Jp The allocated space is not initialized The maximum space that can be allocated can be changed by customizin
185. e environment 7 12 hardware loop 3 83 Index Index 9 hardware loop generation 2 9 hardware loops 4 47 4 57 header files 6 7 heap 7 4 7 19 begin of 7 19 end of 7 19 heap size 7 19 hostid determining 1 17 hostname determining 1 18 identifier 4 14 IEEE 695 2 18 include files 4 83 default directory 4 84 initialized C variables 7 5 initialized variables 3 25 inline assembly 3 31 input function calling mechanism 6 6 input output functions 6 6 installation licensing 1 10 Linux 1 5 Debian 1 6 RPM 1 5 tar gz 1 7 UNIX 1 8 Windows 1 3 integer division 3 27 integer modulo 3 27 integer type 3 90 integral promotion 3 19 Intel hex format 2 18 function inline C 3 29 interrupt 3 68 symbolic 3 68 interrupt routine 3 93 intrinsic functions 3 42 _ asm 3 45 _abs 3 44 _asm 3 44 cacbe gel end 3 46 cache gel start 3 45 _cadd 3 46 _cdiv 5 47 _cmul 5 48 _csub 3 49 ext 3 49 _fabs 3 50 _fract2int 3 50 Jfsqrt 3 51 _int2fract 3 51 _labs 3 52 _Tfabs 3 52 _Tfract2long 3 53 long2lfract 3 53 _memcpy 3 54 memset 3 54 _nop 3 55 _pdiv 3 55 _pflusb 3 56 _pflushun 3 56 _pfree 3 57 _plock 3 57 _punlock 3 58 _rol 3 59 _ror 3 59 _round 3 60 _sema_clr 3 61 _sema_sel 3 62 sema tst 3 63 stop 3 63 _sircmp 3 04 5 66 _strcpy 3 64 _strlen 3 65 _swt 3 66 Wait 3 67 introduction 2 3 invariant code 4 48 invocation compiler 4 6 control progra
186. e first line is empty mylabel 3 36 Chapter 3 i Example 3 Assign the result of inline assembly to a variable An accumulator type register is chosen for the parameter due to the constraint D the compiler decides which accumulator is best to use The string 0 in the template is replaced with the name of this accumulator Finally the compiler generates code to assign the result to the output variable int varl void main void _ asm move lt SFF 0 D varl Generated code move lt SFF a move al x Fvarl Example 4 Multiply two expressions and assign the result to a variable Two expressions are multiplied and the result is placed in a variable An accumulator ype register is necessary for the output parameter constraint D 0 in the template alu registers XO YO X1 or Y1 must be used for the input registers constraint S 1 and 2 in the template The compiler generates code to move the input expressions into the input registers and to assign the result to the output variable int varl var2 long result void main void _ asm mpy 1 2 0 D result S varl S var2 Generated code move x Fvarl x0 move x Fvar2 x1 mpy x0 xl a move a0 x Fresult move al x Fresult 1l Language Implementation 3 37 Example 5 Execute a block move in Y memory Two pointer expressions are given and the contents of a memory block in Y memory is copied This example
187. e message is the descriptive text supplied in a Zerror preprocessor directive Compiler Diagnostics 5 15 W 91 no prototype for function name Each function should have a valid function prototype 92 no prototype for indirect function call Each function should have a valid function prototype 94 hiding earlier one Additional message which is preceded by error E 63 The second declaration will be used 95 protection error 7nessage Something went wrong with the protection key initialization The message could be Key is not present or printer is not correct Can t read key Can t initialize key or Can t set key model 96 syntax error in define define id requires a right parenthesis 97 incompatible with old style prototype If one function has a parameter type list and another function with the same name is an old style declaration the parameter list may not have ellipsis The following is an example of this error dmt GE RO ww ine f error old style 98 function type cannot be inherited from a typedef A typedef cannot be used for a function definition The following is an example of this error typedef int INTFN INTFN f return 0 error 99 conditional directives nested too deep if Tifdef or ifndef directives may not be nested deeper than 50 levels 100 case or default label not inside switch The case or default label may only appear inside a switch
188. e name has a bad encryption code CANNOT OPEN options file file The options file specified in the license file could not be opened Couldn t find a master The daemons could not agree on a master license daemon lost all connections This message is logged when all the connections to a server are lost which often indicates a network problem lost lock exiting Error closing lock file Unable to re open lock file The vendor daemon has a problem with its lock file usually because of an attempt to run more than one copy of the daemon on a single node Locate the other daemon that is running via a ps command and kill it with kill 9 NO DAEMON line for daemon The license file does not contain a DAEMON line for daemon No license service found The TCP license service did not exist in etc services No license data for feat feature unsupported There is no feature line for feat in the license file A 30 Appendix A No features to serve A vendor daemon found no features to serve This could be caused by bad data in the license file UNSUPPORTED FEATURE request feature by user The zser has requested a feature that this vendor daemon does not support This can happen for a number of reasons the license file is bad the feature has expired or the daemon is accessing the wrong license file Unknown host hostname The hostname specified on a SERVER line in the license file does not
189. e used inside a guoted argument we have to go by the following rules a If the embedded guotes are only single or double guotes use the opposite guote around the argument Thus if a argument should contain a double guote surround the argument with single guotes b If both types of guotes are used we have to split the argument in such a way that each embedded guote is surrounded by the opposite type of guote Compiler Use 4 25 Example n This has a single quote embedded Or This has a double quote embedded Or This has a double quote and a single quote embedded 4 Some operating systems impose limits on the length of lines within a text file To circumvent this limitation it is possible to use continuation lines These lines end with a backslash and newline In a quoted argument continuation lines will be appended without stripping any whitespace on the next line For non quoted arguments all whitespace on the next line will be stripped Example This is a continuation line This is a continuation line control filel mode type M file2 type gt control filel mode type file2 type 5 It is possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file mycmds containts the following line err test c The command line can now be c563 f mycmds 4 26 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the
190. e variable Angle in this example will wrap around instead of going into saturation during calculations 3 3 2 THE COMPLEX DATA TYPE The compiler supports a pre declared type definition of type complex which is equivalent to typedef struct _fract re _fract im _complex This type is supported by means of intrinsic functions Four standard operations are provided by intrinsic services _complex cadd complex complex complex addition _complex _csub _complex _ complex complex subtraction complex cmul complex complex complex multiplication complex cdiv complex complex complex division _complex cmac complex complex complex complex mac Language Implementation 3 19 This offers a simple but effective way to use complex arithmetic in C applications without sacrificing portability or efficiency 3 3 3 UNSIGNED CHARACTERS The character type is treated as unsigned char by default Arithmetic on unsigned characters can be done more efficiently than on signed characters You can overrule this default with the u command line option which sets the default to signed char Examples The following declarations are identical when u is not used char c unsigned char c The following declarations are identical when u is used char c signed char c 3 3 4 ANSI C TYPE CONVERSIONS According to the ANSI C X3 159 1989 standard a character a short integer an
191. ebuild the libraries for the c563 compiler similar steps can be followed for the c56 1 Check if the bin directory of the installed c563 product is included in your path environment setting If it is not there you should add it 2 In the directory 1ib src you will find the library sources For each type of library it also contains a subdirectory with a makefile for creating the specific library Select the directory depending on which library you want to build and make this directory the working directory 3 Edit the concerning makefile and add the new options to the line which defines CFLAGS For example CFLAGS IS SRCDIR M24yn Cacr AF 4 Type mk563 to build libraries for c563 5 When building is finished you will find the library in the current directory You can copy the library to the 1ibX563xx or 1ibN566xx directory of the product But before you do so you may want to make a backup copy of the original library in that directory When the hardware stack extension has to be disabled on the DSP you also have to retranslate start asm with the NOESTACK macro defined When retranslating the libraries you can set this option also in the concerning makefile by adding DNOESTACK to the ASFLAGS definition Libraries 6 5 6 3 LIBRARIES OVERVIEW The table below lists the libraries included in the DSP5600x c56 and DSP563xx 6xx c563 toolchains What libraries are to be linked depends on the memory model sele
192. ect correct this by setting the LM LICENSE FILE environment variable to the full pathname of the license file FLEXIm license error cannot read license file Every user needs to have read access on the license file and at least execute access on every directory component in the pathname of the license file Write access is never needed Read access on directories is recommended FLEXIm license error no sucb feature exists Check the license file There should be a line starting with FEATURE SWiiiiii j A 34 Appendix A for identifying a compatible host architecture During product installations the product code is shown e g SW008002 SW019002 The number in the software code is the same as the number in the product code except that the first number may contain an extra leading zero it must be six digits long The line after the license error message describes the expected feature format and includes the host code Correct the license file using the license data sheet for the product and run the Imreread command There is one catch do not add extra SERVER lines or change existing SERVER lines in the license file FLEXIm license error license server does not support tbis feature If the LM LICENSE FILE variable has been set to the format number amp bost then see first the solution for the message FLEXlm license error no such feature exists Run the Imreread program to inform
193. ed in the standard definition include file lt float h gt 7 8 1 2 FLOATING POINT CONSTANTS Floating point constants conform to the ANSI C standard except that an unsuffixed floating point constant has type float If suffixed by the letter f or F it has type float If suffixed by the letter 1 or L it also has type float because the characteristics for the double and long double types are chosen to be equal to the float type Floating point constants in the range 1 1 are interpreted as a fractional type switchable with the compiler AF option Semantics the type of a float constant is the first in which its value can be represented first _fract then float This allows fixed point arithmetic with fractional constants without suffixes See also section 3 3 1 The Fractional Type 7 8 1 3 USUAL ARITHMETIC CONVERSIONS Promotions conform to the ANSI C pattern of usual arithmetic conversions This pattern is extended for _fract and long _fract First if either operand has a fractional type and the other operand has a non fractional type then the operand with the fractional type is converted to the non fractional type Otherwise if either operand has type long _ fract the other is converted to long fract Run time Environment Otherwise both operands have type _fract Remember that floating point constants in 1 1 are interpreted as a fractional type See previous section Floating Point Constants 7 8 1 4
194. ed on name only circ pointers and arrays structs unions are allowed ignored on struct union member ame _circ is only allowed on structures and unions if its member is of type circ W 551 recursion in non reentrant function name Recursion is only allowed on reentrant functions E 552 only long type objects are allowed in L memory space ignored on symbol name The specified object is not of type long and therefore is not allowed in the L memory space E 553 only long type struct union members are allowed in L memory space ignored on symbol name The specified member is not of type long and therefore is not allowed in the L memory space 5 36 Chapter 5 W 555 current optimization level could reduce debugging comfort g the O2 or O4 option may be used to improve this You could have HLL debug conflicts with these optimization settings The O2 and O4 option optimize for debug 556 Register name cannot be reserved invalid register Register name cannot be reserved is a function return register If the first warning occurs you specified an invalid register name to the r option The second warning occurs if RO or NO is used because these are function return registers and therefore cannot be reserved See the r option for a list of available register names 557 Register name cannot be reserved is used for dynamic stack The specified register is used as a stack pointer register and therefore ca
195. een higher than the node clients and server and can be used locked license on any host system using the same operating system in the network How does FLEXIm affect future product ordering For all licenses node locked or floating you must provide information that is used to create a license key For node locked licenses we must have the HOST ID Floating licenses require the HOST ID and HOST NAME The HOST ID is a unique identification of the machine which is based upon different hardware depending upon host platform The HOST NAME is the network name of the machine amp TASKING Logistics CANNOT ship ANY orders that do not include the HOST ID and or HOST NAME information What if I do not know tbe information needed for tbe license key We have a software utility tkhostid exe which will obtain and display the HOST ID so a customer can easily obtain this information This utility is available from our web site placed on all product CDs which support FLEXlm and from technical support If you have already installed FLEXIm you can also use Imhostid In the case of a Node locked license it is important that the customer runs this utility on the exact machine he intends to run the TASKING tools on A 40 Appendix A In the case of a Floating License the tkhostid exe or Imhostid utility should be run on the machine on which the FLEXIm license manager will be installed e g the server The HOST NA
196. emory You can then access these I O devices with the same efficient instructions as the built in I O devices To access them from C code you can create a header file for your I O system that is similar to the ones provided for the DSP device 3 23 8 PARALLEL MOVES For the DSP5600x and DSP563xx it is recommended to allocate data structures in Y memory whenever possible to take advantage of parallel X Y moves Automatics are stored in X memory so this gives you a better balance 3 23 9 SHIFTING FRACTIONAL DATA The DSP56xxx compilers support shifting of fractional data values You may want to use the method below however because this feature is not portable to floating point calculations You can use multiplication division with fractional powers of 2 to implement shifting of fractional data For example _fract scale_down _fract f return 0 25 f gt gt 2 Code asr a asr a rts Language Implementation 3 89 _fract scale_up _fract f return 0 125 f lt lt 3 se Code rep 3 asl a rts 3 23 10 DYNAMIC SCALING To scale dynamically you can use a negative _fract scaling factor to avoid rounding errors at gain 1 output input gain 1 0 lt gain lt 0 Code move x Finput xl move x Fgain y0 mpyr x1 y0 a move a x Foutput 3 23 11 REVIEWING THE OPTIMIZED CODE The optimizations for a C program are partially done in the C comp
197. en to the output stream The format string may contain plain text mixed with conversion specifiers Each conversion specifier should be preceded by a 96 character The conversion specifier should be build in order Flags in any order specifies left adjustment of the converted argument a number is always preceded with a sign character has higher precedence as space spacea negative number is preceded with a sign positive numbers with a space 0 specifies padding to the field width with zeros only for numbers specifies an alternate output form For o the first digit will be zero For x or X 0x and 0X will be prefixed to the number For e E f g G the output always contains a decimal point trailing zeros are not removed 6 44 Chapter 6 A number specifying a minimum field width The converted argument is printed in a field with at least the length specified here If the converted argument has fewer characters than specified it will be padded at the left side or at the right when the flag was specified with spaces Padding to numeric fields will be done with zeros when the flag 0 is also specified only when padding left Instead of a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A period This separates the minimum field width from the precision A number specifying the maximum length of a string to be printed
198. er 5 41 elif without if The Felif directive did not appear within an if Zifdef or ifndef construct Make sure that there is a corresponding if ifdef or Fifndef statement in effect before this statement 42 syntax error expecting parameter type declaration statement A syntax error occurred in a parameter list a declaration or a statement This can have many causes such as errors in syntax of numbers usage of reserved words operator errors missing parameter types missing tokens 43 unrecoverable syntax error skipping to end of file The compiler found an error from which it could not recover This error is in most cases preceded by another error Usually error E 42 44 in initializer name Informational message when checking for a proper constant initializer 46 cannot hold that many operands The value stack may not exceed 20 operands 47 missing operator An operator was expected in the expression 48 missing right parenthesis was expected 49 attempt to divide by zero potential run time error An expression with a divide or modulo by zero was found Adjust the expression or test if the second operand of a divide or modulo is zero 50 missing left parenthesis C was expected 51 cannot hold that many operators The state stack may not exceed 20 operators 52 missing operand An operand was expected Compiler Diagnostics 5 11 E E 53 missing identifier after defined operator
199. er Diagnostics 5 9 W main int Jj int j error 34 illegal redefinition of macro name A macro can be redefined only if the body of the redefined macro is exactly the same as the body of the originally defined macro This warning can be caused by defining a macro on the command line and in the source with a define directive It also can be caused by macros imported from include files To eliminate the warning either remove one of the definitions or use an undef directive before the second definition 35 bad filename in Fline The string literal of a line if present may not be a wide char string So line 9999 L t45 c is not allowed 36 debug facility not installed Fpragma debug is only allowed in the debug version of the compiler 37 attempt to divide by zero A divide or modulo by zero was found Adjust the expression or test if the second operand of a divide or modulo is zero 38 non integral switch expression A switch condition expression must evaluate to an integral value So char p 0 switch p is not allowed 39 unknown error number number This error may not occur If it does contact your local TASKING office and provide them with the exact error message 40 non standard escape sequence Check the spelling of your escape sequence a backslash followed by a number or letter it contains an illegal escape character For example Nc causes this warning 5 10 Chapt
200. er tries to use a non sequential register allocation scheme The compiler chooses one of the available registers in an arbitrary order With this compiler optimization the assembler can perform a better optimization With OZ the compiler uses a seguential register allocation scheme The next available register is used This can also be a previously allocated register that is no longer used 4 70 Chapter 4 Example Compile with OZ 00 sequential register allocation the same register is used for each allocation Compile with Oz 00 non sequential register allocation Three different registers are used for the allocations Ey int a 3 void main void a 0 0 a l 1 a 2 2 d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 71 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field E o file Arguments An output filename The filename may not start immediately after the option There must be a tab or space in between Default Module name with src suffix Description Use file as output filename instead of the module name with src suffix Special care must be taken when using this option the first o option found acts on the first file to compile the second o option acts on the second file to compile etc Example When specified c563 filel c file2 c o
201. erands of operator must be a valid pointer The following example generates this error int pi 44 right side not a pointer 5 24 Chapter 5 E 161 aggregates around operator do not match The contents of the structs unions or arrays on both sides of the operator must be the same The following example causes this error int b s int d error struct int a struct int c int e t s t E 162 operator requires an lvalue or function designator The amp address operator requires an lvalue or function designator The following is an example of this error int 4j i amp i 20 W 163 operands of operator have different level of indirection The types of pointers or addresses of the operator must be assignment compatible The following is an example of this warning char a char b a b warning E 164 operands of operator may not have type pointer to void The operands of operator may not have operand void W 165 operands of operator are incompatible pointer vs pointer to array The types of pointers or addresses of the operator must be assignment compatible A pointer cannot be assigned to a pointer to array The following is an example of this warning main typedef int array 10 array a array ap a warning E 166 operalor cannot make something out of nothing Casting type void to something else is not allowed The following example gener
202. eread the license file and start any new vendor daemons Imstat Helps you monitor the status of all network licensing activities lmswitchr Switches the report log file Imver Reports the FLEXIm version of a library or binary file Imtools Windows only This is a graphical Windows version of the license administration tools A 10 3 1 LMCKSUM Name Imcksum print license checksums Synopsis Imcksum c icense file k Description Appendix A The Imcksum program will perform a checksum of a license file This is useful to verify data entry errors at your location Imcksum will print a line by line checksum for the file as well as an overall file checksum The following fields participate in the checksum e hostid on the S e daemon name on the DAI ERVER lines EMON lines e feature name version daemon name expiration date of licenses encription code vendor string and hostid on the FEATURE lines e daemon name and encryption code on FEATURESET lines Options c license file Use the specified license file If no c option is specified Imcksum looks for the environment variable LM L ICENSE _ FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set lmcksum looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX k Case sensitive
203. esult values intermediate results and for internal calculations Accumulators ftm1 and ftm2 are used for passing operands and internal calculations The accumulators are located in registers Run time Environment Mantissa Exponent FAC A2 sign extension of A1 B2 sign extension of B1 unused unused A1 mantissa B1 exponent AO zero BO zero FTM1 X1 X0 FTM2 Y1 YO Table 7 13 Accumulalor formats 7 8 2 3 STORAGE 2 COMPLEMENT FORMAT VALUES The following table shows the memory storage implementation used by the software floating point libraries for single precision floating point values Address 0000 0001 Binary encoding 0000 0000 0000 0000 eeee eeee S mmm mmmm mmmm mmmm mmmm mmmm S sign bit m mantissa bit e exponent bit Table 7 14 Memory Layout for 24 bit data models Address 0000 0001 Binary encoding 0000 0000 eeee eeee S mmm mmmm mmmm mmmim S sign bit m mantissa bit e exponent bit Table 7 15 Memory Layout for 16 bit dala models 7 8 2 4 INTERNAL REGISTER USAGE The software floating point arithmetic and conversion functions use a set of registers Some are used for parameter passing and others are free for internal use If you use some of these registers in your own assembly function you have to save them before a floating point function can be
204. exp fabs floor fmod frexp ldexp log log10 modf pow sin sinh sgrt tan tanh lt reg56xxx h gt lt setjmp h gt lt signal h gt lt stdarg h gt lt stddef h gt lt stdio h gt Include files with all special function register definitions for the DSP56xxx longjmp setjmp raise signal Functions are delivered as skeletons va arg va end va start offsetof definition of special types clearerr close fclose feof ferror fflush fgetc fgetpos fgets fopen _ fopen fprintf fputc fputs fread freopen fscanf fseek fsetpos ftell fwrite getc getchar gets lseek _open perror printf putc putchar puts read remove rename rewind scanf setbuf setvbuf sprintf sscanf tmpfile tmpnam ungetc vfprintf vprintf vsprintf write 6 8 Chapter 6 E lt stdlib h gt abort abs atexit atof atoi atol bsearch calloc div exit free getenv labs Idiv malloc mblen mbstowcs mbtowc qsort rand realloc srand strtod strtol strtoul system wcstombs wctomb lt string h gt memchr memcmp memcpy memmove memset _ packsize _packstr pstr get pstr put strcat strchr strcmp strcol strcpy strcspn strerror strlen strncat strncmp strncpy strpbrk strrchr strspn strstr strtok strxfrm unpackstr _unpstrlen lt t me h gt _ asctime clock ctime difftime gmtime localtime mktime strftime time 6 6 C LIBRARIES The C library contains C library functions Al
205. file3 src o file2 src two files will be created file3 src for the compiled file file1 c and file2 src for the compiled file file2 c 4 72 Chapter 4 Option ppage Arguments The number of Patriot memory pages 1 8 Default p2 Description Use this option to specify the number of Patriot memory pages Page switch instructions depend on the specified number of memory pages d gt Section 3 17 Patriot Bank Switching Support in chapter Language Implementation Example To set the number of Patriot memory pages to five c563 p5 test c Compiler Use 4 73 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Output Add a section name replacement to the Replace default section names field Ea R dname zsname Arguments Optionally the default section name and the new section name Description You can use the R option to replace the default section names generated by the compiler If you use the R option alone the compiler replaces all section names by a name that is related to the filename of the source module If you want to replace some of the default section names you can specify these default names with R The new names are related to the module name unless the new name is specified in an optional second part The R option may appear more than once dname is the default name of the section normally used by the compiler sname is the new section name the
206. for details identifies for which DSP processor type the module is compiled It expands to a number For example 0 for the DSP5600x processor type 3 for the DSP563xx and 6 for the DSP566xx processor types identifies the data memory used for the stack this is either default data memory or L memory See section Memory Models for details identifies the user stack pointer register from the Cr CR option r6 or r7 For r6 its value is 6 for r7 it is 7 CACHE SECTOR SIZE Expands to the value set with the option csize or with the pragma cache sector size c563 only These symbols can be turned off with the U option Example c563 U MODEL test c db Compiler Use 4 79 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation Enable the Treat char variables as unsigned check box BE u Description Treat character type variables as signed character variables By default char is the same as specifying unsigned char With u char is the same as signed char Example With the following command char is treated as signed char c563 u test c 4 80 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option tothe Additional options field BB v Description Display version information Example c56 V TASKING DSP5600x C compiler vx yrz Build nnn Copyright
207. from copy table in P p n i e data near internal external initialized P data copied from copy table in P X n ile data near internal external initialized X data copied from copy table in P y n i e data near internal external initialized Y data copied from copy table in P l n ile bss near internal external cleared L data p n i e bss near internal external cleared P data X n ile bss near internal external cleared X data y n ile bss near internal external cleared Y data Table 7 4 Section names The n i e part of the section names has the following meaning n i e ni ne near internal external near internal near external 7 12 Chapter 7 i 7 5 COMPILER HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT In the compiled code it is assumed that all processor mode registers like OMR SR and SP are in the state they have after reset except when they are set up differently in the startup code Although other settings of these registers may work just as well care is needed In any case different settings must be compatible with the hardware connected and the memory layout selected For some changes the startup code and or the locator description files must be updated as well e g if you want to place the stack extension in Y memory 7 5 1 OPERATING MODE REGISTER OMR bit 0 3 chip operating mode Normally the compiled code runs in expanded mode defa
208. g the heap size see the section Heap By default no heap is allocated When malloc is used while no heap is defined the locator gives an error Returns a pointer to space in external memory of size bytes length NULL if there is not enough space left d gt See also free mblen include lt stdlib h gt ime molem conse Ehe Size w m Ie Determines the number of bytes comprising the multi byte character pointed to by s if s is not a null pointer Except that the shift state is not affected At most n characters will be examined starting at the character pointed to by s Returns the number of bytes or 0 if s points to the null character or 1 if the bytes do not form a valid multi byte character 6 40 Chapter 6 i mbstowcs include lt stdlib h gt size_t mbstowcs wchar_t pwcs COMBE Chaise ep enge ie m y Converts a sequence of multi byte characters that begins in the initial shift state from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding codes and stores these codes into the array pointed to by pwcs stopping after n codes are stored or a code with value zero is stored Returns the number of array elements modified not including a terminating zero code if any or size t 1 if an invalid multi byte character is encountered mbtowc include lt stdlib h gt int mbtowc wchar_t pwc const ehar MES E IO Determines the number of bytes that comprise the multi byte character poi
209. ge but with a different page number e Function pointers pointing to banked functions need to be declared within the same bank as the function they point to Language Implementation 3 77 Example The following code calls function foo from function bar Function foo is located in range 1 page 0 and function bar is located in range 3 page 1 void _bank 1 0 foo void void _bank 3 1 bar void void bank 3 1 bar void foo 3 18 PACKED STRINGS The c56 and c563 compilers support packed characters and packed strings The packed type modifier will be used to define a packed string The packed modifier can only be applied to characters character arrays or pointers to character Incrementing a packed character pointer means incrementing to the next word Thus two c563 in 16 bit model or three c56 c563 in 2 bit model characters are skipped 3 18 1 LIBRARY FUNCTIONS To be able to access packed strings the C library has been extended with functions to deal with packed strings char unpackstr char zp const packed char p Unpack string pointed to by p in the buffer pointed to by wp Return a pointer to the unpacked string packed char packstr _ packed char p const char unp Pack string pointed to by unp in the buffer pointed to by p Return a pointer to the packed string size t unpstrlen const packed char p Return the length in number of characters of
210. ge of Imdown lmreread and Imremove to a FLEXIm administrator who is by default root If there is a UNIX group called Imadmin then use is restricted to only members of that group If root is not a member of this group then root does not have permission to use any of the above utilities Specifies the timeout interval in seconds during which the license daemon must complete its connection to other daemons if operating in multi server mode The default value is 10 seconds A larger value may be desirable if the daemons are being run on busy systems or a very heavily loaded network A 14 Appendix A s interval Specifies the log file timestamp interval in minutes The default is 360 minutes This means that every six hours Imgrd logs the time in the log file qb Imdown lmstat Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 15 3 5 LMHOSTID Name Imhostid report the hostid of a system Synopsis Imhostid Description Imhostid calls the FLEXIm version of gethostid and displays the results The output of Imhostid looks like this lmhostid Copyright C 1989 1999 Globetrotter Software Inc The FLEXlm host ID of this machine is 1200abcd Options Imhostid has no command line options A 16 Appendix A 3 6 LMREMOVE Name Imremove remove specific licenses and return them to license pool Synopsis Imremove c icense_ file feature user host display Description The Imremove utility allows
211. gisters in an interrupt routine and set them to the linear mode In applications that do not need circular pointers this will decrease the interrupt latency Of course the application may not use the modifier registers on the assembly level either or the interrupt handling will fail Example int a p void long interrupt 28 irq28 void a prt code contains moves for m register without AO Default Allow C style comments in C source code For example e g this is a C comment line Do not allow C style comments in C source code to conform to strict ANSI C Default Enable the restrict keyword Disable the restrict keyword Default _ STDC__ is defined as 0 The decimal constant 0 intended to indicate a non conforming implementation When one of the language extensions are enabled _ STDC should be defined as 0 STDC is defined as 1 In strict ANSI C mode CA STDC is defined as T Compiler Use 4 15 1 Default Do not promote old style function parameters when prototype checking Perform default argument promotions on old style function parameters for a strict ANSI C implementation char type arguments are promoted to int type and 1oat type arguments are then promoted to double type Default Allow type cast of an lvalue object with incomplete type void and lvalue cast which does not change the type and memory of an Ivalue object Example void p int p
212. gn is pone use Display lines min t Suppress one or all warning messages w num Suppress warning messages 196 303 wstrict Table 4 3 Compiler options functional 4 10 Chapter 4 i 4 2 1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPILER OPTIONS Option letters are listed below Each option except o see description of the o option is applied to every source file If the same option is used more than once the first most left occurrence is used The placement of command line options is of no importance except for the I and o options For the o option the filename may not start immediately after the option There must be a tab or space in between All other option arguments must start immediately after the option Source files are processed in the same order as they appear on the command line left to right Some options have an equivalent pragma With options that can be set from within EDE you will find a mouse icon that describes the corresponding action Compiler Use Option Description Display an explanation of options at stdout Example c563 4 12 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language Extensions Select the Advanced language extensions radio button and enable one or more language exentensions Es Ajflags Arguments Optionally one or more language extension flags Default
213. gnal h raise signal No OS present No OS present stdarg h va_arg va_end va start stddef h Only Macros stdio h lt K lt lt TETK X EA lt lt lt clearerr fclose feof ferror fflush fgetc Due to stdarg h varargs h conflicts the routines vprintf vfprintf vsprintf are not ANSI yet Needs _ fclose Needs write Needs _read Libraries File Imple Routine name Description Reason mented fgetpos Needs lseek fgets Needs _read fopen Needs fopen fprintf Needs _write l fputc Needs write fputs Needs write fread Needs _read freopen Needs _ fclose _fopen fscanf Needs read fseek Needs lseek fsetpos Needs lseek ftell Needs lseek fwrite Needs write getc Needs _read getchar Needs _read gets Needs _read Y perror printf Needs write putc Needs _write putchar Needs write puts Needs _write L remove rename rewind Needs lseek scanf Needs read Y setbuf Y setvbuf Y sprintf Y sscanf L tmpfile L tmpnam Delivered as a random name generator but should use some process ID MN ungetc vfprintf Needs write vprintf Needs _write Y vsprintf _ close Low level file close routine _fopen Low level file open routine _lseek Low level file positioning routine open Low level file open routine _read Low level input routine _write Low level
214. grated into the TASKING toolchain It also contains descriptions of the Flexible License Manager license administration tools that are included with the package the daemon log file and its contents and the use of daemon options files to customize your use of the TASKING toolchain 2 LICENSE ADMINISTRATION 2 1 OVERVIEW The Flexible License Manager FLEXlm is a set of utilities that when incorporated into software such as the TASKING toolchain provides for managing access to the software The following terms are used to describe FLEXIm concepts and software components feature A feature could be any of the following A TASKING software product Asoftware product from another vendor license The right to use a feature FLEXIm restricts licenses for features by counting the number of licenses for features in use when new requests are made by the application software client A TASKING application program daemon A process that serves clients Sometimes referred to as a server vendor daemon The daemon that dispenses licenses for the requested features This daemon is built by an application s vendor and contains the vendor s personal encryption code Tasking is the vendor daemon for the TASKING software Appendix A license daemon server node license file The daemon process that sends client processes to the correct vendor daemon on the correct machine The same license daemon is used by all applicati
215. guments to each invocation of cc563 The control program processes the arguments from this variable before the command line arguments LM LICENSE FILE Identifies the location of the license data file Only needed for hosts that need the FLEXIm license manager 2 19 2 20 Chapter 2 Environment Description Variable PATH Specifies the search path for your executables TMPDIR Specifies an alternative directory where programs can create temporary files Used by c56 c563 cc56 cc563 as56 as563 Ik56 IK563 Ic56 1c563 ar56 ar563 Table 2 1 Environment variables Overview 2 21 2 5 SAMPLE SESSION The subdirectory c in the examples subdirectory contains a demo program for the DSP56xxx toolchain In order to debug your programs you will have to compile assemble link and locate them for debugging using the TASKING DSP56xxx tools You can do this with one call to the control program or you can use EDE the Embedded Development Environment which uses a project file and a makefile or you can call the makefile from the command line 2 5 1 USING EDE EDE stands for Embedded Development Environment and is the MS Windows oriented Integrated Development Environment you can use with your TASKING toolchain to design and develop your application To use EDE on the calc demo program in the subdirectory c in the examples subdirectory of the DSP56xxx product tree follow the ste
216. h execution speed so in this model there is no need to treat a register variable in a special way because all automatic variables are accessed with a speed comparable to a real register In this model automatic variables are allocated on the user stack and are addressed using the indexed addressing mode The code generator of c563 uses a save by caller strategy This means that a function which needs the contents of one or more registers over a function call must save the contents of these registers and restore them after the call The major advantage of this approach is that only registers which are really used after the call are saved Conclusion the usage of the register keyword is not necessary for improving code density or speed Language Implementation 3 25 3 6_ INITIALIZED VARIABLES Non automatic initialized variables use the same amount of space in both ROM and RAM for all possible RAM memory spaces This is because the initializers are stored in ROM and copied to RAM at start up This is completely transparent to the user The only exception are initialized variables declared with the const specifier Examples static memory model int i 100 1 word in P memory and 1 word in X memory _P int j 3 2 words in P memory if char t TEXT 6 words in P memory and 6 words in X memory 1 word for p 5 words for TEXT EJ _P char t HELP 10 words in P memory _X cha
217. haracter constant or string constant only when it is preceded by a backslash X To break a string that is on two lines in the source file do one of the following e End the first line with the line continuation character a backslash OL e Close the string on the first line with a double quotation mark and open the string on the next line with another guotation mark 20 empty character constant A character contant must contain exactly one character Empty character contants are not allowed 21 character constant overflow A character contant must contain exactly one character Note that an escape sequence for example t for tab is converted to a single character 22 fdefine without valid identifier You have to supply an identifier after a define 23 _ Felse without af Felse can only be used within a corresponding if Zifdef or ifndef construct Make sure that there is a if Zifdef or ifndef statement in effect before this statement 24 _ Fendif without matching if Fendif appeared without a matching if Zifdef or ifndef preprocessor directive Make sure that there is a matching endif for each Vif Zifdef and ifndef statement 25 missing or zero line number Fline requires a non zero line number specification 26 undefined control A control line line with a identifier must contain one of the known preprocessor directives 5 8 z W E Chapter 5 27 unexpected
218. he cache sector size A cache function definition will look as follows void _cache_region sample void When a function pointer with the cache region qualifier is defined the begin and end labels can be set manually For this purpose two pragmas are available pragma cache region start pir Mark start position of a cache region pragma cache region end pir Mark end position of a cache region The ptr can be defined as follows void cache region fptr void See section 3 16 4 for examples 3 16 3 CACHE INTRINSIC FUNCTIONS The following intrinsic functions are available for cache locking void pflush void flush cache void pflushun void flush unlocked sectors void pfree void global unlock void plock int P addr lock 1 sector in cache with address addr 3 74 Chapter 3 void _ punlock int _P addr unlock 1 cache sector with the address addr int P cache get start void cache region fpir Q get first address of cache region belonging to ptr int P cache get end void cache region pir Q get last address of cache region belonging to Sptr 3 16 4 EXAMPLES Example 1 Locking a loop in the cache void foo void void _cache_region creg void _plock cache get start creg loop fits in one sector pragma cache align now pragma cache region start creg for ae pragma cache_region_end creg punlock _cache_get_
219. he memory model selected In a static model this means static allocation in one of the RAM memory spaces In the reentrant model this means dynamic allocation on the stack Although automatic variables are allocated in a static area with non reentrant functions they are not the same as local variables within a function which are declared to be static by means of the static keyword The difference is itis not guaranteed that an automatic variable still has the same value as the last time the function returned because it may have been overlaid with another automatic variable of another module itis guaranteed that the value of a static variable is the same as the last time the function returned Static variables are never overlaid 3 24 Chapter 3 3 5 REGISTER VARIABLES In C the register type gualifier tells the compiler that the variable will be used very often So the code generator must try to reserve a register for this variable and use this register instead of the stack location of this automatic variable Whenever possible the compiler allocates automatic objects and parameter objects within registers c563 therefore ignores the register keyword For every object not placed in registers the next rules apply static reentrant DSP5600x only In this model automatic variables are allocated on fixed positions in X or Y memory which is directly addressable RAM The code using this memory has a very hig
220. he normal SYMB directives The COFF debug information is only generated when the g option is specified as well It is highly advisable to use the Ca option as well in order to generate Motorola assembler compatible output Motorola Compatibility B 5 When using the Ca option it is not possible to use packed strings The packed keyword will then be ignored as563 The S option instructs the assembler to generate an assembly file instead of an object file It is still possible to generate a list file as well amp Using the assembler for optimization can result in synchronization loss between the generated code and the debugging information Using the OG option will prevent this but has negative effects on the optimization performed Example This example compiles the file demo c with the TASKING compiler and uses the Motorola assembler and linker to generate the final COFF absolute file The g switch is given in order to get debug information cc563 S g demo c g563c demo asm g o demo cld mx memory or if you do not want to use the different control programs c563 g C1 demo c as563 S demo src asm56300 c Bdemo cln demo asm dsplnk g c Bdemo cld crt0563x cln demo cln Llib563cx clb The same examples now using Y memory cc563 S g My demo c g563c demo asm g o demo cld Or c563 C1 g My demo c as563 S demo src asm56300 c Bdemo cln demo asm dsplnk g c Bdemo cld crt0563y cln demo cln Llib56
221. hen you first start EDE the correct toolchain of the product you purchased is selected and displayed in the title of the EDE desktop window If you have more than one TASKING product installed and you want to change toolchains do the following 1 From the Project menu select Select Toolchain The Select Toolchain dialog appears Overview 2 23 Product Folder c target Toolchains TASKING lt toolchain gt lt version gt Scan Disk Jen a og IV Display Toolchain switched to message Delete 2 Select the toolchain you want You can do this by clicking on a toolchain in the Toolchains list box and click OK If no toolchains are present use the Browse or Scan Disk button to search for a toolchain directory Use the Browse button if you know the installation directory of another TASKING product Use the Scan Disk button to search for all TASKING products present on a specific drive Then return to step 2 How to Open an Existing Project Follow these steps to open an existing project 1 From the Project menu select Set Current 2 Select the project file to open For the calc demo program select the file calc pjt in the subdirectory c in the examples subdirectory of the DSP56xxx product tree If you have used the defaults the file calc pjt is in the directory c c563 examples c for the DSP563xx DSP566xx c56 for the DSP5600x How to Load Open Files The next two steps a
222. i output x i c i In this example the loop cannot be optimized to a REP loop because the variable output is written in each iteration You can use an automatic temporary variable to make it possible to optimize the hardware loop to a REP loop _fract output 0 0 _fract X x 10 _fract Y c 10 main int i _fract tmp output copy to temporary variable for i 0 i lt 10 i tmp x i c i use temporary variable output tmp get value from temporary variable To generate a hardware DO loop the compiler must recognize the variable used as loop counter in the C code Incrementing the loop counter as a separate statement is easier to recognize by the compiler than when it is used in some expression or as an index of an array Language Implementation 3 85 For example in the following code the compiler does not recognize the loop counter i _fract output 0 0 _fract _X x 10 _fract _Y c 10 main int i 0 _fract tmp output do tmp x 0 c it t i in expression while i lt 10 output tmp When rewriting the do while loop code to do tmp x 0 c i itt i as separate statement while i lt 10 the compiler recognizes i as the loop counter and generates a hardware loop In for statements containing multiple update statements the loop count variable must be the last updated variable to allow the compiler to create a hardwa
223. ication does not prescribe such behavior for unsigned values it reguires overflow masking By default the compiler avoids the overhead involved by code to prevent overflows but this flag forces it to insert this code Example short a_short long a_long void f void a_long 0x123456 a_short a_long Generated code with Ae default move l Fa_long b move b0 x Fa short Generated code with AE move l Fa long b move b0 b extract 10018 b b move b0 b move b0 x Fa short f Default A constant in the range 1 0 1 0 gt has type _fract A constant in the range 1 0 1 0 gt has type float k Default Allow keyword language extensions such as _fract X and near K Keyword extensions are not allowed 4 14 Chapter 4 Default 500 significant characters are allowed in an identifier instead of the minimum ANSI C translation limit of 31 significant characters Note more significant characters are truncated without any notice Conform to the minimum ANSI C translation limit of 31 significant characters This makes it possible to translate your code with any ANSI C conforming C compiler Note more significant characters are truncated without any notice Default Allow language extension keyword circ Disable language extension keyword circ This removes the handling of m registers from the scope of the compiler When the _circ keyword is not allowed the compiler does not need to save the modifier re
224. ides the __ asm two leading underscores intrinsic function This function is highly compatibly with the Motorola C compiler function although differences may exist in compiler structure dependent areas Note that other uses of the __asm keyword in the Motorola C compiler e g forcing variables in specific registers are not supported With the __asm keyword C expressions can be assigned to a register from a group e g an address register and result values can be written to local or global C variables The general syntax of the __ asm statement is asm volatile instruction template output param list input param list regsave where instruction_template is a string that may contain 96 mod cbar parm nr parameters from the in or output list mod char is an operand modifier character see table 3 5 parm nr is a parameter number in the range 0 31 output param ist ll constraint_char c_expression input param list constraint cbar c expression constraint cbar is an operand constraint character see table 3 4 regsave register name register name is one of the work register names see below Language Implementation 3 33 The constraint characters specify a group of registers for the paramcter The modifier characters select a specific part of the register selected for the parameter For output parameters the c expression must be something that can be assigned to an
225. ified by TASKING Wbat bappens if my system crasbes or I upgrade to a new system You will need to contact Technical Support for temporary license keys due to a system crash or to move from one system to another system You will then need to work with your local sales representative to obtain a permanent new license key Flexible License Manager FLEXIm 6 5 USING FLEXLM FOR FLOATING LICENSES Does FLEXIm work across tbe internet Yes A server on the internet will serve licenses to anyone else on the internet This can be limited with the INTERNET attribute on the FEATURE line which limits access to a range of internet addresses You can also use the INCLUDE and EXCLUDE options in the daemon option file to allow or deny access to clients running on a range of internet addresses Does FLEXIm work witb Internet firewalls Many firewalls require that port numbers be specified to the firewall FLEXIm v5 Imgrd supports this If my client dies does tbe server free tbe license Yes unless the client s whole system crashes Assuming communications is TCP the license is automatically freed immediately If communications are UDP then the license is freed after the UDP timeout which is set by each vendor but defaults to 45 minutes UDP communications is normally only set by the end user so TCP should be assumed If the whole system crashes then the license is not freed and you should use Imremove to free the license
226. iler and partially in the assembler This implies that the fully optimized result is only available after assembly The assembler will produce a list file that shows how it rearranged the compiler generated source The final result can also be reviewed using the disassembler option of the object reader pr563 pr56 for DSP5600x For example cc563 c file c compile into object file obj pr563 iv4 file obj disassemble the object file obj Or cc563 c 1 s file c compile and produce an assembler listing with source merging 3 90 Chapter 3 3 23 12 INTEGER AND FRACTIONAL TYPES Converting integer to fractional types follows the rules for integer to float conversion Due to the limited overlap between integer and fractional types there are only a few possibilities listed in the following table As these conversions are almost always inadvertent a warning message is issued for them amp In combined integer and fractional operations the fractional value is converted to integer as the integer type has the largest range From Value To Result signed char short int lt lt 1 _ fract long _ fract 1 0 long gt 1 0 0 unsigned char short gt 0 _fract long _ fract 0 0 int long _fract long _ fract 1 0 signed char short int long 1 l gt 10 0 _ fract long _ fract lt 1 0 unsigned char short int long max value all ones gt 1 0 0 Table 3
227. improve quality in general as well as making NIS DNS work On PCs if a checkout seems to take 3 minutes and then fails this is usually because the system is configured for a dial up DNS server which is not currently available The solution here is to turn off DNS Finally hostnames must NOT have periods in the name These are not legal hostnames although PCs will allow you to enter them and they will not work with DNS We re using FLEXIm over a wide area network Wbat can we do to improve performance FLEXIm network traffic should be minimized With the most common uses of FLEXIm traffic is negligible In particular checkout checkin and heartbeats use very little networking traffic There are two items however which can send considerably more data and should be avoided or used sparingly e Imstat a should be used sparingly Imstat a should not be used more than say once every 15 minutes and should be particularly avoided when there s a lot of features or concurrent users and therefore a lot of data to transmit say more than 20 concurrent users or features e Prior to FLEXIm v5 the port amp host mode of the LM LICENSE FILE environment variable should be avoided especially when the license file has many features or there are a lot of license files included in LM LICENSE FILE The license file information is sent via the network and can place a heavy load Failures due to portehost will generate the error LM SE
228. in Blanks or tabs which are skipped Normal characters not 96 which should be matched exactly in the input stream Conversion specifications starting with a character Conversion specifications should be build as follows in order A meaning that no assignment is done for this field A number specifying the maximum field width The conversion characters d i n o u and x may be precede by h if the argument is a pointer to short rather than int or by T letter ell if the argument is a pointer to 1ong The conversion characters e and g may be precede by T if a pointer double rather than float is in the argument list and by L if a pointer to a long double A conversion specifier maximum field width and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following 96 is not in the list the behavior is undefined 6 50 i Chapter 6 Length specifier and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following 96 is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Scanned as d int signed decimal int the integer may be given octal i e a leading O is entered or hexadecimal leading Ox or OX or just decimal int unsigned octal int unsigned decimal int unsigned
229. in a register but is calculated from the USP with an offset 7 6 4 STACK EXTENSION Stack extension is a mechanism that allows larger stack sizes than supported by the internal hardware mechanism When stack extension is enabled and the internal hardware stack has reached its maximum capacity the Least Recently Used LRU internal hardware stack location is copied to data memory to create a new stack entry on the internal stack The toolchain works from the assumption that stack extension is required and initializes EP and OMR in the startup code Locator label F 1c ub se is loaded into EP and afterwards stack extension is enabled from the OMR 7 18 Chapter 7 You can set the size of the stack extension as follows Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the Linker Locator entry and select Control File Type the size of the stack extension in the Stack extension size field Or with the locator command line option emSESIZE size The locator uses this macro to preprocess the following line in the description file which results in the locator label F 1c ub se reserved label se length SESIZE If you do not want to use stack extension you must add the macro NOESTACK to the assembler preprocessor options and make sure the startup code is added to your project In this case you need to be sure that there will not be more than 16 function calls or do loops the number of available internal hardwa
230. in low X fast accessible integer in low 64 addresses of X memory int X v Ptr inY to X allocate pointer in Y memory used to point to integers in X char _P string DSP56xxx string in program memory long _L Long in L allocate long variable in L memory internal int X Intern in X allocate integer variable in internal X memory The c56 and c563 compilers use the advantage of the fact that two objects allocated in X and Y memory can be accessed simultaneously in the same instruction Using the _near storage qualifier allows the compiler to generate faster access code for frequently used variables and functions The near range depends on the core for which the program is compiled Using the _L storage qualifier only makes sense for the types of a double word size which are unsigned long signed long float and long _fract The most significant word is allocated in X memory and the least significant word is allocated in Y memory at the same address X Y When _L is used the compiler can generate faster code for accessing these types The compiler does not apply _L to any other data type For the internal and external storage qualifier there is no difference in code generation The information is passed to the locator which knows which part of the memory is internal and which part is external from the description file By default internal memory is filled first then external memory With
231. in the declarator list may not contain initializations Also an extern declaration may have no initializer The following are examples of this error extern int i 0 error int f i int i 0 error 5 20 Chapter 5 W 130 operands of operator are pointers to different types Pointer operands of an operator or assignment must have the same type For example the following code generates this warning long pl int pi 0 pl pi warning 131 bad operand type s of operator The operator needs an operand of another type The following is an example of this error int pi pi 1 error pointer on left needs integral value on right 132 value of variable rame is undefined This warning occurs if a variable is used before it is defined For example the following code generates this warning int a b ab warning value of b unknown 133 illegal struct union member type A function cannot be a member of a struct or union Also bit fields may only have type int or unsigned 134 bitfield size out of range set to 1 The bit field width may not be greater than the number of bits in the type and may not be negative The following example generates this error struct i unsigned i 999 error 135 statement not reached The specified statement will never be executed This is for example the case when statements are present after a return 138 illegal function call You
232. ing a debugger it can be useful to set a breakpoint on this label indicating that the program has reached the end or that the library function exit has been called The following macros can be used to control the functionality of cstart inc Macro Description NODSTACK Do NOT initialize the dynamic stack pointer only in static model for the DSP5600x NOESTACK Do NOT initialize stack extension hardware DSP563xx only NOCACHE Do NOT enable cache DSP563xx only NOCOPY Do NOT produce code to clear BSS sections and initialize DATA sections NOARGV Do NOT produce code to provide a dummy argument vector to function main PLLVALUE val Set clock phase locked loop register to val If not defined the PLL is not initialized BCRVALUE val Set external memory waitstates to val If not defined zero wait states is selected for all memory not on DSP563xx LOW_DYNAMIC Select 16 bit arithmetic mode DSP563xx only NARROW_BUS Select 16 bit address bus mode DSP563xx only USP R6 Select register R6 for user stack pointer Table 7 1 Macros used in cstart inc 7 6 Chapter 7 The cstart inc file declares some labels external that will be resolved by the linker The label start will link the object from the file start asm that contains a jump to the label F_START and will generate the start vector in the interrupt vector table Likewise some labels named irgxx with xx in the ra
233. intrinsic functions can be used The defined set of intrinsic functions cover most of the specific DSP56xxx features which could otherwise not be accessed by the C language For more information on intrinsic functions see section 3 13 Intrinsic Functions asm noflusb Same as asm except that the peephole optimizer does not flush the code buffer and assumes register contents remain valid Compiler Use 4 87 endasm Switch back to the C language The section Inline Assembly in the chapter Language Implementation contains more information cacbe align now Aligns current address at a cache boundary This can be done only once per function The alignment may introduce an unusable memory alignment gap at the beginning of the section cacbe sector size Specify the size of the cache sectors for the used DSP563xx derivative This size is used for the alignments generated for the pragma cache align now and for the cache region qualifier The size is either 128 or 256 words The default cache size is 128 This pragma is equivalent to the command line option c and it is given in the form pragma cache sector size size cacbe region start Mark start position of a cache region The argument of the pragma must be a function pointer defined with the cache region qualifier cacbe region end Mark end position of a cache region The argument of the pragma must be a function pointer defined with the cache region qualifier The
234. ion csize Pragma cache sector size Arguments The cache sector size of the used DSP563xx derivative Only the values 128 and 256 are allowed Default c128 Description Specify the size of the cache sectors for the used DSP563xx derivative This size is used for the alignments generated for the pragma cache align now and for the cache region qualifier The default cache size is 128 Example To set the cache size to 256 enter c563 c256 test c qo Section 3 16 DSP563xx Cacbe Support Compiler Use 4 19 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Define a macro syntax macro def in the Define user macros field You can define more macros by separating them with commas Eg Dmacro def Arguments The macro you want to define and optionally its definition Description Define macro to the preprocessor as in define If def is not given is absent 1 is assumed Any number of symbols can be defined The definition can be tested by the preprocessor with if ifdef and ifndef for conditional compilations If the command line is getting longer than the limit of the operating system used the f option is needed Example The following command defines the symbol NORAM as 1 and defines the symbol PI as 3 1416 c563 DNORAM DPI 3 1416 test c qo 4 20 Chapter 4 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Exp
235. ion 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select CPU Selection 3 Inthe CPU family type box select the CPU or CPU family for which you want to build your application and click OK How to Build tbe Demo Application Now you can build your application Steps 1 and 2 are optional Follow these steps if you want to specify additional build options such as to stop the build process on errors and to keep temporary files that are generated during a build 1 From the Build menu select Options The Build Options dialog appears 2 26 OVERVIEW Chapter 2 Build Options Make your changes and press the OK button From the Build menu select Scan A11 Dependencies Click on the Execute Make command button The following button is the execute Make button which is located in the ribbon bar If there are any unsaved files EDE will ask you in a separate dialog if you want to save them before starting the build How to View tbe Results of a Build Once the files have been processed you can inspect the generated messages in the Output window You can see which commands and corresponding output captured which have been executed by the build process in the Build tab TASKING program builder vx yrz Build nnn SN 00000000 Compiling calc c Assembling calc src Linking to calc out Creating IEEE 695 absolute file calc abs Overview 2 27
236. ion to rotate left operand count times The carry bit is reset before rotation Returns the result Example volatile unsigned int uia uib rotate left using int variable uia _rol uia uib Code move x ss_mainr22 b uia move x ss main 21 a uib tst a uib jeq L3 rep al rol b _rol uia uib L3 move bl x ss_mainr22 uia ror unsigned int _ror unsigned int operand unsigned int count Use the ROR instruction to rotate right operand count times The carry bit is reset before rotation Returns the result Example volatile unsigned int uia uib rotate right using constant uia ror uib 2 uia ror uia 3 3 60 Code move ror LOE move move rep ror move _round _ i Te Cit round x ss_mainr21 b b b bl1 x ss main 22 x ss_mainr22 b 3 b b1 x ss_main 22 Chapter 3 ror uiub 2 uia _ror uia 3 ia c long Birace operand Round the fractional operand Generate RND instruction Returns Example volatile _fract fa the result fb volatile long _fract lfa void main fa fb lfb Code move rnd move move move rnd move move move rnd move void _round fa _round lfa _round lfa x ss_mainrl12 b b b x ss mainr12 x ss main 10 b x ss_mainr9 b0 b b x ss main 11 x SS_main 10 b x ss_mainr9 b0 b b x ss main 8 LEB fa
237. ions nor does it give a thorough explanation of the floating point routines themselves 7 8 2 1 THE BASIC FLOATING POINT OPERATIONS The basic operations of the floating point library are specified below and consist of arithmetic operations and conversion operations These operations are implemented to support the 2 Complement Format For each floating point operation function calls are specified in single precision It is also specified whether a floating point function needs one two or three floating point operands as input an integer operand as input a fractional operand as input and if it returns a floating integer or fractional value Run time Environment 7 27 Floating point operations are performed on so called floating point accumulators These accumulators are located in predefined registers and contain the floating point value s passed to the floating point operation Section 7 8 2 2 The Floating Point Accumulators describes the format of these accumulators The first floating point operand has to be loaded in accumulator fac and if necessary the second and third operand in accumulator ftm1 or ftm2 A floating point result always resides in the floating point accumulator fac An integer long or fractional operand is passed via accumulator register A The following tables list all supported functions and their function names amp The actual functions are prefixed by the letters Rfp to meet the compiler run time lib
238. ironment variable is not set lmdown looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX q Quiet mode If this switch is not specified Imdown asks for confirmation before asking the license daemons to shut down If this switch is specified Imdown will not ask for confirmation qo Imgrd lmstat lmreread Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 13 3 4 LMGRD Name Imgrd flexible license manager daemon Synopsis lmgrd c license_file 1 logfile 2 p t timeout s interval Description Imgrd is the main daemon program for the FLEXIm distributed license management system When invoked it looks for a license file containing all required information about vendors and features On UNIX systems it is strongly recommended that Imgrd be run as a non privileged user not root Options c license file 1 ogfile 2 p t timeout Use the specified icense_file If no c option is specified Imgrd looks for the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set Imgrd looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX Specifies the output log file to use Instead of using the 1 option you can use output redirection gt or gt gt to specify the name of the output log file Restricts usa
239. is compatible with the Motorola assembler Appendix B It is possible to use the source file from the compiler src in the Motorola assembler directly However in doing so optimizations will get lost In order to support the generation of Motorola compatible assembly code with COFF debug information the following command line options must be supplied to the TASKING tools Tool Option cc563 S c563 Cg as563 S cc563 The S option tells the 563xx control program to generate a Motorola compatible assembly file It does so by taking the following steps 1 call the compiler with the C1 option full Motorola compatibility mode 2 call the assembler with the S option generate an assembly file instead of an object file The control program stops after generating the assembly file The linker and locator will not be invoked The generated assembly file is generated by default by adding a asm extension to the input file You can specify the name of the generated assembly file with the o option of the control program If for any reason you do not want to use the full compatibility mode you have to specify the compiler and assembler options yourself For instance cc563 g Wc Cg Wa S c o file asm file c will only generate COFF debug information but will skip the other compatibility options c563 The Cg option tells the compiler to generate COFF style debug information instead of t
240. ith OU normal loop handling Compile with Ou loop is eliminated body is duplicated ey int i j void main void for i20 i lt 2 i short loop d gt Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 63 Ov OV Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Subscript strength reduction EE Ov OV Pragma optimize v optimize V on function level Default Ov Description With Ov you enable subscript strength reduction With this option specified the compiler tries to reduce expressions involving an index variable in strength With OV you disable subscript strength reduction Example Compile with OV 00 disable subscript strength reduction Compile with Ov 00 begin and end address of a are determined before the loop and temporarily put in registers instead of determining the address each time inside the loop Int i int a 4 void main void for i20 i lt 4 it qo Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 64 Chapter 4 Option Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Select an entry from the Code generation for switch statement box EE Ow OW Pragma optimize w optimize
241. itself becomes responsible for preserving R3 and the assembly will change to F inc move r7 move r3 xx r T move x Fi r3 move r3 move ES XIEX move xs rf7y r3 rts 7 4 SECTION USAGE c563 uses a number of sections For a section the compiler generates an ORG directive in the assembler output file The following list gives an overview of sections that may be generated by c563 Section Name Possible Attributes Comment p n i e text near internal external code fptext code from the floating point library l n fi e const near internal external constant initialized L data not copied from copy table p n i e const near internal external constant initialized P data not copied from copy table x n i e const near internal external constant initialized X data not copied from copy table y n i e const near internal external constant initialized Y data not copied from copy table lovl overlayed area in L memory for non reentrant static functions povl overlayed area in P memory for non reentrant static functions Run time Environment Section Name Possible Attributes Comment XOVI overlayed area in X memory for non reentrant static functions yovl overlayed area in Y memory for non reentrant static functions n i e data near internal external initialized L data copied
242. ixed model SMALL formatter _doprntm obj doprint mixed model MEDIUM formatter _doscans obj doscan mixed model SMALL formatter 1ib 5600x libcr _doprnts obj _doprint reentrant model SMALL formatter _doprntm obj doprint reentrant model MEDIUM formatter _doscans obj doscan reentrant model SMALL formatter lib 5600x libcs _doprnts obj doprint static model SMALL formatter _doprntm obj _doprint static model MEDIUM formatter _doscans obj doscan static model SMALL formatter Example PC cc563 M24 hello obj c c563 1ib 563xx libc24 _doprntm obj 6 7 RUN TIME LIBRARY Some basic operations take up a lot of memory if generated as inline code For example code to perform a 48 bit integer division The compiler can generate code with calls to library functions for these situations This depends on the optimization level optimize for size or speed These routines are stored in the run time library The run time library also contains some default versions of routines required by the C library e g exit Libraries 6 69 Because c563 generates assembly code and not object code it prepends an F for the names of public C variables to distinguish these symbols from internal symbols So if you use a function name starting with an underscore the assembly label for this function will start with F Run time library functions have no prepended F they have a prepended R The routine
243. ized variable in ROM only when you declare it with the const gualifier This enables the initialization of a const character array in ROM if not enough ROM is available the string may be located in RAM as well const char romhelp help allocation of 5 words in ROM only Or a pointer array in ROM only initialized with the addresses of strings also ROM only char const message hello alarm exit ANSI string concatenation is supported adjacent strings are concatenated only when they appear as primary expressions to a single new one The result may not be longer than the maximum string length ANSI limit 509 characters actual compiler limit 1500 characters The ANSI Standard states that identical string literals need not be distinct i e may share the same memory Because memory can be very scarce with DSP applications c563 overlays identical strings within the same module In section 3 1 4 the Standard states that behavior is undefined if a program attempts to modify a string literal Because it is a common extension to ANSI A 6 5 5 that string literals are modifiable there may be existing C source modifying strings at run time This can be done either with pointers or even worse st ing 2 r C563 accepts this statement when strings are in both ROM and RAM Language Implementation 3 27 3 9 POINTERS Some objects have two types a logical type and a storage type Fo
244. ject Directories Library Files Path to allow the tools to find the Motorola startup files 4 Select an EDE option for instance Project Project Options otorola Debugger and press OK to force the tools to rebuild the makefile Motorola Compatibility B 9 5 Press the Rebuild button to build the project 6 Press the Debug button to start the Motorola debugger The debugger will automatically load the executable 7 To run an example that writes to stdout like hello world enter the following commands on the debugger command line streams enable redirect stdout file txt go 8 The output of the program can now be found in ile txt in the current working library This method works for the hello sieve and whet examples For the dhry_1 and dhry 2 examples a linker control file must be added to the project to create a heap for the malloc function The following contents can be used for this file but it may require changes for different memory sizes on actual hardware reserve x 2000 S3fff symbol F_lc_bh x 2000 symbol F lc eh x 3000 Add the linker control file to the linker options with the R tlename command Running the examples in the bench directory may take a very long time on the simulator Other examples cannot be run because they contain assembly files that are not Motorola compliant B 10 Appendix B ALrilallVdiWO9 V 10HOLON INDEX ail TASKING X30NI
245. ject files followed by a link and locate phase which produces an absolute output file There are however options to suppress the assembler linker or locator stage The control program produces unique filenames for intermediate steps in the compilation process which are removed afterwards If the compiler and assembler are called subsequently the control program prevents preprocessing of the compiler generated assembly file Normally assembly input files are preprocessed first The following options are interpreted by the control programs Option Description or none Display invocation syntax Mm Mixed memory model only allowed for cc56 Mr Reentrant memory model only allowed for cc56 Ms Static memory model only allowed for cc56 M24 24 bit memory model only allowed for cc563 M1624 16 24 bit memory model only allowed for cc563 M16 16 bit memory model only allowed for cc563 M6 DSP566xx memory model only allowed for cc563 S Generate Motorola compatible assembly file with COFF debug stops at asm Tname target hardware V Display version header only Waarg Pass argument directly to the assembler Wcarg Pass argument directly to the C compiler Woparg Pass argument directly to the C compiler Wlcarg Pass argument directly to the locator Wlkarg Pass argument directly to the linker Wplarg Pass argument directly to the C pre linker C Force c files to C mode c Do not link
246. k a get k into accu a move x Fi x0 get i into x0 move x Fj y0 get j into y0 macr x0 y0 a mac move a x Fk store k 3 23 13 INTERRUPT ROUTINES Avoid using function calls in interrupt routines as this will force the compiler to stack all registers All registers are free to use in a function so there is no way that the compiler can limit this Instead an inline function or a macro can be used for repeated code if necessary This will cause your code to become larger but it will also avoid call return overhead in the interrupt function 3 94 Chapter 3 LANGUAGE COMPILER USE ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Compiler Use 4 3 4 1 CONTROL PROGRAM The control program cc563 facilitates the invocation of the various components of the DSP563xx DSP566xx family toolchain from a single command line cc56 is the control program for the DSP5600x The control program accepts source files and options on the command line in random order The invocation syntax of the control program is cc563 option control file Options are preceded by a minus sign The input file can have one of the extensions explained below AN When you use a UNIX shell Bourne shell C shell arguments containing special characters such as and must be enclosed with or escaped The option in the C shell becomes or The control program recognizes the following argument ty
247. k on memory cell wide objects integers in most models Files opened in binary mode will read write full DSP words whereas files opened in text mode will read write the low 8 bits only Returns the descriptor of the file opened or NULL if an error Occurred _insize finclude lt conio h gt eine __ rLioweyde ale sel pg Low level function for investigating the size of stdin Returns gueue size for stdin _ioread int _ioread FIL Gl eto Low level input function This function reads a character from a file _ioread is used by all input functions scanf getc gets etc The delivered library is targeted at TASKING or Motorola FSS File System Simulation The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function must be customized to perform I O on different file systems See the file ioread c in the 1ib src directory for the example implementations of this low level input function Returns the character read or EOF if an error occurred 6 16 Chapter 6 i _towrite Bi ME shes cues gu JUDGE cese p Low level output function This function writes a character to a file _iowrite is used by all output functions printf putc puts etc The delivered library is targeted at TASKING or Motorola FSS File System Simulation The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function must be customized to perform I O
248. l C library functions are described in this chapter These functions are only called by explicit function calls in your application program 6 6 1 C LIBRARY IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS A detailed description of the delivered C library is shown in the following list Explanation Y Fully implemented I Implemented using file system simulation L Delivered as a skeleton File Imple Routine name Description Reason mented assert h Y assert macro Macro definition conio h Y insize kbhit Libraries File Imple Routine name Description Reason mented ctype h Y Most of the routines are delivered as macro AND as function as prescribed by ANSI Y isalnum Y isalpha Y iscntrl Y isdigit Y isgraph Y islower Y isprint Y ispunct Y isspace Y isupper Y isxdigit Y tolower Y toupper Y _tolower Not defined by ANSI Y _toupper Not defined by ANSI Y isascii Not defined by ANSI Y toascii Not defined by ANSI errno h Y Only Macros fcntl h Y Definitions of flags used by open open float h Y limits h Y Only Macros locale h Y L localeconv No OS present L setlocale No OS present 6 9 6 10 Chapter 6 File Imple mented Routine name Description Reason math h acos asin atan atan2 ceil cos cosh exp fabs floor fmod frexp Idexp log log10 modf pow sin sinh sqrt tan tanh setjmp h longjmp setjmp si
249. layed Installation stopped on user request Software Installation 1 9 Answering y yes to this question causes installation to continue And the final message will be Installation of SWxxxxxx XXXX XXXX completed For the DSP563xx DSP566xx the directory c563 will be created For the DSP5600x this directory will be c56 5 If you purchased a protected TASKING product license the software product as explained in section 1 5 Licensing TASKING Products 1 4 4 SETTING THE ENVIRONMENT After you have installed the software you can set some environment variables to make invocation of the tools easier A list of all environment variables used by the toolchain is present in the section Environment Variables in the chapter Overview Make sure that your path is set to include all of the executables you have just installed The environment variable TMPDIR can be used to specify a directory where programs can place temporary files 1 10 i 1 Chapter 1 5 LICENSING TASKING PRODUCTS TASKING products are protected with license management software FLEXIm To use a TASKING product you must install the licensing information provided by TASKING for the type of license purchased You can run TASKING products with a node locked license or with a floating license When you order a TASKING product determine which type of license you need UNIX products only have a floating license Node locked license PC onl
250. le memory x are equivalent with pragma cache sector size 256 pragma jumptable memory x qo Section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 83 4 3_ INCLUDE FILES You may specify include files in two ways enclosed in lt gt or enclosed in When an include directive is seen c563 used the following algorithm trying to open the include file 1 If the filename is enclosed in and it is not an absolute pathname does not begin with a V for PC or a for UNIX the include file is searched for in the directory of the file containing the Zinclude line For example in PC c563 source test c UNIX c563 source test c c563 first searches in the directory source source for UNIX for include files If you compile a source file in the directory where the file is located c563 test c the compiler searches for include files in the current directory amp This first step is not done for include files enclosed in lt gt 2 Use the directories specified with the I options in a left to right order For example Q Select the Project Directories menu item Add one or more directory paths to the Include Files Path field PC c563 I include demo c UNIX c563 I include demo c 3 Check if the environment variable C563INC exists for the DSP563xx use C56INC for the DSP5600x If it does exist use the contents as a directory specifier for include files You can specify
251. lename argument 194 cannot initialize typedef You cannot assign a value to a typedef variable So typedef i 2 is not allowed 195 constant expression out of range truncated The resulting constant expression is too large to fit in the specified data type The value is truncated The following example generates this warning int i 17000000L warning value is too large to fit in an int Compiler Diagnostics 5 29 W 196 constant expression out of range due to signed unsigned type mismatch The resulting constant expression is too large to fit in the specified data type The following example generates this warning int i 40000U the unsigned value is too large to fit in a signed int unsigned int i 40000U is OK W 197 unrecognized w argument argument The w option only accepts a warning number or the text stricU as an argument See the description of the w option for details W 198 trigraph sequence replaced Trigraphs are used in the C language to create special characters on obsolete terminals with a limited character set When they are replaced in your source e g in a string they may give rise to very obscure errors F 199 demonstration package limits exceeded The demonstration package has certain limits which are not present in the full version Contact TASKING for a full version W 200 unknown pragma name ignored The compiler ignores pragmas that are not known For example p
252. line is found Returns s or NULL on EOF or error floor include lt math h gt Coubille Selo ors celexuleylle x7 Returns the largest integer not greater than x as a double Libraries 6 29 Jfmod include lt math h gt double mod double x double y Returns the floating point remainder of x y with the same sign as x If y is zero the result is implementation defined Jopen finclude lt stdio h gt FILE fopen const char filename eon elmeue mecs j Opens a file for a given mode Returns a stream If the file cannot not be opened NULL is returned You can specify the following values for mode r read open text file for reading w write create text file for writing if the file already exists its contents is discarded a append open existing text file or create new text file for writing at end of file LRR r open text file for update reading and writing wr create text file for update previous contents if any is discarded ar append open or create text file for update writes at end of file The update mode with a allows reading and writing of the same file In this mode the function fflush must be called between a read and a write or vice versa By including the letter b after the initial letter you can indicate that the file is a binary file By including a 8 the file will also be opened in binary mode but the read write uses only the lower 8 bits as in
253. lity mode DSP563xx only Set up in 16 bit compilation model This bit can be changed locally in assembly code but must be restored to its startup value during execution of compiled code Double precision multiply mode Never used in compiled code This bit can be changed locally in assembly code but must remain zero during execution of compiled code DO loop flag Never used in compiled code Not very useful do not touch in compiled code DO forever flag Never used in compiled code Not very useful do not touch in compiled code Sixteen bit arithmetic mode Used in 16 bit compiled code This bit can be changed locally in assembly code but must be restored to its startup value during execution of compiled code This bit is cleared during interrupts and restored afterwards in the 16 bit models the compiler will force it on again in interrupt routines Reserved Cache Enable Switched on in startup code normally Can be changed in the application but the cache intrinsic functions cannot be called when the cache is switched off Care must be taken to avoid using the cache area for code when switching the cache mode at run time 7 14 i SR bit 20 SR bit 21 SR bit 22 23 Chapter 7 Arithmetic saturation mode Never used in compiled code This bit can be changed locally in assembly code but must remain zero during execution of compiled code The overflow behavior of integers is affected by this bit so c
254. lvalue Registers that are used in the assembly instructions must be reserved either in the parameter lists or in the reserved register list regsave above The compiler takes account of these lists but does not interpret the instruction template and no unnecessary register saves and restores are placed around the inline assembly instructions Except for the instruction template all parts within the braces are optional The TASKING C compiler accepts but ignores the volatile keyword after the __ asm keyword Also the superfluous equals signs in the output parameter list are accepted but ignored Available input output operand constraints Char Type Operand Remark A address register rO r7 The compiler excludes the user stack pointer and reserved address registers N offset register nO n7 The compiler excludes the user stack pointer offset and reserved offset registers C address r0 mO r7 m7 For circular pointers modulo register D accumulator a b The complete 56 bit accumulator registers R input register x0 y0 x y Selection depends on operand size r GP register a b x0 yO x1 y1 All general purpose r0 r7 nO n7 int sized registers except user stack pointer and offset S Source register x0 x1 yO y1 x y Selection depends on operand size i immediate value value 3 34 Chapter 3 Char Type Operand Remark m memory x Fvar x r7
255. m 4 3 Index 10 isalnum 6 35 isalpha 6 35 isascii 6 35 iscntrl 6 35 isdigit 6 35 isgraph 6 36 islower 6 36 isprint 6 36 ispunct 6 36 isspace 6 36 isupper 6 37 isxdigit 6 37 iterate at leat once 4 88 J jump chain 3 81 4 64 jump chaining 2 7 4 43 jump table 3 81 4 60 4 64 jumptable memory 4 89 K keyword callee save 7 9 compatible 7 8 inline 5 29 _nosal 3 18 L labs 6 37 language extensions 4 12 1c56 2 15 1c563 2 15 ldexp 6 37 Idiv 6 37 leaf function handling 2 9 Index libraries C 6 8 floating point 6 5 6 69 overview 6 5 rebuilding 6 4 run time 6 68 library functions B 6 license floating 1 10 node locked 1 10 obiaining 1 10 license file default location A 6 location 1 16 licensing 1 10 lifetime information B 6 limits compiler 4 93 limits h 6 7 linker 2 15 linking COFF B 7 1k56 2 15 1k563 2 15 LM LICENSE FILE 1 16 A 6 Imcksum A 10 Imdiag A 11 Imdown A 12 Imgrd A 13 Imhostid A 15 Imremove A 16 Imreread A 17 Imstat A 18 Imswitchr A 20 Imver A 21 locale h 6 7 localeconv 6 38 setlocale 6 52 localeconv 6 38 localtime 6 38 locator 2 15 log 6 38 log10 6 38 logical expression optimization 2 7 Index Index 11 long fract 3 15 3 16 longjmp 6 38 loop hardware 3 83 loop optimization 2 8 loop rotation 2 7 4 51 loop unrolling 2 9 4 62 loop variable detection 4 40 MAC instruction 2
256. m daemons all generate log files containing messages in the following format mm dd bb mm DAEMON name message Where mm dd bb mm Is the month day hour minute that the message was logged DAEMON name Either license daemon or the string from the DAEMON line that describes your daemon In the case where a single copy of the daemon cannot handle all of the requested licenses an optional _ followed by a number indicates that this message comes from a forked daemon message The text of the message The log files can be used to e Inform you when it may be necessary to update your application software licensing arrangement e Diagnose configuration problems e Diagnose daemon software errors The messages are grouped below into the above three categories with each message followed by a brief description of its meaning A 26 Appendix A 4 1 INFORMATIONAL MESSAGES Connected to node This daemon is connected to its peer on node zode CONNECTED master is name The license daemons log this message when a quorum is up and everyone has selected a master DEMO mode supports only one SERVER bost An attempt was made to configure a demo version of the software for more than one server host DENIED N feature to user mm dd yy bb mm user was denied access to N licenses of feature This message may indicate a need to purchase more licenses EXITING DUE TO SIGNAL nnn EXITING with code nnn All daemons li
257. made to DAEMON but this vendor daemon is not DAEMON Illegal server connection request A connection request came in from another server without a DAEMON name KILL of child failed errno nnn A daemon could not kill its child A 32 Appendix A No internet port number specified A vendor daemon was started without an internet port Not enough descriptors to re create pipes The top level daemon detected one of its sub daemon s death In trying to restart the chain of sub daemons it was unable to get the file descriptors to set up the pipes to communicate This is a fatal error and the daemons must be re started read error mes sage An error in a read system call was detected recycle_control BUT WE DIDN T HAVE CONTROL The hierarchy of vendor daemons has become confused over who holds the control token This is an internal error return_reserved can t find feature listhead When a daemon is returning a reservation to the free reservation list it could not find the 1isthead of features select message An error in a select system call was detected Server exiting The server is exiting This is normally due to an error SHELLO for wrong DAEMON This vendor daemon was sent a server hello message that was destined for a different DAEMON Unsolicited msg from parent Normally the top level vendor daemon sends no unsolicited messages If one arrives this message is logged This is
258. ministration Tools VV eee A 8 3 1 In CKSUIll 5 sea eter re ep RET HR AERE A 10 3 2 Imdiag Windows only sss A 11 33 IMGOWN SCREEN hahaha CR deed ba ee A 12 3 4 Itf cs cae ee pep MUR RA RA RATA A 13 35 Ira ostid eg GR a a a e ceo a Ren LU A 15 3 6 InremoVe so aee s ete due reta wea dete E Ro eR A 16 37 lineis oT A 17 3 8 aa CAE xs eas ae ade ERREUR RERO E US dt A 18 3 9 Imswitchr Windows only V FF Y AU A 20 3 10 lnc rae WW EE A 21 2 11 License Administration Tools for Windows A 22 3 11 1 LMTOOLS for Windows sese A 22 3 11 2 FLEXlm License Manager for Windows A 23 4 The Daemon Log File 6 00 ee A 25 4 1 Informational Messages VV YF AA A 26 4 2 Configuration Problem Messages sss A 29 43 Daemon Software Error Messages sess A 31 5 FLEXIm License Errors 2 0 00 00 000 eese A 33 6 Frequently Asked Questions FAQs A 37 6 1 License File Questions eese A 37 6 2 FLEXIm Version sek CH eedem CO emn A 37 6 3 Windows Questions YY FF EAS A 38 6 4 TASKING Questions YF eee A 39 6 5 Using FLEXIm for Floating Licenses A 41 Table of Contents MOTOROLA COMPATABILITY B 1 1 IntrOGQUCtOB ge aa og Ve Ra Sedan a ebbe B 3 2 Creating a Motorola COFF Object File B 3 3 Using Library Functions 00 00 00 cece Y A B 6 4 Linking Motorola CLAS COFF
259. more than one directory in the environment variable C563INC by using a separator character Instead of using I as in the example above you can specify the same directory using C563INC 4 84 Chapter 4 PC Command Prompt window set C563INC include c563 demo c UNIX if using the Bourne shell sh C563INC include export C563INC c563 demo c or if using the C shell csh setenv C563INC include c563 demo c When an include file is not found with the rules mentioned above the compiler tries the subdirectory include in the directory that contains the subdirectory with the c563 binary For example PC c563 exe is installed in the directory C NC563NBIN The directory searched for the include file is C C563 INCLUDI Fl UNIX c563 is installed in the directory usr local c563 bin The directory searched for the include file is usr local c563 include The compiler determines run time which directory the binary is executed from to find this include directory The DSP5600x installation directory is c56 A directory name specified with the I option or in C563INC C563INC for the DSP5600x may or may not be terminated with a directory separator because c563 or c56 respectively inserts this separator if omitted When you specify more than one directory to the environment variable C563INC you have to use one of the following separator characters PC space Compiler Use 4 8
260. mset q 4 5 space q points to nop enel DE etl Yy Generate NOP instructions Returns nothing Example nop Code opt noopnop nop opt opnop _pdiv Erect _jocliv tract opi traci om2 p Calculate the division of op7 op2 for positive fractional operands Generate DIV instruction Returns the result xy kj y mf Sy 3 55 3 56 Chapter 3 i Example volatile fract fa fb fa pdiv fa fb Code move x ss main 12 b fa move x ss mainrll x0 fb andi FE ccr rep 24 div x0 b _pdiv fa fb move b x ss_main l12 fa _pflush VOLE Tode weucl pg Use the PFLUSH instruction to flush the instruction cache Returns nothing Example _pflush Code pflush This function only generates code for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support _pflusbun void _pflushun void Use the PFLUSHUN instruction to flush unlocked instruction cache sectors Returns nothing Example _pflushun Code pflushun Language Implementation 3 57 This function only generates code for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support _pfree void _pfree void Use the PFREE instruction to unlock all the locked cache sectors in the instruction cache Returns nothing Example _pfree Code
261. n x of x in the range 1 2 1 2 x 1 1 assert finclude assert h void assert int expr When compiled with NDEBUG this is an empty macro When compiled without NDEBUG defined it checks if expr is true If it is true then a line like Assertion failed expression file filename lin num is printed Returns nothing atan finclude lt math h gt double atan double x Returns the arctangent tan x of x in the range n 2 1 2 atan2 include lt math h gt double atan2 double y double x Returns the result of tan y x in the range m n where y x are coordinates x and y cannot be both zero Libraries 6 23 atexit include lt stdlib h gt ime acele edl remi voei Ie Registers the function fcn to be called when the program terminates normally Returns zero if program terminates normally non zero if the registration cannot be made atof finclude lt stdlib h gt Coulmier arte ems eC o Converts the given string to a double value White space is skipped conversion is terminated at the first unrecognized character Returns the double value atoi include lt stdlib h gt iae acoil Consi Clete ws Converts the given string to an integer value White space is skipped conversion is terminated at the first unrecognized character Returns the integer value atol include lt stdlib h gt long atoli const claire 99 p Converts the given stri
262. n It is impossible to describe here all possible code generation combinations with all the floating point operations because the number of possible floating point expression is almost infinite So if you want to write your own floating point expression in assembly it is profitable to write it first in C and then use the code generated by the C compiler in your own assembly function The following example will illustrate a floating point expression using two floating point values returning a floating point value c a t b move move move move jsr move move x Fa b bass floating point a in fac x Fatl a x Fb x0 pass floating point b in ftml x Fb 1 x1 Rfpaddf2 perform add a x Fcrl store result from fac in c b x Fc Integer and long operands and integer and long results are passed via accumulator register A The following example illustrates a conversion from long to float float a long b ab move x Fbtl a pass long b in A move x Fb a0 jsr Rfpcif22 convert from long to float move a x Farl store result from fac in a move b x Fa 7 32 Chapter 7 For more comprehensive floating point expressions it is not needed to store the floating result of a previous floating point operation and load it again for the next floating point operation The result of the previous floating point operations remains in the accumulator fac and will be used in the next floating point operation This is called intermedi
263. n the same way as the DEFMEM symbol The stack may be in a different memory if default memory is X or Y In this case it is placed in L memory by default which can be changed with the option ML For c563 the value of MODEL is 16 bit model 16 16 bit arithmetic addresses 16 24 bit model 1624 16 bit arithmetic 24 bit addresses 2 bit model 24 24 bit arithmetic addresses DSP566xx model 16 16 bit arithmetic addresses For c56 the value of MODEL is static model mixed model reentrant model The value of DEFMEM and STKMEM can be x y lor p Example if MODEL s static model endif 3 14 Chapter 3 3 2 3 THE AT ATTRIBUTE In DSP56xxx C it is possible to place certain variables at absolute addresses Instead of writing a piece of assembly code a variable can be placed on an absolute address using the _at attribute Example _external unsigned char Display _at 0x2000 The example above creates a variable with the name Display at address 0x2000 in external memory In the generated assembly code an absolute section will appear On this position space is reserved for the variable Display A number of restrictions are in effect when placing variables on an absolute address e Only global variables can be placed on absolute addresses Parameters of functions or automatics within functions cannot be placed on an absolute address e When declared extern the variable is not alloca
264. n practice the majority of the C code of a complete application is standard C without using any language extension You can compile this part of the application without any modification using the memory model which fits best to the requirements of the system code density amount of external RAM etc Only a small part of the application may in fact require language extensions These parts often have some of the following properties They access I O using the special function registers need high execution speed need high code density access non default memory are used to service interrupts 3 2 44 STORAGE SPECIFIERS Static storage specifiers can be used to allocate static objects in a particular memory area of the addressing space of the processor All objects taking static storage may be declared with an explicit storage specifier By default static variables will be allocated in X memory c56 and c563 recognize the following storage type specifiers Storage Description Specifier X X memory specifier default Y Y memory specifier _L L memory specifier P program memory _near lowest 64 addresses of data memory For functions short addressable memory _ internal internal memory _ external external memory Table 3 1 Storage type specifiers 3 6 Chapter 3 Example mixed DSP56xxx lines int X Var in X allocate integer variable in X memory int near X Var
265. nal memory The following registers are used for this 5600x BCR 563xx SR OMR BCR AARO AAR1 AAR2 AAR3 DCR 566xx SR OMR BCR A download of a program that uses external memory can only take place after the external memory interface has been initialized correctly CrossView Pro uses the values of symbols with coded names R xxxxVALUE e g R AAROVALUE for the above registers to do this The startup code assembly file defines and exports these symbols the code in the cstart inc file sets them during program start so the code can also run without CrossView Pro e g from an EPROM Run time Environment 7 5 The startup code also takes care of initialized C variables residing in the different RAM areas Each memory type has a unique name for both the ROM and the RAM section The startup code copies the initial values of initialized C variables from ROM to RAM using these special sections and some run time library functions When initialization of C variables is not needed you can translate the startup file with DNOCOPY See also the table keyword in the locator description language DELFEE When everything described above has been executed your C application is called using the global label Fmain which has been generated by c563 for the C function main When the C application returns which is not likely to happen in an embedded environment the program ends with a DEBUG instruction using the assembly label F exit When us
266. nction call directly in the variable argument space of the called function Doing so the caller passes the arguments implicitly to the callee Thus functions requiring stacked pointers may not be called via function pointers in the static memory model since the run time contents of the function pointer is unknown Consequently it is unknown which static memory area must be used 3 12 Chapter 3 Individual functions may be declared reentrant when compiling for the mixed model int _reentrant multiply int first int second return first second Reentrant functions use the stack for passing parameters and automatic variable allocation If the function does not use any static data does not call any direct or extended function then the function is both recursive and reentrant When using the reentrant memory model all functions are in fact implicitly reentrant So function pointers are only allowed to point to functions compiled using the reentrant model Parameters are passed to these functions via the stack In the reentrant memory model a function pointer may point to any function in the application Variable Argument Lists When compiling functions using a static model DSP5600x only the compiler allocates a fixed amount of static memory space for all necessary arguments and local variables When a function has a variable argument list the required amount of space is defined by the calling function The actual
267. ndex Index 13 nopachk strings 3 78 4 90 nosource 4 90 on command line 4 82 optimize 4 90 pack strings 3 78 4 90 source 4 90 pragma optimize flow level 4 35 function level 4 35 pragmas 4 86 predefined symbols 4 77 C56 4 77 CACHE SECTOR SIZE 4 78 _DEFMEM 3 13 4 78 _DSP 3 13 4 78 MODEL 3 13 4 77 _STKMEM 3 13 4 78 _USP 78 printf 6 43 printf formatter 6 67 project files adding files 2 28 putc 6 45 putchar 6 46 puts 6 46 Q qsort 6 46 raise 6 47 RAM 3 5 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 27 rand 6 47 realloc 6 47 rebuilding libraries 6 4 recursion 3 23 reentrant 3 10 3 11 3 23 3 24 reentrant functions 3 12 reg56xxx h 6 7 register ep 7 14 file 3 21 la 7 14 Ic 7 14 memory mapped 5 21 operating mode omr 7 12 reserve 4 74 SC 7 14 Sp 7 14 ssh 7 14 ssl 7 14 Status sr 7 12 sz 7 14 register allocation 4 69 register allocation graph 4 46 register contents tracking 2 9 4 66 register usage 7 6 calling convention 7 7 register variables 3 24 remove 6 48 remove useless jumps 2 7 rename 6 48 REP loop 2 10 return address 7 15 return values 5 4 rewind 6 48 ROM 3 27 run time library 6 68 S sample session 2 21 saturation 3 18 scaling dynamic 3 89 scanf 6 49 scanf formatter 6 67 scanner 2 5 section 3 8 name 7 10 overlayable 7 15 Index 14 usage 7 10 section name 4 73 semaphores 3 61 clear 3 61 set
268. ne of x sinb include lt math h gt double sinh double x Returns the hyperbolic sine of x 6 54 Chapter 6 i sprintf finclude lt stdio h gt Lime gorim Chae ms CONS eloweus Arora soa JB Performs a formatted write to a string See also printf and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines sqrt finclude lt math h gt double sqre double x5 Returns the square root of x Vx where x 2 0 srand finclude lt stdlib h gt void srand unsigned int seed This function uses seed as the start of a new seguence of pseudo random numbers to be returned by subseguent calls to srand When srand is called with the same seed value the seguence of pseudo random numbers generated by rand will be repeated Returns pseudo random numbers d gt See also rand sscanf include lt stdio h gt Me cenad ehari mp cons Clie Uem ooo JR Performs a formatted read from a string qo See also scanf and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines Libraries 6 55 strcat include lt string h gt ehari strcat ure Nicitaman Sy mG OM Sic ehar che XP Concatenates string ct to string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s strchr finclude lt string h gt Glare naen GOMSIE Chair CS ime np Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of character c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned strcmp include lt string h gt ioe Sic seme conse C T
269. ng down and restarting it The license administrator may want to protect the execution of Imreread See the p option in Section 3 4 lmgrd for details about securing access to Imreread Imreread uses the license file from the command line or the default file if none specified only to find the license daemon to send it the command to reread the license file The license daemon will always reread the file that it loaded from the original path If you need to change the path to the license file read by the license daemon then you must shut down the daemon and restart it with that new license file path You cannot use Imreread if the SERVER node names or port numbers have been changed in the license file In this case you must shut down the daemon and restart it in order for those changes to take effect Imreread does not change any option information specified in an options file If the new license file specifies a different options file that information is ignored If you need to reread the options file you must shut down Imdown the daemon and restart it Options c license_file Use the specified icense_file If no c option is specified Imreread looks for the environment variable LM_LICENSE_FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set lmreread looks for the file 1icense dat in the default location d gt Imdown A 18 Appendix A 3 8 LMSTAT Name
270. ng s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character if the string is smaller than n characters Returns S Libraries 6 59 strpbrk include lt string h gt Chaar Sitwell Come clus CS const ehari tot h Returns a pointer to the first occurrence in cs of any character out of string ct If none are found NULL is returned strrchr include lt string h gt Chae Sicicwelne Acon cte Claw CS au p Returns a pointer to the last occurrence of c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned strspn finclude lt string h gt size MESS TTE const Clee Cs CkomweE lens eu E Returns the length of the prefix in string cs consisting of characters in the string ct strstr finclude lt string h gt Glogue ied ene chu Es CkomueE clue ce E Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of string ct in the string cs Returns NULL if not found 6 60 Chapter 6 i strtod include lt stdlib h gt ede ste BIS M C NS S charik k endri Converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by s to a double value Initial white spaces are skipped When endp is not a NULL pointer after this function is called endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion Returns the read value strtok include lt string h gt chori ec eic Ole clou m kom che e E Search the string s for tokens delimited by characters from string ct It terminates the
271. ng to a long value White space is skipped conversion is terminated at the first unrecognized character Returns the long value 6 24 Chapter 6 bsearch finclude lt stdlib h gt _reentrant void bsearch const void key GIO ISIN O ME ley nh C MEME NE SEIRZ CREME lA MIT NN ESTIS concoct i vonid emet wenec 9 B This function searches in an array of n members for the object pointed to by ptr The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The given array must be sorted in ascending order according to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Returns a pointer to the matching member in the array or NULL when not found calloc finclude lt stdlib h gt odl ceu lleycd atv i mob size_t size E The allocated space is filled with zeros The maximum space that can be allocated can be changed by customizing the heap size see the section Heap By default no heap is allocated When calloc is used while no heap is defined the locator gives an error Returns a pointer to space in external memory for nob items of size bytes length NULL if there is not enough space left d gt See also free ceil include lt math h gt double ceil double x Returns the smallest integer not less than x as a double Libraries clearerr finclude lt stdio h gt void clearerr FILE stream Clears the end of file and error indicators for stream
272. nge 1 to 63 are declared external or can be declared external and will create default interrupt vectors in the interrupt vector table These default vectors will always jump to abort because they indicate that either a system error has occurred e g hardware stack overflow or that an unexpected interrupt has occurred By default most interrupt vectors are left uninstalled in order to have as much internal program memory available as possible If an interrupt is created in the C program this will overrule the default vector by defining the label irgxx if you create interrupt handlers in assembly you can suppress the default vector in the same way The symbols nu11 x and null y are declared external in order to link a one word absolute section at X 0 and another one at Y 0 This is done to allow safe checking of NULL pointers by occupying these addresses we know for sure that if a pointer returns NULL it indicates an error condition The _at modifier can still be used to force variables at address 0 7 2 REGISTER USAGE The compiler will use all available registers that fit for storing variables and intermediates Registers used are A B X0 YO X1 Y1 RO R7 NO N7 The modifier registers M0 M7 are only used in conjunction with the associated RO R7 register to act as a circular pointer When not in use as a circular pointer they must remain in the reset state 1 linear addressing Of course registers PC SR and CCR are used implici
273. nnot be reserved See the r option for a list of available register names 558 Error in reserving registers not enough address registers left All address registers have been used 559 Intrinsic function call needs a reserved register You have to provide a reserved register name as an argument of an intrinsic function 560 Invalid operand in intrinsic function call See section ntrinsic Functions for the syntax of the intrinsic function 562 Cache sector size must be 128 or 256 For the c option only the values 128 and 256 are allowed 563 circ pointer has modulo size 0 A pointer is used to retrieve a circular pointer but the modulo part is undefined and therefore set to 0 This can occur when type casts are used incorrectly 564 invalid intrinsic function for this DSP type An intrinsic function for DSP is coded that is not available on the current DSP because of instruction set limitations Compiler Diagnostics 5 37 W 565 intrinsic function is not supported on all silicon revisions An intrinsic function is encountered that is not implemented on all DSPs of the current type W 566 packed strings not supported when generating Motorola assembler compatible output Zpragma ignored Packed strings are not supported when you use the Ca option Motorola compatible assembly Remove the pragma or generate TASKING compatible assembly E 567 mem is illegal memory for jumptable An illegal memory type was specified
274. nse server Windows T Start the license manager tool by Start Programs TASKING FLEXlm FLEXlm License Manager 2 In the Setup tab enable the Start Server at Power Up check box 3 Close the program by clicking on the OK button If a question appears answer Yes to save your settings UNIX A In performing any of the procedures below keep in mind the following e Before you edit any system file make a backup copy SunOS4 T 2 Log in as the operating system administrator usually root Append the following lines to the file etc rc 1ocal Replace FLEXLMDIR by the FLEXIm installation directory default usr local flexlm FLEXLMDIR bin lmgrd 2 p c FLEXLMDIR licenses license dat gt gt var tmp license log 2 5 amp 1 amp 1 16 i Chapter 1 SunOS5 Solaris 2 1 25 Log in as the operating system administrator usually root In the directory etc init d create a file named rc 1mgrd with the following contents Replace FLEXLMDIR by the FLEXIm installation directory default usr local flexlm bin sh FLEXLMDIR bin lmgrd 2 p c FLEXLMDIR licenses license dat gt gt var tmp license log 2 5 amp 1 amp Make it exacutable chmod urx rc lmgrd Create an S link in the etc rc3 d directory to this file and create K links in the other etc rc d directories ln etc init d rc lmgrd etc rc3 d Snumrc lmgrd ln etc init d rc lmgrd etc rc d Knumrc lmgrd num mus
275. nt of extra memory is allocated when a buffer size is increased Returns NULL and p is not changed if there is not enough space for the new allocation Otherwise a pointer to the newly allocated space for the object is returned 6 48 Chapter 6 d gt See also freeQ remove include lt stdio h gt int remove const char filename Removes the named file so that a subsequent attempt to open it fails Returns zero if file is successfully removed or a non zero value if the attempt fails rename include lt stdio h gt int rename const char oldname const char newname Changes the name of the file Returns zero if file is successfully renamed or a non zero value if the attempt fails rewind include lt stdio h gt void rewind FILE stream Sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream to the beginning of the file This function is equivalent to void fseek stream OL SEEK_SET clearerr stream Returns nothing Libraries 6 49 scanf include lt stdio h gt ime SCAMIE COMSIE cli OMEN oo p Performs a formatted read from the standard input stream d gt See also read and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines Returns the number of items converted successfully All arguments to this function should be pointers to variables in default memory of the type which is specified in the format string The format string may conta
276. ntable but not a space islower finclude lt ctype h gt Loe slower ime amp JF Returns a non zero value when c is a lowercase character a z isprint include lt ctype h gt ime aged ime p Returns a non zero value when c is printable including spaces ispunct include lt ctype h gt Amie glen ime g Returns a non zero value when c is a punctuation character such as T etc isspace include lt ctype h gt int isspace int c Returns a non zero value when c is a space type character space tab vertical tab formfeed linefeed carriage return Libraries 6 37 isupper finclude lt ctype h gt int isupper int c Returns a non zero value when c is an uppercase character A Z isxdigit finclude ctype h ime glewyd sine g Returns a non zero value when c is a hexadecimal digit 0 9 A F a f labs include lt stdlib h gt lorg label long m y Returns the absolute value of the signed long argument ldexp finclude lt math h gt double ldexp double x int n gn See also frexpQ Returns the result of x 25 ldiv include lt stdlib h gt Me hh de Llong mumy Long cenci z Both arguments are long integers The returned quotient and remainder are also long integers Returns a structure containing the quotient and remainder of num divided by denom 6 38 Chapter 6 localeconv include lt locale h gt SELUCE Con 7 oe alk
277. nted to by s It then determines the code for value of type wchar t that corresponds to that multi byte character If the multi byte character is valid and pwc is not a null pointer the mbtowc function stores the code in the object pointed to by pwc At most n characters will be examined starting at the character pointed to by s Returns the number of bytes or 0 if s points to the null character or if the bytes do not form a valid multi byte character memcbr finclude lt string h gt waeuuel uwewwelue COME eol CS sae Cl size t n p Checks the first n bytes of cs on the occurrence of character c Returns NULL when not found otherwise a pointer to the found character is returned Libraries 6 41 memcmp finclude lt string h gt int memcmp const void cs Const VOLE Ub euge IE m JP Compares the first n bytes of cs with the contents of ct Returns a value lt 0 if cs lt ct Oifcs ct or a value gt 0 if cs gt ct memcpy include lt string h gt void memcpy void s const WOLE Ub euge E m p Copies n characters from ct to s No care is taken if the two objects overlap Returns S memmove include lt string h gt void memmove void s CONSE WOLE Cie euge m p Copies n characters from ct to s Overlapping objects will be handled correctly Returns s memset finclude lt string h gt void memset void s int c size t ia J Fills the first n bytes of s with cha
278. nts of the DSP56xxx toolchain cc563 recognizes several filename extensions C source files cc cxx or cpp are passed to the C compiler C source files c are passed to the compiler Assembly sources asm or src are passed to the assembler Relocatable object files obj and libraries a are recognized as linker input files Files with extension out and dsc are treated as locator input files The control program supports options to stop at any stage in the compilation process and has options to produce and retain intermediate files You can debug the software written in C with the TASKING CrossView Pro high level language debugger A list of supported platforms and emulators is available from TASKING In this manual c563 as563 1k563 1c563 cc563 mk563 ar563 and pr563 are used to indicate the executables of both DSP56xxx toolchains unless explicitly stated otherwise Overview 2 5 2 2 GENERAL IMPLEMENTATION This section describes the different phases of the compiler and the target independent optimizations 2 2 1 COMPILER PHASES During the compilation of a C program a number of phases can be identified These phases are divided into two groups referred to as frontend and backend frontend The preprocessor phase File inclusion and macro substitution are done by the preprocessor before parsing of the C program starts The syntax of the macro preprocessor is independent of the C syntax bu
279. o generate code for the DSP566xx which is always 16 bit arithmetic with 16 bit addresses All DSP563xx models are reentrant 3 2 2 2 DSP566XX MEMORY MODEL The DSP566xx is supported with a special compiler model for c563 This model creates 16 bit code for the 16 bit address space of the DSP566xx and takes into account the specific properties of the DSP566xx The DSP566xx model is reentrant 3 2 2 3 STATIC MODEL FOR DSP5600X In the static model C function parameters and automatics are passed via a static overlayable area in memory The linker uses a function call graph of the entire application for this purpose Data areas of functions which do not call each other can be overlayed since these functions will never be active simultaneously However this cannot be accomplished for functions called through pointers The static model approach for the DSP5600x version implies that function parameters and local variables are allocated statically instead of using a stack The reason for this is that there is no efficient way of addressing objects on a stack When it is assumed that register R7 is used as the stack pointer three instructions would be needed to access an arbitrary object on the stack move offset n7 NOP move x r7 n7 a 3 10 Chapter 3 Absolute addressing only reguires a single instruction move x Fvar a When the NOP instruction cannot be replaced by something useful the first sequence requires 3 or 4 ins
280. o pages A function cannot call functions in the same range but within a different page number For function calls to functions in the same range and page or in main memory address 0x000 Ox7FFF no extra instructions for switching pages are generated When the called function is in a different range switch instructions will be generated When a function switches pages it saves the value of the DDM Page Configuration Register DPCR at the start of the calling function and restores it at the function end When you define a function with the bank keyword the compiler generates an special section name The section name begins with ptext followed by a letter indicating the range where A is range 0 B is range 1 etc and followed by a number indicating the page For the S record format the banks are coded in the section information For the other formats the locator places the sections at the appropriate addresses For page 0 this is as indicated in the table above Ranges within page 1 will be located at the address plus 0x10000 The CrossView Pro debugger loader will interpret these addresses and switch to the correct bank when memory in those ranges is accessed The user can use the same addresses to look at the program memory Furthermore the PC register the user sees will also reflect the current state of the DPCR register for and if it points to the paged memory Restrictions e A function can not call functions in the same ran
281. o values too For example 5 3 equals 1 666 so converted to integers we can get 5 432 2 5 3 1 gt 5 3 3 5 3 5 OR 5 43 1 5 3 2 gt 5 3 3 5 3 5 3 28 Chapter 3 The ANSI C standard section 3 3 5 allows both sets of outcomes it only reguires that the calculation sums up correctly as shown after the arrow In the TASKING C compiler we have chosen to implement the first form as this gives the most compact code we can do divisions with shifts and modulo operations with bitwise and if the second operand is a power of two Language Implementation 3 29 3 11 INLINE C FUNCTIONS The inline keyword is used to signal the compiler to inline the function body instead of calling the function An inline function must be defined in the same source file before it is called When an inline function has to be called in several source files each file must include the definition of the inline function Usually this is done by defining the inline function in a header file Not using a function which is defined as an inline function does not produce any code Example t c int w x y Z inline int add int a int b return a b void main void add 1 2 z add x y No specific debug information is generated for inline functions The debugger cannot step into an inline function it considers the inline function as one HL
282. obal label must not be removed since it is referred to by the C compiler It is also used as the default start address of the application see the start keyword in the locator description language DELFEE The code space for all non used interrupt vectors may be occupied by small user code sections When this is not desirable you should include default versions of the interrupt vectors by including the startup code in your project file list and removing the comments in the cstart inc file The default interrupt vectors will jump to the abort function when they are inadvertently called The stack is defined in the locator description file dsc in directory etc with the keyword stack which results in a section called stack Except in the static model of the DSP5600x a user stack is always required See the section Stack for detailed information on the stack The stack pointer can be switched between r6 and r7 To initialize the correct address register with the base of the stack the linker retrieves a module from the library that defines the symbol R_STKINIT that contains the opcode for the register move This avoids the need for two versions of every startup definition file The heap is defined in the description file with the keyword heap which results in as section called heap See the section Heap for detailed information on heap management An important task of the startup code is to configure the interface of the DSP to exter
283. odel for any function that does not need to be reentrant i e not recursive and not called from an interrupt routine s and the main program simultaneously If you place the stack in L memory code becomes faster but data memory use may slightly increase If you select default memory to be P the code will become very inefficient and slow use this selection only as a last resort qo See also section 3 2 2 Memory Models 3 23 7 MEMORY MAPPED I O FROM C Use the unions in the supplied header file for memory mapped I O optimal bit field operations are generated this way A C header file is supplied for each DSP56xxx family derivative in the include subdirectory of the installed product The registers defined in the header file are created by a union of a structure field B and an integer field 1 The structure defines all bit fields in the register The integer can be used to access the register as one word When copying the full register contents it is recommended to use this one word 1 field instead of copying the whole structure Copying one field yields more efficient code than copying it as a structure 3 88 Chapter 3 Example finclude lt reg56002 h gt include register header file void main void sr_type a a SSISR copy whole structure a I SSISR I preferred copy I field The best place to add your own I O devices in the DSP56xxx memory map is in the high addresses of Y m
284. of a different type Compiler Use 4 93 4 6 COMPILER LIMITS The ANSI C standard 1 2 2 4 defines a number of translation limits which a C compiler must support to conform to the standard The standard states that a compiler implementation should be able to translate and execute a program that contains at least one instance of every one of the limits listed below c563 s actual limits are given within parentheses Most of the actual compiler limits are determined by the amount of free memory in the host system In this case a D Dynamic is given between parentheses Some limits are determined by the size of the internal compiler parser stack These limits are marked with a P Although the size of this stack is 200 the actual limit can be lower and depends on the structure of the translated program e 15 nesting levels of compound statements iteration control structures and selection control structures P gt 15 e 8 nesting levels of conditional inclusion 50 e 12 pointer array and function declarators in any combinations modifying an arithmetic a structure a union or an incomplete type in a declaration 15 e 31 nesting levels of parenthesized declarators within a full declarator P gt 31 e 32 nesting levels of parenthesized expressions within a full expression P gt 32 e 31 significant characters in an external identifier full ANSI C mode 500 significant characters in an external identifier non
285. ompiled code may behave strangely when this bit is set Long division might not work anymore either As register register and register memory moves of long _fracts result in saturation anyway it is not very useful in compiled code This bit is not changed during interrupt routines if it is set anywhere in the code it must be turned off in all C compiled interrupt routines using inline assembly Rounding mode Never used in compiled code This bit can be changed in compiled code to get the effect described in the processor manual This bit is cleared during interrupts and restored afterwards Core priority Never used in compiled code These bits can be changed in compiled code to get the effect described in the processor manual amp The execution of compiled interrupt routines must be avoided as well where the summary mentions that bits must remain unchanged in compiled code So the interrupts may have to be switched off locally as well 7 5 3_ OTHER REGISTERS LA LC SP SSL SSH do not change their value to avoid disrupting the program flow the hardware stack is used to store return addresses and hardware loop information If reguired return addresses are popped from the hardware stack to avoid overflows DSP5600x The hardware stack can be used as long as it is not exhausted and stack balance is preserved In most cases using the user stack is a faster and easier method Run time Environment 7 15 EP
286. ompiler Use 4 33 m c563 only Option Q Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Select a chip mask ess mynask Arguments A number indicating the silicon mask for a DSP563xx DSP566xx processor Number Mask 0 OF92R and 1F92R 1 3F 8S Description Specify the silicon mask to compile for Example c563 ml example c 4 34 Chapter 4 n Option n Description Do not create output files instead the output is sent to stdout Example c563 n test c Compiler Use 4 35 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select an optimization level in the Optimization box If you select Custom optimization in the Optimization box you can enable or disable individual optimizations in the Custom optimization list Es Oflags Pragma optimize flags Arguments One or more optimization flags Default O1 Description Control optimization If you do not use this option the default optimization of c563 is O1 which is an optimization level to let c563 generate the smallest code Flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the lower case letter and switched off with the uppercase letter These options are described together All optimization flags can also be given in the source file after a pragma optimize However depending on the optimiz
287. on flow level Default OT Description With Ot you force the compiler to generate jump tables for switch statements With OT it depends on the Ow OW option which switch method is used With OT and OW the compiler generates a jump chain for switch statements With OT and Ow the compiler chooses the best switch method possible jump chain or jump table So with OT a jump table can still be generated Overview Ot Ow jump table OT Ow smart Ot OW jump table OT OW jump chain Example Compile with OT OW O0 generate jump chain Compile with Ot OW 00 generate jump table int Ly Compiler Use void main void switch i case 1 i 0 case 2 i l case 3 i 2 default i 3 d gt Section Switch Statement Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 61 4 62 Chapter 4 Ou OU Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Loop unrolling EE Ou OU Pragma optimize u optimize U on function level Default OU Description With Ou you enable loop unrolling With this option specified the compiler tries to eliminate short loops by duplicating a loop body 2 4 or 8 times This reduces the number of branches and creates a longer linear code part With OU you disable loop unrolling Example Compile w
288. on options file Keywords Function RESERVE Ensure that TASKING software will always be available to one or more users or on one or more host computer systems INCLUDE Specify a list of users who are allowed exclusive access to the TASKING software EXCLUDE Specify a list of users who are not allowed to use the TASKING software GROUP Specify a group of users for use in the other commands TIMEOUT Allow licenses that are idle for a specified time to be returned to the free pool for use by someone else NOLOG Causes messages of the specified type to be filtered out of the daemon s log output Table A 1 Daemon options file keywords In order to use the daemon options capability you must create a daemon options file and list its pathname as the fourth field on the DAEMON line for the Tasking daemon in the license file For example if the daemon options were in file usr local flexlm Tasking opt UNIX then you would modify the license file DAEMON line as follows DAEMON Tasking usr local Tasking usr local flexlm Tasking opt A 8 Appendix A A daemon options file consists of lines in the following format RESERVE number feature USER HOST DISPLAY GROUP name INCLUDE feature USER HOST DISPLAY GROUP name EXCLUDE feature USER HOST DISPLAY GROUP name GROUP name list of users TIMEOUT feature timeout in seconds NOLOG IN OUT DENIED OUEUED REPORTLOG fil
289. ons are represented in allocation units Per function the compiler builds a graph of allocation units which indicates which units are needed and when This allows the register allocator to get the most efficient occupation of the available registers The compiler uses the allocation graph to generate the assembly code Overview 2 9 Peepbole optimizations The generated assembly code is improved by replacing instruction sequences by equivalent but faster and or shorter sequences or by deleting unnecessary instructions Leaf function bandling Leaf functions function not calling other functions are handled specially with respect to stack frame building Loop unrolling Try to duplicate a loop body 2 4 or 8 times to reduce the number of branches and to create a longer linear code part This optimization is only performed when hardware loops are not possible Dead store elimination Expressions from which the result is never used are eliminated Hardware loop generation Where possible replace loops in the program by the zero overhead hardware loop supported by the DSP Register contents tracking Improving generated assembly code by replacing operands e g replace an immediate value with a register that contains that value already 2 2 4 SPECIFIC OPTIMIZATIONS Besides the common optimizations some special optimizations are performed These optimizations are specific for each DSP56xxx family The compiler supports
290. ons from all vendors as this daemon neither performs encryption nor dispenses licenses The license daemon processes no user requests on its own but forwards these requests to other daemons the vendor daemons A computer system that is running both the license and vendor daemon software The server node will contain all the dynamic information regarding the usage of all the features An end user specific file that contains descriptions of the server nodes that can run the license daemons the various vendor daemons and the restrictions for all the licensed features The TASKING software is granted permission to run by FLEXIm daemons the daemons are started when the TASKING toolchain is installed and run continuously thereafter Information needed by the FLEXIm daemons to perform access management is contained in a license data file that is created during the toolchain installation process As part of their normal operation the daemons log their actions in a daemon log file which can be used to monitor usage of the TASKING toolchain The following sections discuss e Installation of the FLEXIm daemons to provide for access to the TASKING toolchain e Customizing your use of the toolchain through the use of a daemon options file e Utilities that are provided to assist you in performing license administration functions e The daemon log file and its contents For additional information regarding the use of FLEXIm refer to th
291. ons of the linker specify to link the appropriate C library floating point library and run time library As you can see the tools use temporary files for intermediate results If you want to keep the intermediate files you can use the tmp option The following command makes this clear cc563 g M calc c o calc abs v0 tmp This command produces the following output c563 o calc src g M24x calc c as563 o calc obj gs M24x calc src 1k563 ocalc out ddef targ dsc uR def targ calc obj lc24 1fp24 lrt24 lc563 ocalc abs ddef targ dsc fl M calc out As you can see if you use the tmp option the assembly source files and linker output file will be created in your current directory also Of course you will get the same result if you invoke the tools separately using the same calling scheme as the control program Overview 2 31 As you can see the control program automatically calls each tool with the correct options and controls 2 5 3 USING THE MAKEFILE The subdirectories in the examples directory each contain a makefile which can be processed by mk563 Also each subdirectory contains a readme txt file with a description of how to build the example To build the calc demo example follow the steps below This procedure is outlined as a guide for you to build your own executables for debugging 1 Make the subdirectory c of the examples directory the current working directory This directory cont
292. operation Examples using storage specifiers Some examples of using storage specifiers int X pr pointer to int in X memory int Y g pointer to int in Y memory g p the compiler issues a warning If a library function declares extern int _X foo extern int in X memory and a data object is declared as int _Y foo int in Y memory the linker will flag this as an error The usage of the variables is always without a storage specifier int _Y example define an int in Y memory example 2 assign example The generated assembly would be move 2 X0 move X0 Y example 3 8 Chapter 3 All allocations with the same storage specifiers are collected in units called sections The section with the _near attribute will be located from address 0 An error will be generated if this section exceeds 64 words Next the sections with the internal attribute will be located The size of the internal memory is known by the locator it reads the DELFEE description file If the total size of _near and _internal memory exceeds the internal memory size an error will be generated It is always possible to control the location of sections manually 3 2 2 MEMORY MODELS c563 supports the 2 bit and 16 bit modes of the DSP563xx by three models the 24 bit model the 16 24 bit model and the 16 bit model Furthermore it can generate code for DSP566xx targets 16 bit By default the c563 compiles for the 24
293. or UNIX If you did install SW000098 then the licenses directory on UNIX will be empty and on Windows the file 1icense dat will be empty In that case you can copy the license dat file from the product to the 1icenses directory after filling in the data from your License Information Form A Be very careful not to overwrite an existing license dat file because it contains valuable data Example license dat SERVER HOSTNAME HOSTID PORT DAEMON Tasking usr local flexlm bin Tasking FEATURE SW008002 32 Tasking 3 000 EXPDATE NUSERS PASSWORD SERIAL A 6 Appendix A After modifications from a license data sheet example SERVER elliot 5100520c 7594 DAEMON Tasking usr local flexlm bin Tasking FEATURE SW008002 32 Tasking 3 000 1 jan 00 4 0B1810310210A6894 123456 If the 1icense dat file already exists then you should make sure that it contains the DAEMON and FEATURE lines from your license data sheet An appropriate SERVER line should already be present in that case You should only add a new SERVER line if no SERVER line is present The third field of the DAEMON line is the pathname to the Tasking daemon and you may change it if necessary The default location for the license file on Windows is c flexim license dat On UNIX this is usr local flexlm licenses license dat If the pathname of the resulting license file differs from this default location then you must set the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE to the correct p
294. or an assembly routine or to specify a vector Using NOP instructions to place code at specific positions must be avoided as the assembler will remove these when in optimizing mode This is a common method in the vector table in combination with short jumps but it can easily be avoided with multiple ORG statements 3 12 4 LINKING WITH SEPARATE ASSEMBLY ROUTINES For a fixed register based interface betwcen C and assembly functions the function qualifier asmfunc is available This function qualifier can be used for a prototype of an assembly function to be called from C or for a function definition of a C function to be called from assembly Example prototype of assembly function extern asmfunc int Special out int port long config int value void main void long cfg int y if special_out 1 cfg y call assembly function With the _asmfunc function qualifier the parameter interface is identical to the standard calling convention see section 7 3 Calling Conventions but the stack is not used for passing arguments to functions When there are more arguments to be passed than fit in the registers the compiler will issue an error message All registers can be used in the assembly function On return the M registers must be reset to 1 except MO if the function returns a circular pointer 3 42 Chapter 3 3 13 INTRINSIC FUNCTIONS When you want to use some specific DSP56xxx instr
295. or size 4 87 calling convention 7 7 Motorola compatible 7 8 calloc 6 24 ceil 6 24 char type 3 83 circular buffer 3 70 CLAS format 2 18 clearerr 6 25 clock 6 25 code generator 2 6 3 24 code size 3 86 COFF libraries B 6 COFF object file generation of B 3 linking B 7 command file 4 24 command line processing 4 24 comments C style 4 14 common subexpression elimination 2 8 compatibility options 4 16 compiler invocation 4 6 compiler hardware environment 7 12 compiler limits 4 93 compiler options 4 11 A 4 12 C 4 16 c 4 18 D 4 19 E 4 20 e 4 22 Ec 4 20 Ei 4 20 El 4 20 Em 4 20 Ep 4 20 err 4 23 Ex 4 20 f 4 24 g 4 26 gc 4 20 gf 4 26 gl 4 26 gn 4 26 H 4 28 I 4 29 L 4 30 M 4 31 m 4 33 n 4 34 O 4 35 4 37 o 4 71 Oa OA 4 39 Oc OC 4 40 Oe OE 4 42 Of OF 4 43 Og OG 4 46 Ob OH 4 47 Oi OI 4 48 Oj OJ 4 50 Ol OL 4 51 On ON 4 53 Oo OO 4 55 58 Op OP 4 56 Or OR 4 57 Ot OT 4 60 Ou OU 4 62 Ov OV 4 63 Ow OW 4 64 Ox OX 4 66 Oy OY 4 67 Oz OZ 4 69 p 4 72 R 4 73 Index 6 y 4 74 s 4 75 t 4 76 U 4 77 u 4 79 V 4 80 w 4 81 wstrict 4 81 z 4 82 detailed description 4 10 overview 4 6 overview in functional order 4 8 priority 4 6 compiler phases 2 5 backend 2
296. otorola compiler uses So any calls to a TASKING library function from a program compiled by the Motorola compiler will fail It is possible to recompile the libraries with the Ccr option to create libraries that use the Motorola calling convention The TASKING libraries are compiled for using X memory by default The Motorola compiler generates programs that use Y memory by default Either recompile all the TASKING libraries for Y memory My or specify mx memory to the Motorola tools 5 RUNNING EXAMPLES FROM EDE The TASKING DSP56xxx toolchain now provides a special EDE file to generate code in Motorola COFF format with debug information The following installation steps are necessary to allow this to work 1 Install the Motorola executables at least the assembler and linker and optionally the debugger in a single directory Add the path to this directory to the PATH environment variable as prescribed by the Motorola installation instructions adding itto Project Directories Executable Files Path will not work 2 Inthe Project Select Toolchain dialog select the correct toolchain that is shown as with Motorola tools The Project Project Options dialog will now show options for the Motorola tools instead of the TASKING linker and locator To revert to the TASKING tools later select the correct toolchain without the additional with Motorola tools 3 Add the path to the Motorola library directory to Pro
297. otype the declaration of each parameter must include an identifier Also an identifier declared as a typedef name cannot be a parameter name The following are examples of this error 5 18 Chapter 5 int f int g int return g error typedef int int_type int h int type return 0 error E 114 incomplete struct union type The struct or union type must be known before you can use it The following is an example of this error extern struct unknown sa sb sa sb unknown does not have a defined type The left side of an assignment the lvalue must be modifiable E 115 label mame undefined A goto statement was found but the specified label did not exist in the same function or module The following is an example of this error f1 a W 116 f2 goto a error label a is not defined in f2 W 116 label zame not referenced The given label was defined but never referenced The reference of the label must be within the same function or module The following is an example of this warning EO fas a is not referenced E 117 name undefined The specified identifier was not defined A variable s type must be specified in a declaration before it can be used This error can also be the result of a previous error The following is an example of this error unknown i error unknown undefined p de as a result i is also undefined W
298. performed The registers that are modified by each function are described in the following tables 7 29 7 30 Function Modified register s addf2 A B X RO NO subf2 A B X Y RO NO mulf2 A B X0 RO NO DSP563xx A B X0 RO other divf2 A B X RO NO DSP563xx A B X RO other macpf2 A B X Y RO NO DSP563xx A B X Y RO other macnf2 A B X Y RO NO DSP563xx A B X Y RO other cmpf2 none negf2 A B RO NO DSP563xx A B RO other Table 7 16 Floating point aritbmetic operations register usage Function Modified register s cif12 A B RO NO DSP563xx A B RO other cif22 A B RO NO DSP563xx A B RO other cuf12 A B X RO NO DSP563xx A B X RO other cuf22 A B X RO NO DSP563xx A B X RO other crf12 A B RO NO DSP563xx A B RO other crf22 A B RO NO DSP563xx A B RO other cfi21 A B Y1 DSP563xx A B Y RO NO other cfi22 A B Y1 DSP563xx A B Y RO NO other cfu21 A B Y RO NO cfu22 A B Y1 Chapter 7 Run time Environment 7 31 Function Modified register s cfr21 A B Y RO NO cfr22 A B Y RO NO Table 7 17 Floating point conversion operations register usage 7 8 3 FLOATING POINT CODE GENERATION This section describes using some examples the basics of floating point code generatio
299. pes e Arguments starting with a character are options Some options are interpreted by the control program itself the remaining options are passed to those programs in the toolchain that accept the option e Arguments with a cc cxx or cpp suffix are interpreted as C source programs and are passed to the C compiler Arguments with a c suffix are interpreted as C source programs and are passed to the compiler e Arguments with a asm suffix are interpreted as hand written assembly source files which have to be passed to the assembler e Arguments with a src suffix are interpreted as compiled assembly source files They are directly passed to the assembler e Arguments with a a suffix are interpreted as library files and are passed to the linker e Arguments with a ob suffix are interpreted as object files and are passed to the linker e Arguments with a _ cln suffix are interpreted as COFF object files and are passed to the linker e Arguments with a clb suffix are interpreted as COFF library files and are passed to the linker 4 4 Chapter 4 e Arguments with a out suffix are interpreted as linked object files and are passed to the locator The locator accepts only one out file in the invocation An argument with a dsc suffix is interpreted as a locator description file and is passed to the linker and the locator Normally a control program tries to compile and assemble all source files to ob
300. pfree This function only generates code for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support _plock wel Telegk sume JP aielele jp This function uses the PLOCK instruction to lock one sector in the instruction cache The argument of this function is the sector address to be locked Returns nothing 3 58 Chapter 3 i Example void foo void void _cache_region creg void _plock _cache_get_start creg loop fits in one sector pragma cache_align_now pragma cache_region_start creg for sas pragma cache_region_end creg punlock _cache_get_start creg Code move Fcreg r6 nop plock r6 align cache move Fcreg r6 nop punlock r6 This function only generates code for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support _punlock WOLel exuere aie I elelele p This function uses the PUNLOCK instruction to unlock one sector in cache The argument of this function is the sector address to be unlocked Returns nothing Example d gt See example with _plock function This function only generates code for the DSP563xx For more information about instruction cache support see section 3 16 DSP563xx Cache Support Language Implementation 3 59 _rol unsigned int _rol unsigned int operand unsigned int count Use the ROL instruct
301. plementation 3 69 Example of fast interrupt Suppose you want an interrupt function for a peripheral and the vector number is 17 include lt reg56302 h gt int ep void _fast_interrupt 17 host_transmit void HTX c This will result in assembly org p irgl7 22 R_VBAVALUE irgl7 Fhost_transmit movep x Fc x lt lt SFFFFC7 align 2 3 70 Chapter 3 3 15 CIRCULAR BUFFERS The DSP56xxx family supports circular buffers for which no representation in C exists A circular buffer is a linear array that can be accessed using modulo address arithmetic i e a pointer that wraps around automatically thus creating a virtual circular buffer To allow you to use circular buffers in C c563 supports the data type circ as an extended data type Example int circ Circ Buf 5 int circ Ptr to Circ Buf Ciro Buf Here Circ Buf is declared as a circular buffer The compiler will emit alignment directives to ensure circular buffers will start at addresses that are a multiple of the smallest power of two that is equal to or larger than the buffer size The buffer size is kept by the compiler and will be used to control pointer arithmetic of pointers that are assigned to the buffer later In the above example the circular pointer Ptr to circ Buf will be stored in an R type register and the proper modulo value will be stored in its corresponding M type register Operations on the circular poin
302. pression may not contain a comma Also the bit field width an expression that defines an enum array bound constants and switch case expressions must all be integral contstant expressions 80 7 operator shall be followed by macro parameter The 7 operator must be followed by a macro argument 81 operator shall not occur at beginning or end of a macro The token concatenation operator is used to paste together adjacent preprocessor tokens so it cannot be used at the beginning or end of a macro body 86 escape character truncated to 8 bit value The value of a hexadicimal escape sequence a backslash followed by a x and a number must fit in 8 bits storage The number of bits per character may not be greater than 8 The following is an example of this warning char c xabc error 87 concatenated string too long The resulting string was longer than the limit of 1500 characters 88 name redeclared with different linkage The specified identifier was already declared This warning is issued when you try to redeclare an object with a different basic storage class and both objects are not declared extern or static The following is an example of this warning int 1 int i error E 64 and warning 89 illegal bitfield declarator A bit field may only be declared as an integer not as a pointer or a function for example So struct int a 1 s is not allowed 90 error message Th
303. processing State int PEN 1 18 PLL Enable ud unsigned COD 2 19 Clock Output Disable int CSRC 15 21 Chip Clcok Source Ld int CKOS 1 22 CKOUT Clock Source int rsvd 1 23 Reserved B int I pctl type define PCTL pctl type OxFFFD PLL Control Register void main void PCTL B PEN 1 PCTL I 0x0010 Generated code bset 18 x lt lt SFFFD movep gt S000010 x lt lt SFFFD To simplify programming for the various different DSP56xxx derivatives special files are supplied containing the declarations of all memory mapped register names for a specific derivative For example reg56002 h for the DSP56002 derivative 3 22 Chapter 3 You can also add your own memory mapped register definitions within the C source All bits without a special meaning to the chip can be given a unigue name with a unigue purpose Language Implementation 3 23 3 4 AUTOMATIC VARIABLES The implementation of automatic variables in the static and mixed models of the DSP5600x has some limitations In non reentrant functions recursion is not possible In these functions automatic variables are not allocated on a stack but in a static area In a reentrant function automatic variables are treated the conventional way coming and going with a function on the stack In static functions automatics are still overlayable with automatics of other functions Allocation of automatics is subject to t
304. promoted to int You can always use explicit casting to obtain the type required Keep in mind that the arithmetic conversions apply to multiplications also static int H i ji static long ky dum In C the following rules apply int int result int long long result long and NOT int int result long 2y void f h i j int int int k 1 mi long long long quos int int int afterwards promoted sign or zero extended to long EJ 1 long i j long long long 1 long i j int int int afterwards casted to long Ye Language Implementation 3 21 3 3 5 MEMORY MAPPED REGISTERS Each derivative of the DSP56xxx core can have its own features like timers ADCs and I O ports etc These features are implemented using memory mapped hardware registers Most of these registers consist of bitfields A register and its bitfields can be accessed with a structure defined at the fixed address of the register with all fields defined The compiler will generate efficient code for accessing structures at absolute addresses and bitfields in these structures This makes special keywords for defining registers which is used in other compilers superfluous Example typedef union PLL Control Register struct unsigned MF 12 O Multiplication Factor unsigned DF 4 12 Division Factor x int XTLD 1 16 XTAL Disable oy int PSTP lr 17 STOP
305. ps below This procedure is outlined as a guide for you to build your own executables for debugging How to Start EDE You can launch EDE by double clicking on the EDE shortcut on your desktop al This will launch the EDE The EDE screen provides you with a menu bar a toolbar command buttons and one or more windows for example for source files a status bar and numerous dialog boxes 2 22 Chapter 2 Compile Build Rebuild Debug On line Manuals Si TASKING EDE Toolchain C target examples demo demo pit Ele Edi Search Project Build Test Document Customize Tools Window Help e s58 amp amp uo2 id e Project x C Marget examples demo psp amp C target examples demo DEMO C include lt string h gt aj demo 1 Project finclude lt stdio h gt Et domo 5 Fies define BELL_CHAR 3007 typedef enum color e Document Windows Project Window Contains several tabs for viewing information about projects and other files red yellow blue Used to view and edit files type f struct rec_s Output Window Contains several tabs to display and manipulate results of EDE operations For example to view the results of builds or compiles amp JE Jm Je Jo s Fie Find A Search Browse Dillerence A Shell A Symbols OE fins Linell cott How to Select a Toolcbain EDE supports all the TASKING toolchains W
306. r That number can be changed without affecting any license However it must never be changed while the license server daemon is running If it has been changed change it back to the original value If you do not know the original number anymore restart the license server daemon after typing the following command on the license server host kill PID where PID is the process id of Imgrd Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 37 6 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS FAGS 6 1 LICENSE FILE QUESTIONS I ve received FLEXIm license files from 2 different companies Do I bave to combine tbem You don t have to combine license files Each license file that has any counted lines the number of licenses field is 20 requires a server It s perfectly OK to have any number of separate license files with different Imgrd server processes supporting each file Moreover since Imgrd is a lightweight process for sites without system administrators this is often the simplest and therefore recommended way to proceed With v6 Imgrd Imdown Imreread you can stop reread restart a single vendor daemon of any FLEXIm version This makes combining licenses more attractive than previously Also if the application is v6 using dir lic for license file management behaves like combining licenses without physically combining them When is it recommended to combine license files Many system administrators especially for larger
307. r example a function is residing in ROM storage type but the logical type is the return type of this function The most obvious C type having different storage and logical type is a pointer For example _P char _X p pointer residing in X pointing to P means p has storage type _x allocated in RAM but has logical type character in target memory space P The memory type specifier used left to the specifies the target memory of the pointer the memory specifier used right to the specifies the storage memory of the pointer The memory type specifiers are treated like any other type specifier like unsigned This means the pointer above can also be declared exactly the same using char _P _X p pointer residing in X pointing to ROM P If the target memory and storage memory of a pointer are not explicitly declared c563 uses the default _x storage specifier You can overrule the default memory with the M command line option In pointer arithmetic c563 checks besides the type of each pointer also the target memory of the pointers which must be the same For example it is invalid and has no use to assign a pointer to X to a pointer to _L Of course an appropriate cast corrects the error 3 10 INTEGER DIVISION AND MODULO If you divide a negative number by a positive one there are two possible outputs one smaller than the actual 1oat value one larger than it and they have different modul
308. r c a 1 word in P memory and 1 word in X memory const int k 400 1 word in X memory Ff 3 7 TYPE QUALIFIER VOLATILE You can use the volatile type gualifier when modifications on the object have undesired side effects when they are performed in the regular way It may be undesired that the compiler attempts to optimize a memory update by keeping the value in a register e g a hardware register When a variable is declared with the volatile qualifier the compiler disables such optimizations The ANSI standard describes that the updates of volatile objects follow the rules of the abstract machine the target processor and thus access to a volatile object becomes implementation defined Example const volatile _X int real time clock at 0x1200 J define a memory mapped real time clock register it is read only const read operations must access the real memory location volatile ey 3 26 Chapter 3 3 8_ STRINGS In this section the word strings means the separate occurrence of a string in a C program So array variables initialized with strings are just initialized character arrays which can be allocated in any memory type and are not considered as strings See section nitialized Variables for more information on this topic Strings have static storage The ANSI X3 159 1989 standard permits string literals to be put in ROM c563 offers the possibility to allocate a static initial
309. r differences are noted in the table below Conversion between the IEEE standard format and this format is straight forward Characteristic 2 Complement IEEE Format Format Mantissa Precision 24 bits 24 bit models 23 bits 16 bit models 15 bits Hidden Leading One No Yes Mantissa Format 23 bit Unsigned Magnitude 24 bit models 24 bit Two s Fraction Complement Fraction 16 bit models 16 bit Two s Complement Fraction Exponent Width 8 bits 8 bits single Maximum Exponent 1128 4127 single Minimum Exponent 127 127 single Exponent Bias 127 127 single Format Width 32 bits single 24 bit models 48 bits 16 bit models 32 bits Rounding Round to Nearest Round to Nearest default Round to Infinite Round to Zero Infinity Arithmetic Saturation Limiting Affine Operations Denormalized Numbers No Forced to Zero Yes With Minimum Exponent Exceptions Divide by Zero Divide by Zero Overflow Overflow Underflow Underflow Invalid Operations Inexact Arithmetic Table 7 10 IEEE 754 Comparison Run time Environment 7 25 As shown in the table the 2 complement floating point mantissa precision is one bit 2 bit models or nine bits 16 bit models less than the IEEE single precision format This is a result of using two s complement arithmetic If exponent overflow occurs the result is limited to the maximum representable floating point num
310. racter c Returns s 6 42 Chapter 6 i mktime include lt time h gt EAMG Te MEANS Seu i jo P Converts the local time in the structure tp into calendar time Returns the calendar time or 1 if it cannot be represented modf include lt math h gt double modf double x double ip Splits x into integral and fractional parts each with the same sign as x It stores the integral partin ip Returns the fractional part offsetof finclude lt stddef h gt int offsetof type member Returns the offset for the given member in an object of type perror include lt stdio h gt WOE perro const Ghar Ss p Prints s and an implementation defined error message corresponding to the integer errno as if by fprintf stderr 96s s n s error message The contents of the error message are the same as those returned by the strerror function with the argument errno qb See also the strerror function Returns nothing Libraries 6 43 pow include lt math h gt double pow double x double y A domain error occurs if x 0 and y lt 0 or if x 0 and y is not an integer Returns the result of x raised to the power of y xY printf finclude stdio h IME joue3uewEit COMMS Clheie IKOWMENE ass Performs a formatted write to the standard output stream qo See also write and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines Returns the number of characters writt
311. ragma asm or asm noflush pragma asm pragma endasm blocks cannot be nested Use pragma endasm before starting a new pragma asm fpragma endasm block Compiler Diagnostics 5 31 E 215 Zpragma endasm without a Zpragma asm A pragma endasm must always have a corresponding pragma asm Or fpragma asm noflush W 303 variable name possibly uninitialized Possibly an initialization statement is not reached while a function should return something The following is an example of this warning int a int f void int i i 0 statement not reached return i warning E 327 too many arguments to pass in registers for asmfunc name An asmfunc function uses a fixed register based interface between C and assembly but the number of arguments that can be passed is limited by the number of available registers With function name this limit was reached F 347 Error in constraints for inline assembly Wrong register size or no memory or immediate possible The variable does not fit into the register specified or the variable can not be referenced in memory m opererand constraint or the expression does not yield an immediate value i operand constraint F 348 Error in constraints for inline assemly Numeric constraint opr nbr number out of range Operand number nbr is not defined in constraint F 349 Error in constraints for inline assembly Second numeric constraint to the same output W 358 User stack
312. ragma unknown W 201 name cannot have storage type ignored A register variable or an automatic parameter cannot have a storage type To eliminate this warning remove the storage type or place the variable outside a function E 202 mame is declared with void parameter list You cannot call a function with an argument when the function does not accept any void paramcter list The following is an example of this error 5 30 Chapter 5 int f void void parameter list main int 2 i f i error i f OK 203 too many few actual parameters With prototyping the number of arguments of a function must agree with the protoype of the function The following is an example of this error int f int one parameter main int i i f i i error one too many i f i OK 204 U suffix not allowed on floating constant ignored A floating point constant cannot have a U or u suffix 205 F suffix not allowed on integer constant ignored An integer constant cannot have a F or f suffix 206 name named bit field cannot have 0 width A bit field must be an integral contstant expression with a value greater than zero 212 name missing static function definition A function with a static prototype misses its definition 213 invalid string character constant in non active part of source This part of the source is skipped 214 second occurrence of p
313. rary function calling convention Operation Function Input operand s Result Add addf2 fac ftm1 fac Subtract subf2 fac ftm1 fac Multiply mulf2 fac ftm1 fac Divide divf2 fac ftm1 fac Multiply Accumulate macpf2 fac ftm1 ftm2 fac Multiply Accumulate macnf2 fac ftm1 ftm2 fac Compare cmpf2 fac ftm1 CCR Negate negf2 fac fac Table 7 11 Floating point aritbmetic operations 7 28 Chapter 7 Operation Function Input operand s Result Signed Integer to Float cif12 A fac Signed Long to Float cif22 A fac Unsigned Integer to Float cuf12 A fac Unsigned Long to Float cuf22 A fac Fract to Float cr 12 A fac Long Fract to Float crf22 A fac Float to Signed Integer cfi21 fac A Float to Signed Long cfi22 fac A Float to Unsigned Integer cfu21 fac A Float to Unsigned Long cfu22 fac A Float to Fract cfr21 fac A Float to Long Fract cfr22 fac A Table 7 12 Floating point conversion operations 7 8 2 2 THE FLOATING POINT ACCUMULATORS The software floating point libraries for the DSP56xxx are based on the 2 Complement Format which is fully optimized for fast and efficient floating point operations The floating point values are stored in so called floating point accumulators Three accumulators are necessary to perform all the floating point operations they are called fac ftm1 and ftm2 Accumulator fac is used for passing operand 1 r
314. re loop Example void f unsigned short max unsigned short i j for i 0 3 0 i lt max i j atil pJ no hardware loop created for i 0 j 0 i lt max jt itt afi b 3 hardware loop created 3 86 Chapter 3 i 3 23 4 SPEED VS SIZE The C compiler optimizations are by default tuned for code size When execution speed is more important than code size you can use the O3 or O4 command line option to let the compiler optimize for speed The optimization options can also be changed using the pragma optimize For example pragma optimize 4 optimize for speed some C code to be esr optimized for speed fpragma endoptimize back to optimization set before the pragma optimize 3 23 5 ASSEMBLY INTERFACING The pragma asm can be used to get access to specific DSP56xxx instructions or to write code that cannot be achieved using the C language For interfacing the C language to assembly it is recommended to use a function call interface with the _asmfunc function qualifier With pragma asm it is unsafe to rely on the registers the compiler allocates for the variables See section 3 12 Inline Assembly and section 3 12 4 Linking witb Separate Assembly Routines for more information The compiler also features intrinsic functions that can be used to get access to some special DSP56xxx instructions These functions have the advantage of being portable and they have a neat
315. re not needed for the demo program because the files calc c and makefile are already open To load the file you want to look at 1 From the Project menu select Load Files The Choose Project Files to Edit dialog appears 2 24 OVERVIEW Chapter 2 Choose Project Files to Edit CAtargetNexamplestdemotwelcome tst C I O CAtargetNexamplessdemo addone asm CAtargetNexamplestdemolk MibsreNstart asm 2 Choose the file s you want to open by clicking on it You can select multiple files by pressing the Ctrl or Shift key while you click on a file With the Ctr1 key you can make single selections and with the Shift key you can select everything from the first selected file to the file you click on Then click OK This launches the file s so you can edit it them Check tbe directory paths 1 From the Project menu select Directories The Directories dialog appears Directories c target bin c target include c myine c MargelMib Gtarfirstezna Gl project Glec aY Overview 2 25 2 Check the directory paths for programs include files and libraries You can add your own directories here separated by semicolons 3 Click OK How to Select a CPU Type The next step is to compile the file s together with its dependent files so you can debug the application But first you need to specify for which CPU type you want to build your applicat
316. re stack entries To avoid the calculation for this you can also choose not to use the stack extension Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation Disable the Use hardware stack extension check box Or with the compiler command line option Mn This ignoring of the stack extension does not set a control register bit Only the function return address is saved restored to from the user stack see section 7 6 Stack The effect is that the internal hardware stack is bypassed for function calls and as such cannot overflow Do loops cannot be bypassed but you can limit them Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation Disable the Use hardware stack extension check box and type a number in the Max hardware stack use outside interrupt functions field Run time Environment 7 19 Or with the compiler option ess Lnumber Ignoring the hardware stack extension decrease execution speed because user calls must be saved and restored on the user stack as well Furthermore nested hardware do loops become restricted Since function calls are being preserved the user stack size will naturally increase as will code size All this pleads for using the hardware stack extension 7 7 HEAP The heap is only needed when dynamic memory management library functions are used malloc calloc free and reallo
317. re the function A pragma optimize number must be specified outside a function body The optimization level of each optimize pragma is described for each flag of the O option endoptimize End a region that was optimized with a pragma optimize The pragma endoptimize restores the situation as it was before the corresponding pragma optimize pragma optimize endoptimize pairs can be nested pack_strings After this pragma all string constants will be packed string constants Using such a string as a not packed string e g passing to a function with a not packed string argument type will yield a type conflict error nopack_strings After this pragma string constants will no longer be packed string constants d gt The section 3 18 Packed Strings contains more information about packed strings source Same as s option Enable mixing C source with assembly code nosource Default Disable generation of C source within assembly code Compiler Use 4 5 ALIAS CHECKING When alias checking is turned on OA option the compiler assumes that each pointer may point to any object created in the program so when any pointer is dereferenced all register contents are assumed to be invalid afterwards When it is known that aliasing problems do not occur in the written C source alias checking may be relaxed Oa option or Zpragma optimize a This is the default Note that the option Oc or pragma optimize c must
318. re the function using the macro va_start is terminated ANSI specification va_start include lt stdarg h gt we start we list aj lastare This macro initializes ap After this call each call to va_arg will return the value of the next argument In our implementation va_list cannot contain any bit type variables Also the given argument lastarg must be the last non bit type argument in the list Libraries 6 65 ufprintf include lt stdio h gt int viprintt FILE stream COMMS chat SEO va lige arc p Is equivalent to vprintf but writes to the given stream qe See also vprintf write and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines vprintf finclude stdio h iba wapxexnanEit Const Caas TOME we Je eue p Does a formatted write to standard output Instead of a variable argument list as for printf this function expects a pointer to the list qo See also printf write and section Prinif and Scanf Formatting Routines vsprintf finclude lt stdio h gt IME Were CE Char Ss const Clee iesu Wen lae cues Dp Does a formatted write a string Instead of a variable argument list as for printf this function expects a pointer to the list d gt See also printf _write and section Printf and Scanf Formatting Routines 6 66 Chapter 6 i wcstombs finclude lt stdlib h gt size_t wcstombs char s GOMSE Wyn 15 ONE ume Te m Jp Converts a
319. reprocessor macro Umacro Allocation control options Specify depth of hardware stack use Lnumber Change default section name R dname zsname Specify size of cache sectors for the DSP563xx csize Reserve a register for external use rregister Code generation options Select memory model mixed static or reentrant M ml s r x y l p L Select default memory space X Y or P Specify stack not in L memory only for c56 Select memory model 24 bit 16 24 bit 16 bit or M 24 1624 16 6 DSP566xx Do not use hardware stack extension n xlyll p L Select default memory space X Y L or P Specify stack not in L memory only for c563 Control optimization Oflag Compile for silicon mask mmask Specify number of Patriot memory pages ppage Identical to pragma pragma in the C source zpragma Language control options Control language extensions Control compatibility options Treat all char variables as signed Output file options Remove output file if compiler errors occur Send output to standard output Compiler Use 4 9 Description Specify name of output file o file Merge C source code with assembly output S Merge C source code and included files with si assembly output Diagnostic options Display invocation syntax Display version header only V Send diagnostics to error list file err err Ties symbolic debug information unless
320. reserve a list of registers by supplying a r option to the compiler for each register to be reserved Besides the user stack pointer registers at least one combination of R and N registers must be kept free for compiler use Example The following example reserves r5 m5 and n5 while translating example c c563 rr5 rn5 example c Compiler Use 4 75 Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Output Enable the Merge C source file with assembly output check box E si Pragma source Description Merge C source code with generated assembly code in output file With the optional sub option you can specify to merge the lines of included files as well This is useful when included files generate program code In general it will only create longer source files due to expansion of all header files Example c563 s test c test ec int i lint main void U e w PN ER extern F_START global Fmain d gt Pragmas source and nosource in section Pragmas 4 76 Chapter 4 Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Output Enable the Display lines min check box Ea Description Display the number of lines processed and the compilation speed in lines per minute Example c563 t test c processed 180 lines at 8102 lines min Compiler Use 4 77 Select the Project Project Options
321. ring are large If you do not use all the possibilities of the format specifiers a smaller _doprint function can be used Three different versions exist LARGE the full formatter no restrictions MEDIUM floating point printing is not supported SMALL as MEDIUM but also the precision specifier cannot be used The same applies to all scanf type functions which all call the function _doscan The formatters included in the libraries are LARGE You can select different formatters by linking separate objects of _doscan and _doprint with your application The following objects are included For the DSP563xx lib 563xx libc1l6 _doprnts obj doprint 16 bit model SMALL formatter _doprntm obj doprint 16 bit model MEDIUM formatter _doscans obj _doscan 16 bit model SMALL formatter lib 563xx libc1624 doprnts obj doprint 16 24 bit model SMALL formatter _doprntm obj _doprint 16 2 bit model MEDIUM formatter doscans obj doscan 16 24 bit model SMALL formatter lib 563xx libc24 _doprnts obj doprint 24 bit model SMALL formatter _doprntm obj doprint 24 bit model MEDIUM formatter doscans obj _doscan 24 bit model SMALL formatter 6 68 Chapter 6 i For the DSP566xx lib 566xx libc6 _doprnts obj _doprint SMALL formatter _doprntm obj doprint MEDIUM formatter _doscans obj doscan SMALL formatter For the DSP5600x 1ib 5600x libcm _doprnts obj doprint m
322. rrupt which can be seen as special type gualifiers only allowed with function declarations A function can be declared to serve as an interrupt service routine Interrupt functions cannot return anything and must have a void argument type list For example in void _long interrupt vector l isr void Lose oj void fast interrupt vector f isr void we jJ The compiler will generate an interrupt service frame for long interrupts and no frame in case of fast interrupts The vector specifies the interrupt number of a two word interrupt vector area Some interrupts are reserved and handled or used by the compiler run time library like e Hardware RESET used for C main e Stack Error a default handling The interrupt vector 1 is reserved for a so called symbolic interrupt This means that c563 does not assign an interrupt number to this C function Symbolic interrupts can only be used with 1ong interrupt When the fast interrupt modifier is used e The compiler will not use instructions that modify the status register The compiler will not use any register e The compiler may generate at most 2 words coding this is checked after optimization in the assembler e If the compiler detects that it is impossible to generate a fast interrupt function it generates a long interrupt function In this case the compiler gives a warning message All other errors will only be detected in the assembly phase Language Im
323. rtant to have a compiler that generates loops as fast as possible by making use of the hardware loop instructions and by making use of the parallel move capability of the DSP The actual hardware DO to REP optimization is performed by the assembler See also the section Optimizations of the chapter Assembler in the DSP56xxx Cross Assembler User s Guide Overview 2 11 Take for instance the next C fragment _fract fir filter fract data _fract Y coef long _fract result ine abs result 0 0 for i 0 i lt 100 i result data i long _fract coef i return _round result The loop is recognized as a simple loop and the array references are interpreted as post increment pointers The code will be internally rewritten by the compiler as result 0 0 tmpl data tmp2 coef for i 0 i lt 100 i result tmplt tmp2 Because of the very powerful addressing modes of the DSP families the pointer dereference and the auto increment are easy to implement The index i is not used anymore and will be optimized away The compiler generates assembly code similar to the following code the last column gives the code size in words and the execution time in clock cycles clr a Clear result Ll do 100 L5 Hardware do loop VES move x r0 x0 Get an element of data dg qe move y r4 y0 Get an element of coef Tb mac x0 y0 a Multiply and accumulate duy L5
324. s from the run time library are stored in special sections rttext petext and zerotext to allow precise locating of these routines 6 8_ FLOATING POINT LIBRARY The DSP56xxx does not have a hardware floating point unit so floating point calculations must be emulated in software The floating point routines are stored in the floating point library For a detailed description of the floating point format see chapter 7 The floating point library is reentrant and independent of the memory model except for the data precision 16 or 2 bit All routines from the floating point library are stored in a special section ptext to allow precise locating of these routines Floating point library functions have no prepended F their names start with Rfp 6 70 LIBRARIES Chapter 6 RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT ail TASKING d3iLdVHO Run time Environment 7 3 7 1 STARTUP CODE When linking your C modules with the C library you can automatically link the object module containing the C startup code The name of this module depends on the selected execution environment target selection in EDE or command line option T of the control program A large set of predefined target modules is supplied already See below for information how to create support files for a user designed target board All of these modules define a list of values used to initialize the hardware correctly and include the file cstart
325. s moved outside the loop y void main void char x y a b int i for i20 i lt 20 i x a t b y a t b Compiler Use 4 49 Oc Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 50 Chapter 4 Oj OJ Selectthe Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Cache global variables in functions E Oj 0J Pragma optimize j optimize J on function level Default Oj Description With Oj the compiler will cache a global variable in a register in some situations The compiler detects when a global variable is accessed multiple times without being changed by other routines and creates a local variable to temporarily contain the global Afterwards the local variable is written back to the global This speeds up access to global variables With OJ all updates of a global variable are directly written to memory Examples Compile with OJ O0 sum is updated twice Compile with Oj O0 sum is updated only once a int sum void add int a int b sum a sum b qo Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 51 OI OL Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Generate fast loops
326. se setbuf is equivalent to void setvbuf stream buf IOFBF BUFSIZ d gt See also setvbuf setjmp finclude lt setjmp h gt int setjmp jmp buf env Saves the current environment for a subsequent call to longjmp Returns the value 0 after a direct call to setjmp Calling the function Iongjmp using the saved env will restore the current environment and jump to this place with a non zero return value Because of the low level nature of this routine it will not work correctly with the Cc switch all functions compatible With minor changes to adapt it to the compatible calling convention this can be changed but it cannot run under both calling conventions On the DSP563xx this routine will also fail when the stack extension is in use and the required stack level is located in the extension area qo See also lIongjmp 6 52 Chapter 6 i setlocale include lt locale h gt char setlocalte int category const ehar llc ate Selects the appropriate portion of the program s locale as specified by the category and locale arguments Returns the string associated with the specified category for the new locale if the selection can be honored null pointer if the selection cannot be honored setvbuf finclude lt stdio h gt ij setvbuf FILE stream char buf int mode size t size Controls buffering for the st ream this function must be called before reading or writing mode can ha
327. sequence of codes that correspond to multi byte characters from the array pointed to by pwcs into a sequence of multi byte characters that begins in the initial shift state and stores these multi byte characters into the array pointed to by s stopping if a multi byte character would exceed the limit of n total bytes or if a null character is stored Returns the number of bytes modified not including a terminating null character if any or size t 1 if a code is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multi byte character wctomb finclude lt stdlib h gt ime wWeromol lys Ss wyclmeue e wehe p Determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multi byte corresponding to the code whose value is wchar including any change in the shift state It stores the multi byte character representation in the array pointed to by s if s is not a null pointer At most MB CUR MAX characters are stored If the value of wchar is zero the wctomb function is left in the initial shift state Returns the number of bytes or 1 if the value of wchar does not correspond to a valid multi byte character Libraries 6 67 6 6 3 PRINTF AND SCANF FORMATTING ROUTINES The functions printf fprintf vfprintf vsprintf call one single function that deals with the format string and arguments This function is _doprint This is a rather big function because the number of possibilities of the format specifiers in a format st
328. sites prefer to combine license files to ease administration of FLEXlIm licenses It s purely a matter of preference Does FLEXIm bandle dates in tbe year 2000 and beyond Yes The FLEXIm date format uses a 4 digit year Dates in the 20th century 19xx can be abbreviated to the last 2 digits of the year xx and use of this feature is guite widespread Dates in the year 2000 and beyond must specify all 4 year digits 6 2 FLEXLM VERSION Which FLEXIm versions does TASKING deliver For Windows we deliver FLEXlm v6 1 and for UNIX we deliver v2 4 A 38 Appendix A I have products from several companies at various FLEXIm version levels Do I have to worry about how these versions work together If you re not combining license files from different vendors the simplest thing to do is make sure you use the tools especially lmgrd that are shipped by each vendor Imgrd will always correctly support older versions of vendor daemons and applications so it s always safe to use the latest version of Imgrd and the other FLEXIm utilities If you ve combined license files from 2 vendors you must use the latest version of Imgrd If you ve received 2 versions of a product from the same vendor you must use the latest vendor daemon they sent you An older vendor daemon with a newer client will cause communication errors Please ignore letters appended to FLEXIm versions i e v2 4d The appended letter indicates a patch and does NOT in
329. sponding array paramcters of compatible function types must have the same size This error is usually followed by informational message I 111 The following is an example of this error int f int 2 int f int 3 error E 108 different types Corresponding parameters must have compatible types and the type of each prototype parameter must be compatible with the widened definition parameter This error is usually followed by informational message I 111 The following is an example of this error int f int int f long error different type in parameter list E 109 floating point constant out of valid range A floating point constant must have a value that fits in the type to which it was assigned See section Data Types for the valid range of a floating point constant The following is an example of this error float d 10E9999 error too big E 110 function cannot return arrays or functions A function may not have a return type that is of type array or function A pointer to a function is allowed The following are examples of this error typedef int F F error typedef int A 2 A g error I 111 parameter list does not match earlier prototype Check the parameter list or adjust the prototype The number and type of parameters must match This message is preceded by error E 106 E 107 or E 108 E 112 parameter declaration must include identifier If the declarator is a prot
330. st the reason that the daemon has exited EXPIRED feature feature has passed its expiration date IN feature by user N licenses used d hh mm ss mm dd yy bb mm user has checked back in N licenses of feature at mm dd yy bb mm IN server died feature by user number licenses used d bb mm ss mm dd yy bb mm user has checked in N licenses by virtue of the fact that his server died License Manager server started The license daemon was started Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 27 Lost connection to bost A daemon can no longer communicate with its peer on node Post which can cause the clients to have to reconnect or cause the number of daemons to go below the minimum number in which case clients may start exiting If the license daemons lose the connection to the master they will kill all the vendor daemons vendor daemons will shut themselves down Lost quorum The daemon lost quorum so will process only connection requests from other daemons MASTER SERVER died due to signal nun The license daemon received fatal signal nnn MULTIPLE xxx servers running Please kill and restart license daemon The license daemon has detected that multiple copies of vendor daemon xxx are running The user should kill all xxx daemon processes and re start the license daemon OUT feature by user N licenses mm dd yy bb mm user has checked out N licenses of feature at mm dd yy hh mm Removing clients of children
331. start creg This example assumes that the loop fits in one cache sector Therefore only the start address is locked in the cache Language Implementation 3 75 Example 2 This example shows how to lock a function from another module This example does not assume that the whole function fits in one cache sector Module A void _cache_region sample void Module B extern void _cache_region sample void void main void void _P p for p _cache_get_start sample p lt cache get end sample p CACHE SECTOR SIZE plock p for cache get start sample p p lt _cache_get_end sample p _CACHE_SECTOR_SIZE 3 17 PATRIOT BANK SWITCHING SUPPORT The banked program memory feature of the Patriot chips DSP56622 DSP56671 DSP56679 DSP56690 DSP56691 DSP56694 is supported with the bank keyword A bank is combination of a particular address range and a page number _bank range page range a number from 0 to 3 corresponding to the following available address ranges 3 76 Chapter 3 range address range 0 0X8000 0X9FFF 1 0XA000 0XBFFF 2 0XC000 0XDFFF 3 OXE000 0XEFFF Table 5 7 Address ranges page a number of 0 or 7 corresponding to the page a function should be located in Use the command line option ppage to specify the total number of pages page is 1 8 Default is tw
332. sters Upon return the callee must reset all modifier registers to linear addressing except MO if it is used to return a circular pointer Of course the stacks must remain balanced between call and return In the compatible calling convention entered with either the keyword _compatible or with the global option Cc the parameter passing changes to the convention used by the Motorola C compiler The first two parameters are passed in registers A and B and the return value is always in register A Upon return of a value the processor status flags are set by the callee according to the return value The registers YO Y1 R2 N2 R3 N3 R7 and N7 are preserved by the callee To be completely compatible with the Motorola compiler the stack pointer must be chosen to be R6 Cr and the right default memory space must be selected Run time Environment The compiler uses a convention to pass parameters in registers and on the stack to save certain registers over a function call and to return values in certain registers or on the stack In the compatible calling convention several registers must be preserved in a function The set of registers is different for the members of the DSP56xxx family as shown in the table below Family Parameter Registers to be Return Register Member Registers preserved by callee DSP5600x None all on stack B1 BO X1 X0 Y1 A except when YO RO R5 R7 returning a When returning a struct union
333. t ime close amie t l Low level file close function _close is used by the function fclose The given file descriptor should be properly closed any buffer is already flushed The delivered library is targeted at TASKING or Motorola FSS File System Simulation The source file contains versions for TASKING and Motorola FSS and an empty function This function must be customized to perform I O on different file systems See the file close c in the libNsrc directory for the example implementations of this low level close function _filbuf include lt stdio h gt LNE dE aL TLISBHE ig YD Low level file input function Read a character from a file buffering when necessary Filling the buffer is done through calls to read Returns the character written or EOF Jflsbuf finclude lt stdio h gt abit elagu amie lex yp Low level file output function Write a character to a file flushing the buffer when necessary Flushing is done through calls to _ write Returns the character written or EOF Libraries 6 15 fopen finclude lt stdio h gt FILE _fopen const char filename const char mode PII ue g Low level file open function Opens a file with name filename and access type mode in iop fopen is used by the functions fopen and freopen and in turn passes control to open Note that for text modes the file functions will work on character basis whereas for binary modes they will wor
334. t also described in the ANSI X3 159 1989 standard The scanner phase The scanner converts the preprocessor output to a stream of tokens The parser phase The tokens are fed to a parser for the C grammar The parser performs a syntactic and semantic analysis of the program and generates an intermediate representation of the program The frontend optimization phase Target processor independent optimization is performed by transforming the intermediate code The next section discusses the frontend optimizations backend The backend optimization phase Performs target processor specific optimizations Very often this means another transformation of the intermediate code and actions like register allocation techniques for variables expression evaluation and the best usage of the addressing modes The chapter Language Implementation discusses this item in more detail 2 6 Chapter 2 t The code generator phase This phase converts the intermediate code to an internal instruction code representing the DSP56xxx assembly instructions The peephole optimizer pipeline scheduler phase This phase uses pattern matching techniques to perform peephole optimizations on the internal code e g deleting obsolete moves The pipeline scheduler reorders and combines instructions to minimize the number of instructions Finally the peephole optimizer translates the internal instruction code into assembly code for as563 The generated
335. t be an approriate seguence number Refer to you operating system documentation for more information 1 5 6_ MODIFYING THE LICENSE FILE LOCATION The default location for the license file on Windows is c AflexlmNMlicense dat On UNIX this is usr local flexlm licenses license dat If you want to use another name or directory for the license file each user must define the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE Do this in autoexec bat Windows 95 98 from the Control Panel System Environment Windows NT or in a UNIX login script If you have more than one product using the FLEXIm license manager you can specify multiple license files to the LM LICENSE FILE environment variable by separating each pathname path with a on UNIX also Example Windows set LM LICENSE FILE c MflexlmMlicense dat c Mlicense txt Software Installation 1 17 Example UNIX setenv LM LICENSE FILE usr local flexlm licenses license dat myprod license txt If the license file is not available on these hosts you must set LM LICENSE FILE to port host where host is the host name of the system which runs the FLEXIm license manager and port is the TCP IP port number on which the license manager listens To obtain the port number look in the license file at Host for a line starting with SERVER The fourth field on this line specifies the TCP IP port number on which the license server listens For example setenv LM LICEN
336. t i Compiler Use 4 47 Oh OH Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Hardware loop generation E Oh OH Pragma optimize h optimize H on function level Default Oh Description With Oh you enable the use of hardware loops Note that this option must be on to use the Or option With OH c563 will not use hardware DO REP loops Example Compile with OH 00 software loop is used Compile with Oh 00 hardware DO loop is used x int cumu void main void int i for i 0 i lt 1000 irr cumu cumu i qo Section Hardware DO and REP Loops Pragma optimize in section Pragmas 4 48 Chapter 4 Oi Ol Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Move invariant code outside loop requires CSE G oi OI Pragma optimize i optimize I on function level Default Oi Description With Oi you move invariant code outside a loop With OI you disable moving invariant code outside a loop amp The option Oc must be on to use the Oi option Example Compile with OI Oc 00 normal cse is done Compile with Oi Oc 00 invariant code is found in the loop code i
337. t in an int anymore E 145 requires enclosing curly braces A complex initializer needs enclosing curly braces For example int a 2 is not valid but int a 2 is E 146 argument 2umber memory spaces do not match With prototypes the memory spaces of arguments must match 5 22 Chapter 5 W 147 argument Zznumber different levels of indirection With prototypes the types of arguments must be assignment compatible The following code generates this warning int i void func int int func 1 amp i warning argument 2 148 argument number struct union type does not match With prototypes both the prototyped function argument and the actual argument was a struct or union but they have different tags The tag types should match The following is an example of this warning f struct s prototype main struct int i t f t t has other type than s 149 object name has zero size A struct or union may not have a member with an incomplete type The following is an example of this error struct struct unknown m s error 150 argument number pointers to different types With prototypes the pointer types of arguments must be compatible The following example generates this warning int f int long 1 l warning 151 ignoring memory specifier Memory specifiers for a struct union or enum are ignored 152 operands of operator are not pointing to
338. te hardware DO loops for the highest levels Example The compiler is called as follows c563 L4 example c The code in example c is for depth 1 no hardware DO loop FOE C ean 3 depth 2 hardware DO loop stack level 2 for depth 3 hardware DO loop stack level 4 2 14 Chapter 2 i 2 2 4 4 BITFIELDS The DSP56xxx instruction set contains several instructions to do fast operations on a single bit The c563 C compiler will use these functions for operations on bitfields Example struct unsigned int b 1 a a b 1 Generated code bset 0 x Fa Where Fa is the start address of the structure 2 2 4 5 MAC INSTRUCTION GENERATION The compiler will generate the multiply accumulate instructions for multiplications whenever possible and useful See section 2 2 4 3 Hardware DO and REP Loops for an example 2 2 4 6 ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING MODE USAGE For accessing static and global objects the compiler will use absolute addressing modes whenever possible When the object is defined as _near see section Storage Specifiers the compiler will use short addressing modes when the used instruction has such an addressing mode Overview 2 3 COMPILER STRUCTURE If you want to build a DSP56xxx application you need to invoke the following programs directly or via the control program One of the C compilers c56 or c563 will generate an assembl
339. ted by the compiler When the same variable is allocated within another module but on a different address the compiler assembler or linker will not notice e When the variable is declared static no public symbol will be generated normal C behavior e Absolute variables cannot be initialized except for absolute variables declared in rom e Functions cannot be declared absolute e Absolute variables cannot overlap each other declaring two absolute variables on the same address will cause an error generated by the assembler or by the linker The compiler does not check this e Declaring the same absolute variable within two modules will also produce conflicts during link time except when one of the modules declares the variable extern Language Implementation 3 15 3 3_ DATA TYPES All ANSI C data types are supported except double and long double which both are evaluated as floats In addition to these types the _fract long _fract enum and _ complex types are added Object size and ranges for all DSP56xxx families are given in tables 3 2 and 3 3 DSP563xx 6xx 16 bit DSP563xx 24 bit DSP563xx 16 24 bit Data Type Size Range Size Range Size Range bit bit bit signed char 8 128 to 127 8 128 to 127 8 128 to 127 unsigned char 8 0 to 255U 8 0 to 255U 8 0 to 255U signed short 16 32768 to 32767 16 32768 to 32767 16 32768 to 432
340. ters can be done using the usual C pointer arithmetic with the difference that the pointer will wrap When the circular buffer is accessed using a circular pointer it will wrap at the buffer limits Example while Ptr to Circ Buf Indexing in the circular buffer using an integer index is treated equally to indexing in a non circular array Example int i Circ Buf 3 The index is not calculated modulo indexing outside the array boundaries yields undefined results Language Implementation Example _fract SomeVariable _fract _circ input buf 100 void func void _fract circ inPtr input buf inPtr SomeVariable the following code will be used Ffunc move Finput_buf r3 load buffer address in pointer move 100 1 m3 load modulo value move x FSomeVariable x0 get value of SomeVariable move x0 x r3 Store value at buffer location and increment pointer more actions with inPtr move m7 m3 disable modulo of m3 m7 always contains 1 in the mixed or reentrant model The moves to and from input buf will be optimized away mostly Also setting the modulo register will be done only once unless register R3 is used for another purpose that requires other or no modulo arithmetic 3 71 3 72 Chapter 3 3 16 DSP563XX CACHE SUPPORT The DSP563xx is eguipped with an instruction cache The compiler supports this cache with the features des
341. text after control Fifdef and ifndef require only one identifier Also 7else and Fendif only have a newline Zundef requires exactly one identifier 28 empty program The source file must contain at least one external definition A source file with nothing but comments is considered an empty program 29 bad include syntax A include must be followed by a valid header name syntax For example include stdio h misses the closing gt 30 include file file not found Be sure you have specified an existing include file after a Zinclude directive Make sure you have specified the correct path for the file 31 Jend of file encountered inside comment The compiler found the end of a file while scanning a comment Probably a comment was not terminated Do not forget a closing comment when using ANSI C style comments 32 argument mismatch for macro rame The number of arguments in invocation of a function like macro must agree with the number of parameters in the definition Also invocation of a function like macro requires a terminating token The following are examples of this error define A a 1 int i A 1 2 error define B b 1 int j B 1 error 33 name redefined The given identifier was defined more than once or a subsequent declaration differed from a previous one The following examples generate this error int 2 char i error main Compil
342. the packed string pointed to by p This is the number of characters when the string would be unpacked 3 78 Chapter 3 size_t _packsize const char p Calculate the size of a string when it is packed char pstr get const packed char p size t idx Return character at index idx in packed string p void pstr put packed char p size t idx char c Put character c on index idx in packed string p Printf and scanf formatters support the packed string conversion specification 96S which otherwise behaves like the normal string conversion specification 96s 3 18 2 PRAGMAS Two pragmas for packed string support are available pragma pack strings After this pragma all string constants will be packed string constants Using such a string as a not packed string e g passing to a function with a not packed string argument type will yield a type conflict error fpragma nopack strings After this pragma string constants will no longer be packed string constants 3 18 3 EXAMPLES Example 1 packed char somestring Some String void example void allocate space for unpacking char p char malloc _unpstrlen somestring 1 unpackstr p somestring printf unpacked s packed S n p somestring free p Language Implementation 3 79 Example 2 int printpstring _packed char p int idx 0 char c while c _pstr_get p putchar c return idx
343. the Optimization box Enable or disable Expression propagation requires CSE EE Oe OE Pragma optimize e optimize E on function level Default Oe Description With Oe you enable expression propagation With this option the compiler tries to find assignments of expressions to a variable a subseguent assignment of the variable to another variable can be replaced by the expression itself Note that the option Oc must be on to use this option With OE you disable expression propagation Example Compile with OE Oc 00 normal cse is done Compile with Oe Oc 00 i j is propagated Ey unsigned i j int main void static int a a i rt j return a Oc Pragma optimize in section Pragmas Compiler Use 4 43 Of OF Select the Project Project Options menu item Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Code flow optimization and order rearranging E of OF Pragma optimize f optimize F on function level Default Of Description With Of you enable control flow optimizations and code order rearranging on the intermediate code representation such as jump chaining and conditional jump reversal With OF you disable control flow optimizations 4 44 Chapter 4 i Examples The following example shows a control optimization Compile with
344. the _ internal storage qualifier high priority you force an object in internal memory If there is not enough internal memory the locator will give an error With the external storage qualifier low priority you give a preference for external memory but sections declared with external will still be located in internal memory if it is available Using internal memory means a higher performance and lower power consumption than using external memory Sections with none of the two modifiers medium priority will be located before sections created with the external memory modifier Except for _internal declared sections sections may cross the border between internal and external memory if there is no gap between them Language Implementation 3 7 Functions are allocated in program memory by default the storage specifier may be omitted in that case Also function return values cannot be assigned to a storage area The near internal and external storage qualifiers can be used to express storage preferences In addition to static storage specifiers a static object can be assigned to a fixed memory address using the _at keyword int X myvar at 0x100 This is useful to interface to object programs using fixed memory schemes It allows two objects when declared in two different memory areas to have the same starting address for which the compiler can attempt to generate more efficient code when both objects are used as operands of one
345. the option tmp prevents removal of these files For a description of all utilities available and the possible output formats of the locator see the DSP56xxx Cross Assembler User s Guide The name of the DSP56xxx CrossView Pro Debugger is xfw56x Overview 2 4 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES This section contains an overview of the environment variables used by the DSP56xxx toolchain Environment Description Variable AS56INC Specifies an alternative path for include files for the assembler as56 AS563INC Specifies an alternative path for include files for the assembler as563 C56INC Specifies an alternative path for include files for the C compiler c56 C563INC Specifies an alternative path for include files for the C compiler c563 C56LIB Specifies a path to search for library files used by the linker Ik56 C563LIB Specifies a path to search for library files used by the linker IK563 CC56BIN When this variable is set the control program cc56 prepends the directory specified by this variable to the names of the tools invoked CC563BIN When this variable is set the control program CC563 prepends the directory specified by this variable to the names of the tools invoked CC560PT Specifies extra options and or arguments to each invocation of cc56 The control program processes the arguments from this variable before the command line arguments CC5630PT Specifies extra options and or ar
346. the same memory space Be sure the operands point to the same memory space This error occurs for example when you try to assign a pointer to a pointer from a different memory space Compiler Diagnostics 5 23 E 153 sizeof zero sized object An implicit or explicit sizeof operation references an object with an unkown size This error is usually preceded by error E 119 or E 120 cannot take sizeof E 154 argument Zznumber struct union mismatch With prototypes only one of the prototyped function argument or the actual argument was a struct or union The types should match The following is an example of this error f struct s prototype main int i f i i is not a struct E 155 casting lvalue type to type is not allowed The operand of the or operator or the left operand of an assignment or compound assignment lvalue may not be cast to another type The following is an example of this error int i 3 unsigned i error cast expression is not an lvalue E 157 name is not a formal parameter If a declarator has an identifier list only its identifiers may appear in the declarator list The following is an example of this error int f i int a error E 158 right side of operator is not a member of the designated struct union The second operand of or must be a member of the designated struct or union E 160 pointer mismatch at operator Both op
347. the system administrator to remove a single user s license for a specified feature This could be required in the case where the licensed user was running the software on a node that subsequently crashed This situation will sometimes cause the license to remain unusable Imremove will allow the license to return to the pool of available licenses Imremove will remove all instances of user on node host on display display from usage of feature If the optional c file is specified the indicated file will be used as the license file Since removing a user s license can be disruptive execution of Imremove is restricted to users with root privileges Options c license file Use the specified icense_file If no c option is specified Imremove looks for the environment variable LM LICENSE FILE in order to find the license file to use If that environment variable is not set Imremove looks for the file c flexlm license dat Windows or usr local flexlm licenses license dat UNIX d gt Imstat Flexible License Manager FLEXIm A 17 3 7 LMREREAD Name Imreread tells the license daemon to reread the license file Synopsis Imreread c icense_file Description Imreread allows the system administrator to tell the license daemon to reread the license file This can be useful if the data in the license file has changed the new data can be loaded into the license daemon without shutti
348. tions 2 Use a union of the fractional and integer type Initialization with hexadecimal constants is also possible depending on which member is mentioned first 3 92 Chapter 3 For example typedef union _fract f int i fract_int fract_int val 0x123456 hex initialization int void val f 0 1 put fractional value 0 1 in val f return val i return OxCCCCC as integer 3 Use a pointer cast For example int f void _fract f 0 1 put fractional value 0 1 in f return int amp f return OxCCCCC as integer It is recommended to use fractional types whenever possible The compiler can generate the most efficient code for these types because this is the type which suites the DSP56xxx family the best For example the compiler will use the MAC instruction whenever possible also for integer multiplication To be able to do this the integer must be scaled first Language Implementation 3 93 e lextern int i move move move asl k i x Fk a0 x Fi x0 x Fj y0 a mac x0 y0 a asr move a a0 x Fk Jz j get k into a0 this must be a0 to do the MAC get i into x0 get j into y0 prepare for mac on integer scaling mac get result of mac scaling store k When this was done using the fractional type the code would be more efficient Hae lextern _fract i j k 10 k i jj move x F
349. tly as is the hardware stack Run time Environment 7 7 7 3_ CALLING CONVENTIONS The compiler will try to use the available registers as efficiently as possible The compiler uses a flexible register allocation scheme which implies that any change to the C code may result in a different register usage For passing parameters to functions the compiler uses the following scheme Arithmetic type arguments Float arguments are passed via AB X and Y long arguments are passed via A B X and Y integers are passed via A B X0 YO X1 and Y1 The order of the arguments from left to right is A B X0 YO X1 Y1 Arguments requiring the whole X or Y register e g a long are allocated in the A B X and Y register before other arguments which only need X0 X1 YO or YT Structure type arguments Single word structures are passed and returned in the same registers as integers double word structures in the same registers as floats Longer structures are passed on the stack The processor status flags are undefined upon return Pointer type arguments Pointers are passed in registers RO R4 R1 R5 R2 R6 R3 R7 and the corresponding modifier registers in case of circular pointers Except for the static model R6 or R7 is not used because it is reserved as user stack pointer Variable argument lists are passed via the stack All other arguments except the argument that immediately preceeds the variable argument list
350. token with a NULL character Returns a pointer to the token A subsequent call with s NULL will return the next token in the string strtol finclude lt stdlib h gt lome eedd Comsic ehari char endp int base Converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by s to a long integer Initial white spaces are skipped Then a value is read using the given base When base is zero the base is taken as defined for integer constants I e numbers starting with an 0 are taken octal numbers starting with Ox or OX are taken hexadecimal Other numbers are taken decimal When endp is not a NULL pointer after this function is called endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion Returns the read value Libraries 6 61 strtoul include lt stdlib h gt unsigned long strtoul GOMSE Chai GS lae E mclo ame lease p Converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by s to an unsigned long integer Initial white spaces are skipped Then a value is read using the given base When base is zero the base is taken as defined for integer constants I e numbers starting with an 0 are taken octal numbers starting with Ox or 0X are taken hexadecimal Other numbers are taken decimal When endp is not a NULL pointer after this function is called endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion Returns the read value strxfrm finclude lt string h gt si
351. truction words and 7 or 8 cycles depending on the size of the offset Using absolute addressing accessing an object reguires only 1 or 2 instruction words and 2 or 7 cycles depending on the size of the address For each function the compiler creates a separate section for parameters locals and temporary storage To minimize the memory requirements of an application the linker overlays the sections of functions that are not simultaneously active The compiler generates information about function calls so that the linker is able to construct a function call graph for the application As an example consider a function main which calls the two functions a and b The functions a and b are not simultaneously active so they may use the same memory for local storage This situation is similar to a stack based approach where two functions also use the same memory for local storage but where the memory is allocated on the stack void a int x printf a has d n x void b int x printf b has d n x void main void qs call function a b 2 a and b are not simultaneously active Using a static memory model implies that the functions are not reentrant and recursion is therefore not possible Because of the limited depth the hardware stack is only used for function return addresses and for hardware loops To further limit the hardware stack reguirements a loop is not implemented by a hardw
352. uctions that have no eguivalence in C you would be forced to write assembly routines to perform these tasks However c563 offers a way of handling this in C with a number of built in functions which are implemented as intrinsic functions Intrinsic functions appear to the programmer as normal C functions but the difference is that they are interpreted by the code generator and as a result more efficient code may be generated The names of the intrinsic functions all have a leading underscore because the ANSI specification states that public C names starting with an underscore are implementation defined The advantages of using intrinsic functions compared with inline assembly pragma asm endasm are e the possibility to use simulation routines or stub functions by a host compiler to replace the inline assembly code generated by c563 e C level variables can be accessed e the compiler chooses to generate the most efficient code to access C variables e intrinsic code is optimized except for nop The following intrinsic functions are implemented Function Description abs Absolute value of int argument _asm Generate inline assembly asm Generate inline assembly with parameter passing cache get start Get first address of cache region cache get end Get last address of cache region cadd complex addition cdiv complex division cmac complex multiply accumulate
353. uide for more information How to Start a New Project When you first use EDE you need to setup a project space and add a new project 1 From the File menu select New Project Space The Create a New Project Space dialog appears 2 Give your project space a name and then click OK The Project Properties dialog box appears 3 Click on the Add new project to project space button The Add New Project to Project Space dialog appears 4 Give your project a name and then click OK The Project Properties dialog box then appears for you to identify the files to be added 5 Add all the files you want to be part of your project Then press the OK button To add files use one of the 3 methods described below E Default Settings Directories Members Tools Errors Filters g demo 1 Project Project C target examples demo demo pit demo 0 Files Files Add new file Add existing files Scan existing files If you do not have any source files yet click on the Add new file to project button in the Project Properties dialog Enter a new filename and click OK e To add existing files to a project by specifying a file pattern click on the Scan existing files into project button in the Project Properties dialog Select the directory that contains the files you want to add to your project Enter one or more file patterns separated by semicolons The button next to the Pattern field contains some predefined p
354. uired by affine arithmetic denormalized numbers signaling Not a Number NaNs and quiet NaNs It postpones introducing computation errors by using internal signaling and user traps to process each exception condition Computational errors will be introduced by the application program if the calculation is completed instead of aborting the program This format introduces computation errors when an exception occurs in order to maintain real time execution An error flag L bit in CCR is set to inform the application program that an exception has occurred This bit will remain set until reset by the application program 7 26 Chapter 7 i 7 8 1 7 SINGLE PRECISION FLOATING POINT MEMORY USAGE The floating point mantissa and exponent may be stored in any locations in any memory space The input and output register values are organized so that the long L addressing mode may be used to load store both the mantissa and exponent with one instruction If the long addressing mode is used the mantissa is in X memory and the exponent is in Y memory at the same address 7 8 2 SOFTWARE FLOATING POINT INTERFACING This section describes how a floating point operation has to be performed using the DSP56xxx floating point library functions This contains the basic floating point operations floating point accumulator format and floating point interface functions This section does not describe the algorithms used or the implementaion considerat
355. ult but different settings may work The interrupt vectors and startup vector are placed from address 0 by the compiler so some modes will need special precautions OMR bit 16 20 stack extension settings DSP563xx only Do not change these bits after the startup code 7 5 2 STATUS REGISTER The compiler assumes all status register bits are in the reset state unless they have been set up otherwise in the startup code lib src cstart inc This does not mean that the compiled code does not work with other settings but care is needed In summary some of these bits are not present on all DSP56xxx family members SR bit 0 7 condition code register These bits are changed by just about any instruction The L bit limiting occurred is also used by the floating point library to indicate an overflow underflow condition SR bit 8 9 interrupt mask Can be set to any value but if the system timer is used for delay for instance its function may be affected see lib src clock c No other library functions use interrupts Run time Environment 7 13 SR bit 10 11 scaling mode SR bit 12 SR bit 13 SR bit 14 SR bit 15 SR bit 16 SR bit 17 SR bit 18 SR bit 19 Never used in compiled code These bits can be changed locally in assembly code but they must remain zero during execution of compiled code These bits are cleared during interrupts and restored afterwards Reserved Sixteen bit compatibi
356. user error can also be fatal marked as F in the list below which means that the compiler aborts compilation immediately after displaying the error message and may generate a not complete output file The error numbers and warning numbers are divided in two groups The frontend part of the compiler uses numbers in the range 0 to 499 whereas the backend code generator part of the compiler uses numbers in the range 500 and higher Note that most error messages and warning messages are produced by the frontend If you program a non fatal error c563 displays the C source line that contains the error the error number and the error message on the screen If the error is generated by the code generator the C source line displayed always is the last line of the current C function because code generation is started when the end of the function is reached by the frontend However in this case c563 displays the line number causing the error before the error message c563 always generates the error number in the assembly output file exactly matching the place where the error occurred So when a compilation is not successful the generated output file is not accepted by the assembler thus preventing a corrupt application to be made see also the e option Warning messages do not result into an erroneous assembly output file They are meant to draw your attention to assumptions of the compiler for a situation which may not be correct
357. uses c56 as a shorthand notation for TASKING DSP5600x C Compiler TASKING offers a complete toolchain for the Motorola DSP56xxx Family of Digital Signal Processors DSPs and their derivatives The DSP563xx 24 bit the DSP566xx 16 bit the DSP5600x 24 bit family are supported This manual uses DSP5600x to indicate the derivatives that have a 0 in the third position e g DSP56002 DSP563xx for those that have a 3 in the third position e g DSP56366 and DSP566xx along the same lines In this manual all core versions are treated identical unless implementation differences reguire otherwise DSP56xxx is used as a shorthand notation for the Motorola DSP56xxx Family of Digital Signal Processors DSPs and their derivatives The toolchain contains a C compiler a C compiler an assembler a linker a locator a control program a make utility a library maintainer an object reader utility and a debugger The C compilers are dedicated to the DSP architecture of the DSP56xxx This means that you can access all special features of the DSP56xxx in C And yet the C compiler conforms to the ANSI standard It is a single pass optimizing compiler that generates fast and compact code c563 generates assembly source code using the DSP563xx or DSP566xx assembly language specification You must assemble this code with the TASKING DSP563xx Cross Assembler This manual uses as563 as a shorthand notation for TASKING DSP563xx DSP566xx
358. ve the following values _IOFBF causes full buffering _IOLBF causes line buffering of text files _IONBF causes no buffering If buf is not NULL it will be used as a buffer otherwise a buffer will be allocated size determines the buffer size Returns zero if successful a non zero value for an error d gt See also setbuf Libraries 6 53 signal finclude lt signal h gt vorc Sigma aint SLE void handler int int Determines how subseguent signals will be handled If handler is SIG_DFL the default behavior is used if handler is SIG IGN the signal is ignored otherwise the function pointed to by handler will be called with the argument of the type of signal Valid signals are SIGABRT abnormal termination e g from abort SIGFPE arithmetic error e g zero divide or overflow SIGILLillegal function image e g illegal instruction SIGINT interactive attention e g interrupt SIGSEGV illegal storage access e g access outside memory limits SIGTERM termination reguest sent to this program When a signal sig subseguently occurs the signal is restored to its default behavior then the signal handler function is called as if by handler sig If the handler returns the execution will resume where it was when the signal occurred Returns the previous value of handler for the specific signal or SIG_ERR if an error occurs sin finclude lt math h gt double sin double x Returns the si
359. void x0 y0 r0 r4 End of loop indicate registers unused after loop rnd a Round result lyd rts Return it 1 3 2 12 Chapter 2 This results in a loop time of only 3 clock cycles The instructions within the loop are marked with an after the size timing figures But the empty move slot s are not yet used The problem is that XO and YO must be known at the start of the mac instruction It is possible to retrieve these values after the mac instruction for the next loop incarnation if the first values are obtained before the loop clr a Clear result move x r0 r x0 Get first element of data j move y r4 y0 Get first element of coef do 100 L5 Hardware do loop 2 5 mac x0 y0 a Multiply and accumulate pe move x r0 x0 Get next element of data PNE move y r4 y0 Get next element of coef EN L5 void x0 y0 r0 r4 End of loop indicate registers unused after loop rnd a Round result f rts Return it r3 At first sight this code is not better However after applying the optimization of the assembler to put instructions in parallel the result becomes clr a x r0 xO0 y r4 yO Clear result 1 1 prime loop do 100 L5 Hardware do loop 25 mac x0 y0 a x r0 x0 y r4 yO Multiply and 1 1 accumulate and get next elements of data L5 and coef rnd a Round result 1 1 rts Return it 143 In this final result the loop time is one instruction
360. y This license type locks the software to one specific PC so you can use the product on that particular PC only Floating license q This license type manages the use of TASKING product licenses among users at one site This license type does not lock the software to one specific PC or workstation but it requires a network The software can then be used on any computer in the network The license specifies the number of users who can use the software simultaneously A system allocating floating licenses is called a license server A license manager running on the license server keeps track of the number of users See the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm appendix for detailed information on FLEXlm 1 5 1 OBTAINING LICENSE INFORMATION Before you can install a software license you must have a License Information Form containing the license information for your software product If you have not received such a form follow the steps below to obtain one Otherwise you can install the license Node locked license PC only 1 If you need a node locked license you must determine the hostid of the computer where you will be using the product See section 1 5 7 How to Determine tbe Hostid Software Installation 1 11 2 When you order a TASKING product provide the hostid to your local TASKING sales representative The License Information Form which contains your license key information will be sent to you with the softw
361. y source file from the file with suffix c The suffix of the compiler output file is src However you can direct the output to stdout with the n option or to another file with the o option C source lines can be intermixed with the generated assembly statements with the s option High level language debugging information can be generated with the g option You are advised not to use the g option when inspecting the generated assembly source code because it contains a lot of unreadable high level language debug directives The C compilers make only one pass on every file This pass checks the syntax generates the code and performs code optimization One of the corresponding cross assemblers as563 as56 which process the generated assembly source file into a relocatable object file with suffix obj The 1k563 linker Ik56 for DSP5600x which links the generated relocatable object files and C libraries The result is a relocatable object file with suffix out A linker map file with suffix 1n1 is available after this stage The 1c563 locator 1c56 for DSP5600x which locates the generated relocatable object files The result is an absolute loadable file with suffix abs A full application map file with suffix map is available after this stage You can directly load the output file of the locator with extension abs into the CrossView Pro debugger The next figure explains the relationship between the different parts of the
362. y to split the nested files into simpler files 12 memory allocation error All free space has been used Free up some memory by removing any resident programs divide the file into several smaller source files break expressions into smaller subexpressions or put in more memory 13 prototype after forward call or old style declaration ignored Check that a prototype for each function is present before the actual call 14 inserted An expression statement needs a semicolon For example after i in int i i 15 missing filename after o option The o option must be followed by an output filename 16 bad numerical constant A constant must conform to its syntax For example 08 violates the octal digit syntax Also a constant may not be too large to be represented in the type to which it was assigned For example int i 0x1234567890 is too large to fit in an integer 17 string too long This error occurs if the maximum string size 1500 is reached Reduce the size of the string 18 illegal character 0xbexnumber The character with the hexadecimal ASCII value Oxbexnumber is not allowed here For example the 7 character with hexadecimal value 0x23 to be used as a preprocessor command may not be preceded by non white space characters The following is an example of this error Compiler Diagnostics 5 7 E char s S error 19 newline character in constant The newline character can appear in a c
363. you to control the special functions of the DSP5600x DSP563xx and DSP566xx in C The extensions to the C language in the C compiler are additional data types In addition to the standard data types c563 supports the fractional type _fract long fractional type long _ fract and complex data type complex at You can specify a variable to be at an absolute address _nosat You can specify a fractional variable to wrap around instead of going into saturation during calculations storage specifiers Apart from a memory category extern static you can specify a storage specifier in each declaration This way you obtain a memory model independent addressing of variables in several address ranges _X Y L PB near internal external The near internal and external modifiers can also be used on functions to force them in a specific memory region reentrant functions In the mixed model DSP5600x only you can selectively define functions as reentrant reentrant keyword Reentrant functions can be invoked recursively Interrupt programs can also call reentrant functions interrupt functions You can specify interrupt functions directly through interrupt vectors in the C language fast interrupt long interrupt keyword 3 4 Chapter 3 inline C functions You can specify to inline a function body instead of calling the function by using the inline keyword special calling conventions With the
364. ype specified The type you specified is not allowed in this context For example you cannot use the type void to declare a variable The following is an example of this error void i error 72 duplicate type modifier Type qualifiers may not be repeated in a specifier list or qualifier list The following is an example of this warning long long i error 73 object cannot be bound to multiple memories Use only one memory attribute per object For example specifying both rom and ram to the same object is not allowed 74 declaration contains more than one class specifier A declaration may contain at most one storage class specifier So register auto i is not allowed 75 continue outside a loop continue may only appear in a loop body do for or while So switch i default continue is not allowed 76 duplicate macro parameter rame The given identifier was used more than one in the formatl parameter list of a macro definition Each macro parameter must be uniquely declared 77 parameter list should be empty An identifier list not part of a function definition must be empty For example int f i j k is not allowed on declaration level 78 void should be the only parameter Within a function protoype of a function that does not except any arguments void may be the only parameter So int f void int is not allowed 5 14 E Chapter 5 79 constant expression expected A constant ex
365. ze_t Gi sea classe gue come ches CS Sume c m p Transforms the string pointed to by cs and places the resulting string into the array pointed to by ct No more than n characters are placed into the resulting string pointed to by ct including the terminating null character Returns the length of the transformed string system finclude lt stdlib h gt aln ue en COMsic ehe Ss p Passes the string s to the environment for execution Returns a non zero value if there is a command processor if s is NULL or an implementation dependent value if s is not NULL 6 62 Chapter 6 tan include lt math h gt double tan double x Returns the tangent of x tanh include lt math h gt double tanh double x Returns the hyperbolic tangent of x time include lt time h gt time_t time time_t tp The return value is also assigned to tp if tp is not NULL Returns the current calendar time or 1 if the time is not available tmpfile finclude lt stdio h gt FILE tmpfile void Creates a temporary file of the mode wb that will be automatically removed when closed or when the program terminates normally Returns a stream if successful or NULL if the file could not be created Libraries 6 63 tmpnam include lt stdio h gt char tmpnam char s L tmpnam Creates a temporary name not a file Each time tmpnam is called a different name is created tmpnam NULL creates

User Guide - v3.6r1 DSP56xxx Toolchain C Compiler

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents